Home

"user manual"

1. _f 7 l4 4 6 9 or t w iv F iL BIN ic fH ix _f 7 fn P or Lilla S 1 2 J 3 ell 4 5 J 7 Sl 8 t 9 l 0 B Quick Reference Keypad Chart continued To Enter quotes apostrophe j solid pipe i broken pipe not symbol V V degree e dot superscript 3 superscript 2 superscript circumflex grave umlaut acute tilde Press the Key s M S J or 5j or 4 OOOO jb or f Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 To Enter lp g E uv ANA g g v e aor Ov mw lo e oe m O O O ao p Press the Key s C D Oo oooeoocoeoeecoueoeooeooeoeocoeccococOlk 2 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Quick Reference Keypad Chart continued
2. To Enter Press the Key s To Enter Press the Key s t 629v I HAHU EE 69 JL A t B N f HAAA AAA HAAA HAAL HACA 2 69 Le HAAA HAAL A t 5 9 A AOA HAAL HOOL t 3 U HAAL HAAL AAA IAHE 69 9 v f HAAL Y 2 9 AL I HAH 2 14 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 How to Use the Terminal s Screen You can use the TRAKKER Antares terminal s screen to view data run applications monitor the terminal s status and for many other functions The terminal s black and white screen is 16 lines by 20 characters and is CGA compatible Icons to monitor the terminal status A amp EL E3OET First Name fiddress Citu CGA compatible a Tu display shows 16 lines by 20 characters Backlight key 242XU 122 You can use these features of the screen Inanapplication use the terminal s screen as a viewport to see a full size terminal screen of 25 lines by 80 characters e Adjust the display s backlight contrast and audio signal volume from the keypad Use the terminal s icons to monitor the status of special keys battery power RF and network communications and
3. sizeof clientAddress clientAddress sin_family PF_INET clientAddress sin port htons CLIENT_PORT clientAddress sin_addr s_addr htonl INADDR ANY if bind connection LPSOCKADDR amp clientAddress ErrorMessage bind WSAGetLastError 4 30 gethostbyname argc 2 argv 1 S ERVER HOSTNAM E phostent h length sizeof clientAddress Operating the Terminal in a Network CLIENT CPP Sample Application for a TCP IP Direct Connect Network continued attempt to connect to the server rror connect connection const SOCKADDR amp serverAddress sizeof serverAddress if error 0 ErrorMessage connect WSAGetLastError check the local name for the socket SOCKADDR IN localName memset amp localName 0 sizeof localName nt localNameLength sizeof localName error getsockname connection LPSOCKADDR amp localName amp localNameLength run the user interfac char sz 1024 char rz 1024 BOOL bConnectionAlive TRUI printf gt ys int Scount Rcount int cbRecv cbSend Scount Rcount 0 l u H Gl int cbLen rcLen nsigned char psend unsigned char sz continue while not EOF on the console and the connection is alive while bConnectionAlive send the string entered by the user printf Enter Command in printf
4. 80 5 a sso sso 1 ZM BG 1z 1 1EBSF 060010 B381 E UDP BG 7 2 1n48 8810 6618 E gt X R SSS SS 4 Lahel Task aua 4 19F6 80810 B29c 5 Serial Port 60 0 5 19B5 80810 0339 6 Menu System 62 0 6 1944 0010 BIAS 7 PM aua 7 18E3 0010 0394 8 APP aua 8 18C2 0010 B11C 9 ID 95 6 9 18A1 0016 6116 18 mmi cec exec 18 p CEnter Next screen CEnter Next screen CEsecl Exit L Esc1 Exit 242XU 131 The Time field measures the relative amount of time that a given software task or component is active For example Idle Task ID in the Power Management software is a component The Time that Idle Task is active is directly proportional to battery life You can also check the task list to determine the RF network protocol loaded on the terminal Check the list of task names for UDP or TCP IP A task name of UDP means the terminal uses the UDP Plus protocol for RF communications A task name of TCP IP means the terminal uses the TCP IP protocol for RF communications To refresh the statistics and start from a known point in time use the Clear Task Profiles diagnostic option to clear the task status counters TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Defining the Hardware Diagnostics Screens Battery Monitor Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 7 10 Each hardware diagnostic screen is defined in this section Use t
5. CC001 Interleaved 2 of 5 No Enable 2 of 5 Variable Length With a Check Digit LATI CA99 Note You can enable either Code 2 of 5 or Interleaved 2 of 5 If you enable I 2 of 5 Code 2 of 5 is automatically disabled and vice versa Getting Started 1 Bar Code Symbology Table continued Bar Code Symbology Enabled To Enable the Symbology Code 39 YES Enable Code 39 Full ASCII With No Check Digit CB111 Code 49 No Enable Code 49 CJ1 Code 93 No Enable Code 93 CF1 Code 128 YES Enable Standard Code 128 CHI1 MSI No Enable MSI Without Check Digits CN10 Plessey No Enable Plessey With Reverse Start Code CI10 UPC EAN YES Enable UPC A EAN 13 UPC E EAN 8 CE1111111 1 33 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual What s New on the TRAKKER Antares Terminals 1 34 The firmware on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals has been updated and expanded TRAKKER Antares 2420 Terminal The T2420 is a programmable data collection terminal that has a serial port to transmit data to and from a host via RS 232 serial communications In the v2 20 firmware release no additional features were added for the T2420 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminal The T2425 is a programmable data collection terminal that you can use to run terminal emulation or custom applications With the v2 20 firmware release you can use RF communications on the T2425 to communicate in ei
6. Cf Shows a series of terminal keys you must press simultaneously Also you must press and hold the keys in the order shown For example Press t 23 to reset the terminal Conventions for Bar Codes You can scan the bar codes listed in this manual to enter data or perform a command The bar code labels in this manual are printed in the Code 39 symbology Each bar code includes the name and human readable interpretation For example Change Configuration Name HAT aco Code 39 4 Human readable interpretation 242XU 146 The asterisks at the beginning and end of the human readable interpretation are the start and stop codes for a Code 39 bar code label If you are using a bar code printing utility it may automatically supply the asterisks as the start and stop code so that you only need to type the actual text of the command You can also create and print configuration labels and reader command labels in Code 93 which has its own start and stop codes xix TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual XX Conventions for Software Screens and Messages This manual includes illustrations that represent how the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals display software screens and messages Here are two examples File Name About TRAKKER 2466 N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 007 Conventions for Commands This manual in
7. SS0 151x Laser Scanners 5S3 Compatible Symbol Scanners 585 Integrated Scan Module No Aim 5S11 Integrated Long Range Long Aim 5S13 Configuration Command Reference 146x CCD Scanners 5S1 1545 Laser Scanner 554 155x Laser Scanners 4 556 Integrated Long Range Short Aim 45512 9 73 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Timeout Purpose Syntax Default Scan 9 74 Defines the maximum length of time the scanner stays after you press the Scan button or activate a cabled laser scanner SAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 60 Shutoff time in seconds Disabled no timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Scanner Timeout 4 4SA 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes ANA ANAT 0 1 INIT MAT 2 3 LAM LATE 4 5 LOL LEE 6 MA LUE LAM g 9 3 Scanthis bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ANIM A Configuration Command Reference Scanner Trigger Purpose Syntax Default Scan Scanner trigger allows you to set level triggering or edge triggering With level triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on until you release the button or the trigger on a cabled scanner e Inedge triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on When you activate the scanner a second
8. Note To scan a bar code label that includes quotes you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 earlier in this chapter No characters disabled To disable the postamble scan this bar code Disable Postamble 6 AE To set the postamble to an ASCII character string 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Postamble AE 2 Scana value for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The postamble can be from 1 to 25 characters 9 57 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Postamble continued Example Preamble 9 58 Purpose Syntax Default 3 Scanthis bar code Exit Accumulate Mode _ You want to set a postamble that includes quotation marks Enter the postamble by scanning this full ASCII bar code label Set Postamble to B AE B You must enclose the data within quotation marks and precede each quotation mark with another quotation mark so that the quotation marks are not treated as the end of the data Sets the preamble that precedes any data you scan with the terminal Common preambles include a data location number or an operator number For help on using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to configure the Preamble see Entering ASCII Control Characters in Chapter 3 Note You can set the preamble to use characters from
9. end device The device in the data collection system that you use to collect and enter data edge triggering A scanner trigger configuration that makes the laser turn on after you activate the scanner and stay on until you activate the scanner a second time Simply releasing the Scan button or trigger on a cabled scanner does not turn the laser off If the laser is left on the scanner timeout turns the laser off Contrast with level triggering EOF End of File character Attached to the last record transmitted in a block of records and after the End of Record EOR if the EOF character field is enabled Glossary G EOM End of Message character Sent at the end of terminal and host messages The transmitted and received EOM characters can be defined separately error message A message from a device or program advising the user of an error that requires intervention to solve For example if you receive the error message Unable to establish connection to host Session ended when you turn on the terminal you may need to configure the terminal ESD Electrostatic discharge Transient rapid transfer of charge between bodies at different electrostatic potentials e caused by direct contact e caused by arc over of near proximity e induced by an electrostatic field Ethernet A type of LAN that allows the transmission of computer data audio data and video data at 10 Mbps across a linear bus topology Ethernet uses t
10. gets sz if sz 0 q cbLen strlen sz cbSend send connection const char psend cbLen 0 if cbSend lt 0 Scount t printf send failed d n Scount bConnectionAlive FALSE ErrorMessage send WSAGetLastError Sleep 2000 receive the converted string from the server memset amp rz 0 sizeof rz rcLen sizeof rz cbRecv recv connection rz rcLen 0 if cbRecv 0 4 31 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual CLIENT CPP Sample Application for a TCP IP Direct Connect Network continued Rcount tt printf receive failed dWMn Rcount ErrorMessage receive WSAGetLastError bConnectionAlive FALSE Gl printf the converted string printf response s n rz printf Nn 3 Sleep 1000 else bConnectionAlive FALSI Gl release the resources held by the socket rror closesocket connection if error 0 ErrorMessage closesocket WSAGetLastError release the resources held by the socket library error WSACleanup if error 0 ErrorMessage WSACleanup WSAGetLastError return 0 UTILS H Utility Used by CLIENT CPP include lt windows h gt inline void ErrorMessage LPCTSTR szFn DWORD dwError GetLastError TCHAR szTitle 1024 TCHAR szPrompt 1024 BOOL bRet FormatMessage FORMAT MESSAG
11. Discard Number System Digit Transmit Number System Digit 1 Note If you discard the number system digit one leading digit is discarded from UPC A UPC E and EAN 8 and two leading digits are discarded from EAN 13 Optional Scan one of these bar codes to set the seventh digit Discard Leading Zero for UPC A Transmit Leading Zero for UPC A 1 Note This option applies only when you enable UPC A EAN 13 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LOL _ 9 87 Terminal Specifications Terminal Specifications A This appendix lists the terminal s physical and environmental specifications lists the default configuration and provides a configuration command reference list in alphabetical order by command syntax Physical and Environmental Specifications You can use the tables in this section to find technical information about these features and options Terminal Dimensions Power Specifications Temperature Specifications Relative Humidity Specifications Screen Keypad Options Application Options Memory Radio Frequency Communications RF Network Support Options Serial Communications Cables for Serial Communications Bar Code Symbologies Scan Module Options Standard Range Scan Module Optical Parameters Long Range Scan Module Optical Parameters Input Devices for the Module for Cabled Scanners Note For programming and file system specifications see Chapter 5 Using Custom A
12. The Battery icon turns on and remains on and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds when the main battery pack has about 5 to 45 minutes of power left e The Battery icon blinks when the backup battery charge is low e The Battery icon blinks and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds when both batteries are low The Battery icon disappears when you replace or charge the main battery pack or charge the backup battery For help see Learning About the Terminal s Batteries later in this chapter Viewport This icon appears when you move the viewport out of the upper left corner of the screen which is the viewport s home position When you move the viewport back to the home position the icon disappears 2 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Understanding the Terminal s Audio Signals speakers to sound audio signals or beep sequences as you use the terminal For example you hear a low beep tone each time you enter or scan a valid command D The TRAKKER Antares terminal and scan module have a beeper and internal You can change the beep volume to meet the needs of your working environment For example use a quiet beep in a library or a loud beep in a manufacturing plant There are two ways to change the beep volume e Use the Backlight key press t G7 on the keypad For help see Adjusting the Screen From the Keypad earlier in this chapter e Use the Beep Volume command For help see Beep V
13. Install the fully charged main lithium ion battery pack into the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal Note You should always keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal to maximize the backup battery s life To install the main battery pack 1 Ifthe battery door is not off open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Battery door BOTTOM 242XU 079 2 Hold the battery pack with the flat side facing down toward the inside of the battery compartment The small arrow on the top of the battery pack must point toward the top screen end of the terminal 3 Place the battery pack into the upper larger half of the battery compartment Getting Started Inserting the Battery Pack Connector end Connector pin 2 places 242XU 082 4 Hook the slots on the bottom of the battery pack into the slots on the bottom of the battery compartment 5 Slide the battery pack toward the top end of the terminal until it fits and locks into the connectors inside the bottom case The battery pack must be all the way forward to close the battery door L 242XU 102 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 If you are using an Intermec labeled battery pack Part No 063278 make sure you remove the rubber bumper from the inside of the battery door
14. Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER Antares terminal while configuring the terminal from the host To set up the application Prepare and write a host application that can send transactions to and receive transactions from the terminal in this format SOM TMF field configuration command EOM where SOM TME field configuration command EOM Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 is the start of message field is only used if the Configuration Commands Via Serial Port are enabled with TMF Terminal Message Format It is a 2 byte field containing one of these values CG Configuration Get request sent from the host application Cg Configuration Get response sent from the terminal to the host CS Configuration Set request sent from the host application Cs Configuration Set response sent from the terminal to the host Note If the Configuration Commands Via Serial Port are enabled without TMF leave this field blank is the reader or configuration command or commands you want to set on the terminal or get the current value of from the terminal To save configuration changes in flash memory send the reader command 1 as the last command For a list of commands see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference or Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference is the end of message field Note To send data to an application instead of sending configuration commands use the
15. TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 10 Filling In Fields and Marking Check Boxes Screens list the options for each configuration parameter diagnostic or system option Below each option name is either a toggle field or an entry field e Ina toggle field you press lt 4 gt or to view the options for that field e Inan entry field you type a value into the field To edit the data in an entry field use the lt 4 P Ct or keys You can also use the Delete 5 and Insert t 0 keys to edit an entry field For example the Code 49 Code 16K screen has toggle and entry fields The Code 49 field is a toggle field Press j to toggle between Enabled and Disabled The Function Codes field for F1 F2 and F3 are entry fields You type a value into the field for each function code CODE 49 CODE 16k Code 49 PX ETSEI Code 49 Function Codes F1 F2 xxG8D xG F3 Code 16K tandard OK CANCEL 242XU 052 Some screens contain check boxes Check boxes are used when more than one option can be selected at one time To mark or clear check boxes e Press For example to disable the Backlight reader command choose the Backlight check box and press to clear the check box READER COMMAND MEHU CEpace to enable or rd adis Rd M dizable a command CY Rename File
16. TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 20 Running Screen Mapping on Your Terminal Once you have selected a template you need to select the screen where you want to enter data To enter data into a screen 1 From the template menu use the A or W keys to highlight the screen you want to use The next screen shows an example of a template menu ABC Company Hork order entry Ehipping Receiving Inventory Time card entry Select Fz File F4 242XU 061 2 Press to choose the screen The screen you chose appears on the terminal screen and the screen name is in the title bar 3 Type or scan data into the fields Use the A V or to accept the data for each field 4 When you finish entering data into the fields e Press to send the transaction to the controller e Press to reset the screen and reposition the cursor to the first input field without sending the data e Press to exit the screen without sending the data and return to the template screen menu Requesting a New Template You can run one terminal template at a time on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal If you want to change templates you need to request a new one from the Model 200 Controller To request a new template from the controller 1 From the template menu press to download a new template Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 2 Type the name of the template you want to use
17. 5 LL AMT A INN 6 47 ANT AMT g 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode MUI _ Parity Purpose Sets the parity for the serial port The terminal uses parity for error checking in data transmissions 9 54 Syntax Default Scan Plessey Purpose Syntax Default Configuration Command Reference IBdata Acceptable values for data are 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Even One of these bar codes No Parity Even Parity HALTET LATINE BO IB1 Odd Parity HAT 1B2 Enables or disables decoding of Plessey symbology Plessey code is pulse width modulated like most other bar codes It includes a start character data characters an eight bit cyclic check digit a termination bar and usually a reverse start character The code is continuous and not self checking You need to configure two parameters for Plessey code Start Code and Check Digit Cldata Acceptable values for data are 00 Disabled 10 Plessey with reverse start code 30 Transmit check digit 31 Discard check digit Disabled 9 55 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Plessey continued Scan To disable Plessey Disable Plessey CI00 Or To set Plessey complete these steps 1 Scan this bar code Plessey With Reverse Start Code CI10 2 Scan one of these bar codes to transmit or retain the check digit Transmit Check Digit Discard C
18. COMMUNICATIONS MENU COMMUNICATIONS MEHU Primary Hetwork Advanced Network Radio Serial Port Serial Port N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEscl Exit N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEscl Exit 242XU 070 3 Press W to choose Serial Port and then press The Serial Port screen appears 1 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 1 20 Serial Port Screen SERIAL PORT Haud Rate EEFLI Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Timeout Delay 18 sec Flow Control Hone LRC Enabled Commands via Serial Port Enahled No TMF more 242XU 156 4 Ineach field press to toggle through the field options and select a value Once the correct value is displayed press W to move to the next field You must set each of the terminal s serial port parameters to match your host computer s or serial device s settings Once they match you can communicate through the communications dock or optical link adapter 5 Press to save the changes and exit the Serial Port screen The Communications Menu appears 6 Press to exit the Communications Menu The Configuration Menu appears 7 Press amp to exit the Configuration Menu Press to choose Yes and save the new configuration in RAM Once the changes are saved the terminal uses the new configuration Save new configuration Cin RAM W
19. Configuration Command Reference 6 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Configuring the Terminal continued Problem You scan a configuration command such as Keypad Caps Lock and you hear three low beeps You scan a configuration command such as Keypad Caps Lock and nothing happens On the T2425 you scan a configuration command to set one of these parameters and hear three low beeps Controller IP Address or Host IP Address TCP IP Terminal IP Address Default Router Network Activate 6 12 Solution If you are working in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System you cannot scan configuration commands Use the Configuration Menu to change the terminal s configuration or exit the menu system to scan configuration commands There are two possible solutions You may have one or more reader commands disabled such as Change Configuration so that you cannot change the configuration Enable all of the reader commands and try again Theterminal may be waiting for another command to complete the configuration change If you started by scanning the Enter Accumulate command you must finish the command by scanning the Exit Accumulate command For help see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Scan the Enable Override to temporarily enable all of the reader commands When you are finished remember to disable the override so that your data is not interp
20. Otherwise you will not be able to close the battery door If you are using a Sony labeled battery pack make sure the rubber bumper is installed over the ridge near the wall on the inside of the battery door The rubber bumper on the battery door keeps the battery pack in place Rubber bumper Hook the bottom edge of the battery door into the bottom case above the backup battery compartment Push the door down to close it over the battery compartment Push the battery door latch down and slide it toward the top end of the terminal to lock the door in place Battery door 242XU 088 Getting Started 1 Charging the Backup Battery You must fully charge the backup battery The main battery pack charges the backup battery when required with the terminal turned on or off Note The backup battery charger operates between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C If you are using the terminal in an environment that is outside this temperature range the backup battery will not charge To charge the backup battery 1 Install a fully charged main battery pack For help see Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 2 Leave the terminal turned off and let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours After you finish charging the backup battery the main battery pack still has most of its power remaining Note The backup battery charges e
21. TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal fatermec Ne Intermec Technologies Corporation 6001 36th Avenue West P O Box 4280 Everett WA 98203 9280 U S service and technical support 1 800 755 5505 U S media supplies ordering information 1 800 227 9947 Canadian service and technical support 1 800 688 7043 Canadian media supplies ordering information 1 800 268 6936 Outside U S and Canada Contact your local Intermec service supplier The information contained herein is proprietary and is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and or service Intermec manufactured equipment and is not to be released reproduced or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Information and specifications in this manual are subject to change without notice 1998 by Intermec Technologies Corporation All Rights Reserved The word Intermec the Intermec logo JANUS IRL TRAKKER Antares Adara Duratherm EZBuilder Precision Print PrintSet Virtual Wedge and CrossBar are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation Throughout this manual trademarked names may be used Rather than put a trademark or symbol in every occurrence of a trademarked name we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement Manual Change Record This page records the cha
22. e Western European alphanumeric keypad v2 x e TCP IP direct connect network v2 20 Note To check the firmware version number choose About TRAKKER 2400 from the Main Menu in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Also when you use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System you will not see all the menus and options shown in this manual If you scan or enter a reader or configuration command that is not available in version 2 0 or earlier nothing happens and it will not cause a problem There have been changes to the terminal emulation applications so the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide explains features that may not be available in the TE application you are using You can use the instructions in this manual and the TE user s guide to run your terminal emulation or screen mapping application but will not be able to use new features added in any later firmware release You can continue to use the older firmware version on the terminal or upgrade to the latest firmware version as described in the next section Ordering the Firmware Upgrade Kit You can upgrade a TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal to use the latest firmware version 2 x or higher without making any hardware changes There are two upgrade kits Firmware Upgrade Kit Part Number Description TRAKKER Antares TCP IP 066814S Order this kit for T2425s that communicate in a TCP IP direct connect network or a TCP IP pass through network TRAKKER Anta
23. 1 22 See also network RF domain configuration command 9 63 configuring 1 26 defined 4 18 RF Inactivity Timeout command 9 64 RF network protocol options defined 1 22 A 6 terminal checking the protocol loaded 3 6 7 9 RF Roaming Flag command 9 65 RF security ID configuration command 9 66 configuring 1 26 defined 4 18 not being saved 6 8 RF Security ID Override command 9 67 RF Transmit Mode command 9 68 RF Wakeup On Broadcast command 9 69 roaming between access points 4 21 router definition G 20 See also default router RS 232 serial port See serial port RS 232 definition G 20 Run Program reader command 8 17 runtime configuration defined 3 13 3 17 I 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual S safety procedures xv disposing of the NiCad backup battery 2 33 laser compliance and precaution information 2 40 saving configuration changes Configuration Menu exiting 3 13 exiting screens 3 13 flash memory 3 17 reader command using 8 10 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System exiting 3 14 Scan Ahead command 2 42 9 69 Scan button using 2 40 scan module input devices configuring 9 72 list of A 8 installing 2 39 options described 2 38 A 7 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 using 2 38 window cleaning 6 30 Scanner LEDs See LEDs Scanner Mode command 2 42 9 70 Scanner Redundancy command 2 42 9 71 Scanner Selection command 2 42 9 72 Scanner Test screen defined 7
24. 1 Abort Program CY Reset CX Backlight EX1 Run Program LX Backspace EX1 Scanner On LX Change Config CX Scanner Off X1 Default Config SO ES bisher Sila v1 Delete File CX Transmit File CX Enter Accum CX Exit Accum EX1 List Files ok CANCEL V more 242XU 053 Configuring the Terminal 3 To move to the next field e Press V or To move to the previous field e Press A Entering ASCII Control Characters You can include ASCII control characters in a postamble or preamble by using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For a definition of the postamble or preamble see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference You can configure the postamble or preamble to characters from the full or extended ASCII character sets For example the Field Exit code U for 5250 terminal emulation is an extended ASCII character that is often configured as the postamble For a list of the full and extended ASCII characters see Appendix B Full ASCII Charts or the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Note For more help on using the 5250 Field Exit code see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide To enter ASCII characters for a preamble or postamble 1 Decide which ASCII control character you want to set for the preamble or postamble Look up the control character in the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B and find the t
25. 242XU 055 3 14 Configuring the Terminal 3 3 Choose OK and press 2j to exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Choose Cancel and press to return to the Main Menu After you exit the menu system the terminal will resume the application you were running when you started the menu system Configuring the Terminal by Scanning Bar Codes You can configure the terminal by scanning bar code labels listed in this manual or by creating your own Code 39 or Code 93 bar code labels For help see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Note If you are working in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System you cannot scan configuration commands Exit the menu system to scan configuration commands For example you can use the Beep Volume configuration command to adjust the volume of the terminal s audio signals You can scan this bar code label to set the beep volume to a quiet audio level Set Beep Volume to Quiet BV1 You can create bar code labels that contain more than one configuration command For example you can create one bar code label to configure the terminal for e One Shot Scanner mode SB0 e Scanner Redundancy set to high SR2 e Beep Volume set to very loud BV4 e Disable Keypad Clicker KCO One Shot Scanner Mode Set Scanner Redundancy to High Set Beep Volume to Very Loud Disable Keypad Clicker TTL UTM SBOSR2BVAKCO To configure these same four configuration commands you can scan
26. 4 33 ER An 20 and 2425 Hand Held T erminal User s Manua I TRAKKI ER An tares T ermi inal Protocol Stack and the O SI Modi el 4 34 trivial File Trans Proto Ti FTP La uDP plus UDP TCP i ICMP IP and ARP 24 GHZ RF protocol driver 24 GHZ radio res 2420 TA a cations ommunication ns API 8 and addition Message Temm tT MF gurabi e serial port pro otocol osl payers Appi adi cont session Tran sport Ph ysical PT Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 The TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals use these protocols Layer Physical Data Link Network Transport Session and Presentation Presentation and Application Protocol 2 4 GHz radio Serial Port 2 4 GHz RF protocol driver Serial port driver IP and ARP ICMP UDP TCP UDP Plus TFTP TMF Description Provides spread spectrum radio signal control Provides RS 232 serial communications Provides RF media access control The default hardwired media access control MAC protocol used with TCP IP supports the Ethernet II standard Provides RS 232 serial communications control that uses CSP and the standard XMODEM protocol for data transfer The Internet Protocol IP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 791 The Address Resolution Protocol ARP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 826 The Internet Control Messag
27. 6 13 remains on for communications 1 29 4 20 connecting backup battery 1 8 2 32 serial port 2 21 4 10 contrast adjusting the screen 2 17 9 38 control characters bar code labels to scan B 6 full ASCII list of B 5 controller See Model 200 Controller Controller Connect Check Receive Timer command 9 29 Controller Connect Check Send Timer command 9 30 controller IP address configuration command 9 32 configuring 1 25 defined 4 17 G 9 conventions bar codes defined xix commands defined xx keypad defined xix screens and messages defined xx warnings and cautions defined xvi Index converting applications between JANUS and TRAKKER Antares 5 7 from IRL 5 7 to binary 5 8 copying files RF communications using 4 28 5 11 serial port using 5 8 to the controller 5 12 to the T2425 4 28 5 13 country code displayed 7 15 creating applications 5 6 CSP See Configurable Serial Protocol Ctrl key icon described 2 18 CTS RTS set by flow control 9 41 cursor keys using 2 8 customizing the terminal 3 3 D Data Bits command 9 33 data collection devices definition G 9 Data icon blinks data transmitting 4 20 described 2 18 remains on data buffered 4 20 data transmission definition G 9 data accumulating in commands 8 3 9 6 date setting 1 16 decimal key code values displaying 7 16 table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 Western European characters values C 3 to C 12 Decode Securit
28. 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Code 39 V NKX S lt CH AWO OZZY ATT omg AWD as 96 L 70M YN O ASCII gt TNKX SKS CH FRAOVOZEZM ATTT AAMT AWPO Binary 01100000 01100001 01100010 01100011 01100100 01100101 01100110 01100111 01101000 01101001 01101010 01101011 01101100 01101101 01101110 01101111 01110000 01110001 01110010 01110011 01110100 01110101 01110110 01110111 01111000 01111001 01111010 01111011 01111100 01111101 01111110 01111111 Hex 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F Decimal 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Code 39 W A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 96 P Q 9oR S 96 T ASCII aos Se ae Peo Aa A sf v 0 0 O85 8 7 NX X Sce cm i Notes for the Full ASCII Table Bit positions are 76543210 This column lists the hexadecimal value This column lists the ASCII character SP is the SPACE character T may be interchanged with X or Y or Z nis the Delete character DoF WN FF Cc Full ASCII Control Characters Table
29. 8 20 Configuration Command Reference Configuration Command Reference This chapter is an alphabetical list of all the configuration commands supported on the terminal Using Configuration Commands A configuration command changes the way the terminal operates For example you can change the Beep Volume and make the terminal beep very loud in a noisy environment You can execute configuration commands by scanning a command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label choosing a command from the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System e sending a command from a device on the serial or RF network Note If you are working in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System you cannot scan configuration commands Exit the menu system to scan configuration commands You can find the following information about each configuration command in this chapter e Command description and purpose Command syntax and options e Default setting e Bar code labels you can scan to set or change each command The configuration commands are listed alphabetically by command name For a list of bar code symbology operations serial network communications or RF network communications commands use the next table Configuration Commands Listed by Category If you want to look up a command by its syntax see the Configuration Commands by Syntax list in Appendix A Note The Code 39 bar code labels in this chapter show an asterisk at the beginning and
30. 8 6 entering data chart of key sequences 2 12 configuration commands using 9 6 keypad using 2 6 reader commands using 8 3 roaming between access points 4 21 scan module using 2 38 terminal locked up 6 6 6 26 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System using 3 10 environmental specifications A 3 to A 8 EOM command 4 11 9 40 equipment required for network 4 15 Error Logger screen defined 7 8 error messages audio signals list of 2 20 EOM or SOM configuration error 6 10 network configuration error 6 8 6 9 PG command failed error 6 11 POST failed 6 7 screen mapping 6 16 to 6 19 Unable to connect to controller 6 14 escape characters entering in screens 3 12 ESD definition G 11 Ethernet definition G 11 network illustrated 4 4 to 4 8 European Article Numbering See UPC EAN command European languages characters table of C 3 to C 12 keypad chart for entering characters 2 12 illustrated 2 10 using 2 4 to 2 11 examples serial port remotely configuring the terminal 4 13 12425 remotely configuring 4 26 4 27 4 30 EXE2ABS EXE program using 5 8 Exit Accumulate mode configuration commands using 9 6 reader command using 8 6 exiting applications 8 12 Configuration Menu 3 13 screens 3 13 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System 3 14 extended ASCII characters configuring 3 11 extended memory specifications A 5 external power supply using 2 36 EZBuilder applications developing 5 6 binary f
31. A 8 to A 11 diagnostics using 7 3 to 7 26 dimensions A 4 drives described 2 37 features described 1 3 2 3 firmware versions using 1 34 firmware upgrading 1 35 3 21 getting started list of steps 1 7 keypad options described 2 4 manual audience and purpose xvii models and options described 1 5 network overview 4 3 new features described 1 34 operating troubleshooting 6 5 to 6 8 power managing 2 35 6 23 programmability using 5 3 recording the configuration 3 23 to 3 30 resetting firmware and hardware 6 26 specifications physical and environmental A 3 to A 8 programmable 5 4 terminal emulation applications manual for xviii terminology defined xviii troubleshooting guide to 6 3 6 4 turning on the terminal 1 13 TRAKKER Antares welcome screen 1 14 transaction header defined 4 24 transaction ID creating 4 24 transaction definition G 24 Transmit File reader command 8 18 troubleshooting antenna replacing 6 28 audio signals list of 2 20 bar code symbologies 1 32 6 5 6 21 batteries 6 23 Boot Menu using 6 26 cleaning the terminal 6 30 configuring the terminal 6 8 to 6 13 troubleshooting continued diagnostics using 7 3 to 7 26 guide to finding problems 6 3 6 4 Intermec support services xv network loopback using 9 52 operating the terminal 6 5 to 6 8 preventive maintenance 6 28 RF network communications 1 29 6 13 scanning bar code labe
32. Acceptable values for data are 0 Hardware factory default 1 Terminal emulation keypad 2 Programmable English or European keypad Hardware Default 1 Scan one of these bar codes Set Keypad Type to Hardware Default Set Keypad Type to TE Keypad KTO KT1 Set Keypad Type to Programmable Keypad KT2 2 Scan this bar code to save the configuration change in flash memory Save Configuration in Flash Memory 41 3 Scan this bar code to boot the terminal and use the new keypad type Reset Firmware ox Configuration Command Reference LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Purpose Syntax Default Scan The Longitudinal Redundancy Check LRC character is an error checking character that you can append to transmitted and received blocks of data Note Before you can enable LRC you must configure the EOM command IFdata Acceptable values for data are 0 LRC disabled 1 LRC enabled Disabled One of these bar codes Disable LRC UAT ATTN LA T IF0 Enable LRC TEM IF1 Maximum Retries Purpose Syntax Default Defines the number of times the T2425 will attempt to send a disconnect request message to the Model 200 Controller The T2425 sends connect and disconnect request messages to the controller when you turn the terminal on and off Tip Intermec strongly recommends that you use the optimum setting of 7 retries NRdata Acceptable va
33. Been Pace Bii HECEIVE HIN gt Ree gt SR TUE CART HIH Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 If the Selected Files list box shows any files that you do not want to restore select the file name and choose Remove 6 Choose Restore Files The controller restores the files you selected to the Userdata directory 7 Remove your disk from the disk drive Downloading Applications and Files to the T2425 Once the applications and files are stored on the Model 200 Controller you can download applications and files to a T2425 running UDP Plus There are two ways to download files e Use the Download Server feature on the controller Use the Receive File or Transmit File reader commands For help see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference The instructions in this section explain how to use the Download Server feature on the controller to download applications and files to the terminal To prepare the terminal 1 Make sure the terminal is on and communicating with the controller Look at the top line of the terminal s screen If the Connect icon appears and remains on solid the terminal is communicating with an access point and controller For help see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 242XU 109 2 Make sure the main battery pack is fully charged To download applications and files to the T2425 1 If data collection is not started on the Model 200 Controller choose Start Data Collection f
34. Guidelines for Managing Batteries Follow these guidelines to manage the terminal batteries prevent problems and preserve battery power For more help on charging or replacing batteries see Learning About the Terminal s Batteries in Chapter 2 Main Battery Pack e e e e e e Backup Battery e Storing the Terminal ALWAYS turn off the terminal BEFORE you remove the main battery pack ALWAYS keep a charged or partially charged main battery pack in the terminal Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand If the Battery icon appears and remains on solid you have a low main battery pack replace or charge the battery pack as soon as possible When you remove a low main battery pack from the terminal recharge the battery pack you just removed If the terminal turns off due to a low main battery pack do not turn on the terminal Replace or charge the main battery pack before you continue using the terminal Use the battery charger to charge the main battery pack Charge the main battery pack for a minimum of 2 hours to make sure the battery pack is fully charged If you have a low backup battery turn off the terminal Insert a fully charged main battery pack The main battery pack will fully charge the backup battery in approximately 18 hours ALWAYS turn off the terminal BEFORE you remove the backup battery If you are going to store the terminal for less than 2 weeks keep both batteries inst
35. L FF 00101100 2C 44 L 00001101 0D 13 M CR 00101101 2D 45 M 00001110 OE 14 N SO 00101110 2E 46 N 3 00001111 OF 15 O SI 00101111 2F 47 O 00010000 10 16 P DLE 00110000 30 48 P 0 00010001 11 17 Q DC1 00110001 31 49 Q 1 00010010 12 18 R DC2 00110010 32 50 R 2 00010011 13 19 5 DC3 00110011 33 51 S 3 00010100 14 20 T DC4 00110100 34 52 T 4 00010101 15 21 U NAK 00110101 35 53 U 5 00010110 16 22 V SYN 00110110 36 54 V 6 00010111 17 23 W ETB 00110111 37 55 W 7 00011000 18 24 X CAN 00111000 38 56 X 8 00011001 19 25 Y EM 00111001 39 57 Y 9 00011010 1A 26 Z SUB 00111010 3A 58 Z 00011011 1B 27 YA ESC 00111011 3B 59 F 00011100 1C 28 B FS 00111100 3C 60 G lt 00011101 1D 29 oC GS 00111101 3D 61 H 00011110 1E 30 D RS 00111111 3E 62 ol gt 00011111 1F 31 oE US 00111111 3F 63 J B 3 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Full ASCII Table continued Binary 01000000 01000001 01000010 01000011 01000100 01000101 01000110 01000111 01001000 01001001 01001010 01001011 01001100 01001101 01001110 01001111 01010000 01010001 01010010 01010011 01010100 01010101 01010110 01010111 01011000 01011001 01011010 01011011 01011100 01011101 01011110 01011111 B 4 Hex 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F Decimal 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
36. New terminal emulation features including auto login password security for the TE Configuration Menu and international characters display support in TE applications The manual was also reorganized to move all information about terminal emulation applications into a separate guide that ships with the manual The TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide now contains all the information you need to configure and use terminal emulation applications All other information is covered in this user s manual 004 July 1998 This manual was revised to include an addendum Part No 067224 001 The addendum provides information for firmware version 3 2X e Configuring row spacing and video mode e Four digit date format e Configuring the optional 2MB flash memory e ISBT Code 128 e Configuration commands to support COM4 e Configuring the T2425 to work with DHCP e Receiving and transmitting files using YMODEM and XMODEM 1K Information on the high density long range and high visibility scan modules Contents Contents Before You Begin xv Warranty Information xv Safety Summary xv Warnings and Cautions xvi About This Manual xvii Getting Started 1 What Are the TRAKKER Antares Terminals 1 3 Accessories for the Terminal 1 4 Models and Options for the TRAKKER Antares Terminals 1 5 Equipment You Need to Get Started 1 6 Using the Terminal for the First Time 1 7 Unpacking the Terminal 1 7 Charging the Mai
37. Preamble command 9 58 Preamble Postamble screen using 3 11 print quality bar code 9 34 9 71 program See applications programmable terminals overview of using applications 5 3 specifications 5 4 Programmer s Software Kit See PSK protected field definition G 19 protocol stack checking the protocol loaded 3 6 7 9 definition G 19 options described 1 22 OSI model defined 4 33 to 4 35 PSK applications developing 5 6 binary files converting 5 8 definition G 19 IRL programs converting 5 7 JANUS and TRAKKER Antares converting applications 5 7 punctuation marks bar code labels to scan B 7 Q QFSK defined 9 68 quiet zone bar code labels 2 41 quotation marks in commands using 3 16 9 57 9 58 R radio country code displayed 7 15 troubleshooting 6 13 7 17 radio frequency definition G 19 Radio icon described 2 18 remains on troubleshooting 1 29 4 19 6 13 Radio Test screen defined 7 17 RAM default configuration saving 8 8 definition G 19 described 2 37 malloc free memory pool 2 37 RAM Drive Size command 9 60 saving configuration changes 3 13 3 17 specifications A 5 troubleshooting 7 13 Reader Command Menu using 3 10 reader commands Abort Program 8 12 Accumulate mode using 8 3 Backlight On and Off 8 7 Backspace 8 5 Change Configuration 8 8 Clear 8 6 configuring from controller 4 22 from host 4 12 4 23 to 4 27 Default Configuration 8 8 definition G 19 D
38. Scan one of these bar codes Code 2 of 5 3 Bar Start Stop 4 CCO Code 2 of 5 2 Bar Start Stop 4 4 CC1 2 Scan a two digit numeric value to set the label length 01 32 from these bar codes 0 1 uud 3 9 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 2 of 5 continued Code 39 9 18 Purpose 4 5 6 us Q 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LIEU M Enables or disables decoding of Code 39 symbology Code 39 is discrete variable length and self checking The character set is uppercase A to Z 0 to 9 dollar sign period slash percent 76 space plus and minus There are three types of ASCII the terminal decodes e Code 39 non full ASCII e Code 39 full ASCII e Code 39 mixed full ASCII Code 39 non full ASCII Non full ASCII uses a one character encoding scheme For example you encode the data SAMPLE as follows SAMPLE This label decodes as SAMPLE Code 39 full ASCII Full ASCII uses a two character encoding scheme to extend the character set to 128 characters You use the dollar sign slash percent or plus followed by an uppercase letter to represent one of the characters in the extended set You must encode lowercase letters as a plus sign Configuration Command Reference followed by their uppercase equivalents For a list of ASCII characters and their Code 39 representatio
39. XON and XOFF as handshaking characters Glossary G HIBC Health Industry Bar Code standard A modified version of Code 39 that has 43 characters uses the modulus 43 check character and reserves some character combinations for special usage home The viewport s home position is the upper left corner of the TE or application screen host application An application running remotely on a host computer host busy The condition in which the host computer is processing a request and has not responded or has not updated the screen On a 3270 terminal the OIA shows X SYSTEM X CLOCK or X On a 5250 terminal the OIA shows II Input Inhibited host computer If several computers are connected on a network the controlling computer is the host computer A host computer can be a desktop laptop or notebook PC human readable A character printed in a font that can be read by a human as opposed to bar code symbology that can only be read by a machine input device A wand laser scanner or other device that scans bar code information into the terminal Interleaved 2 of 5 code I 2 of 5 A high density self checking continuous numeric bar code symbology A bar code developed by Intermec that encodes the digits 0 through 9 The name Interleaved 2 of 5 is derived from the method used to encode two characters In this symbol two characters are paired using bars to represent the first character and interleaved spaces to repre
40. battery door Try closing the battery door again The rubber bumper on the battery door keeps the battery pack in place The main battery is completely discharged of power The terminal does not even register enough power to identify a main battery pack and display the Battery icon Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack or charge the battery pack The backup battery charge is low or the backup battery is not connected Make sure the backup battery wire connectors are firmly locked together Check the wires leading into the backup battery and the bottom case for any damage or loose connections Make sure a main battery pack is installed and connected Turn off the terminal Let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery If the backup battery will not charge you may need to replace it For help contact your local Intermec service representative 6 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Operating the Terminal continued Problem You see both these symptoms The Battery icon remains on solid The terminal beeps once every 15 seconds You see both these symptoms The Battery icon blinks e The terminal beeps once every 15 seconds Solut
41. e T2425 only Wait at least 10 seconds and try again If the T2425 is still connecting to the Model 200 Controller or host the T2425 ignores any input from the keypad or scanner Make sure the Connect icon appears and remains on before continuing e Scan any bar code label to see if the terminal responds Press 9 to turn off the terminal If it turns off press 9 to turn on the terminal You can continue working e Ifthe terminal will not turn off reset the terminal Press and hold the f and 23 keys and then press The green Scanner LEDs light and the terminal turns off Release the keys Press to turn on the terminal It boots all the systems clears RAM memory and starts your application Note If the terminal does not boot when you press the reset did not work Press and hold the Lt and keys first then press 09 Remove the main battery pack and disconnect the backup battery Let the terminal sit for 1 minute Install the battery pack and connect the backup battery Press to turn on the terminal If you keep returning to the Boot Menu try loading the firmware For help see Upgrading the Firmware in Chapter 3 If the terminal will not boot or reset contact your local Intermec service representative for help Troubleshooting Problems While Operating the Terminal continued Problem The terminal is booting and you see a message that POST failed The terminal displays the Boot
42. icon described 2 18 using 2 7 G H German See European languages green keys using 2 6 Handshake command 9 42 handshake event definition G 12 handstrap terminal accessory 1 4 Hardware Configuration screen defined 7 15 Hardware Diagnostics menu diagnostic tests defined 7 10 using 7 6 hardware features illustrated 1 3 2 3 Health Industry Bar Code See HIBC Code 39 help for TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System 3 9 hexadecimal key code values displaying 7 16 table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 Western European characters values C 3 to C 12 HIBC Code 39 9 20 holster terminal accessory 1 4 horizontal reading angle for scanning 2 41 host application definition G 13 transferring data 4 12 4 23 to 4 27 host busy definition G 13 host computer definition G 13 not receiving data troubleshooting 6 14 serial port using to configure 4 12 transmitting files 4 28 8 14 8 19 using to configure T2425 4 23 to 4 27 host IP address configuration command 9 43 configuring 1 25 defined 4 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual human readable definition G 13 humidity operating and storage range A 4 l ICMP defined 4 35 icons terminal screen Battery 2 19 2 34 Caps Lock 2 8 2 18 communications using to monitor 4 19 Connect 2 19 Ctrl 2 18 Data 2 18 Function Left 2 7 2 18 Function Right 2 7 2 18 Radio 2 18 Shift 2 7 2 18 troubleshooting 1 29 6 13
43. modify or delete data Contrast with protected field UPC EAN code A fixed length numeric continuous bar code symbology that uses four element widths A terminal that is configured to decode EAN bar codes can decode UPC but the reverse is not true UPC code is a subset of EAN code It is a numeric 12 digit bar code symbology used extensively in retail particularly the grocery industry The character set is 0 to 9 Its maximum character density is 13 8 numeric characters per inch upline A device that is at the computer end of a connection between a computer and a device is referred to as being upline When devices are connected to a computer they are connected in a line Upline is a direction relative to the device in contrast to downline If more than one computer is connected in a line the upline computers usually handle data processing and the downline computers usually handle data collection and sometimes data preprocessing validation file An ASCII file that has one entry per line A validation file is used to ensure that the information entered in the input fields of a screen mapping screen are correct The file is read sequentially and the last line in the ASCII file must be lt EOF gt variable length A type of symbology in which the number of characters per symbol is not restricted Opposite of fixed length viewport A method for viewing a full size terminal screen 25 lines x 80 characters with
44. uA Full ASCII Charts C IA M E F DIL F l MAT T L HA y O LII O R TIL R U HIA U X LANA XCE B 9 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Lowercase Letters a HIM Wm d IL ee g HIM cs j VANN em m N M p LUUD ie S LUE no V LUE E y AU 4 Yt B 10 b AUT e e NANI h LUTTE k TULIT n HAN M ae q HAT M Bo t HAITI M is Ww UL ser Z 4 7 C LC f LE 4 41 0 LO r 4R u LU X LX International Character Support International Character Support C This appendix lists the complete set of English and Western European characters you can display on a TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 lerminal TRAKKER Antares Terminal Font Set The TRAKKER Antares terminal uses a font set that supports English and Western European languages such as French German Italian Portuguese Spanish and others You can develop applications that display any character in the terminal font set Depending on the type of keypad you can also enter many of the characters For help and a complete keypad chart see Using the Keypad in Chapter 2 The next table lists the characters that you can display on the terminal and lists the decimal and hexadecimal index values Note The terminal character set is similar to Microsoft s DOS Code Page 850 with the exception of decimal characters 1 through 6 and 10 through 1
45. 14 8 characters per inch Code 128 A very high density alphanumeric symbology that supports the extended ASCII character set It is a variable length continuous code that uses multiple element widths Code 128 s high density makes it useful when printing data in a limited space Its maximum density is 12 1 alphanumeric characters per inch or 24 2 numeric characters per inch Code One A two dimensional matrix symbology that is useful for applications such as small parts labels that do not have sufficient space for linear bar codes In addition to data storage and error correction symbols each Code One symbol contains a set of horizontal lines in the center called a finder pattern that helps bar code scanners quickly locate and identify each symbol Code One symbols also contain vertical reference bars to help bar code scanners locate the relative positions of each data bit COM port Commonly used short form of communications port Locations from which data can be passed into and out of the terminal COM ports offer serial communications which means that data is transmitted one bit at a time over a single line from one computer to another communications protocol A set of rules or standards designed to enable computers to connect with each other and exchange data An example of a communications protocol is configurable serial protocol configuration The selected parameters that determine the operating characteristics of an electron
46. 151x laser scanners 1545 laser scanner Symbol scanners 155x laser scanners Integrated Intg Long Range No Aim Intg Long Range Short Aim Intg Long Range Long Aim Scanner Timeout SA Disabled 0 Terminal Menu 1 60 seconds Scanner option 3 29 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Terminal Operations Table continued Parameter Syntax Options Location in Configuration Menu Scanner Trigger SC Level Terminal Menu Edge Scanner option Time in Seconds DA Disabled Terminal Menu Enabled Append Time option Note The Scanner Selection command is only used when you have a module for cabled scanners or a long range scan module installed 3 30 Operating the Terminal in a Network Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 This chapter describes the 2 4 GHz RF network and a wired network and explains how the TRAKKER Antares terminal fits in your network It also explains how to install and configure the terminal use serial or RF communications configure the T2425 over the network and it provides technical details about network connectivity and protocols How the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Fits Into Your Network The TRAKKER Antares terminal is a versatile hand held terminal that you can easily add to your network or distributed data collection system You can use the T2420 or T2425 as an end device in your wired network The terminal has a serial port to transmit data to and from a host comp
47. 4J The Advanced Network screen appears UDP Plus Advanced Network TCP IP Advanced Network ADVANCED HETH RK ADVANCED NHETHORK Loophack PERSE Hetwork Port 8823 Hetwork Fort 5555 Eubnet Mask Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 295 0 Default Router Default Router gB 0 80 0 6 6 8 8 TCP IP Maximum Controllr Connect Chk Transmit Timeout Send Timer 635 sec B32 sec Recy Timer 6060 sec Retries 87 OK CANCEL N more 242XU 181 Note For UDP Plus networks the Network Port default is 5555 which matches the default value set on the Model 200 Controller In the Network Port field type a number from 1 to 65535 and then press W The default value is 23 which enables VT ANSI Telnet communications If you are not using Telnet communications enter the port number used by your application Press to exit the Communications Menu The Configuration Menu appears Press to exit the Configuration Menu Press to choose Yes and save the new configuration in RAM Once the changes are saved the terminal uses the new configuration Press to exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Press 23 to choose Yes and store your changes permanently in flash memory 1 27 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Store Configuration Changes in Flash Memory Screen Etore configuration changes in flash memory fused when reb
48. 7 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Serial Port Test Where Available Purpose Sample Screen 7 24 Definition Use the Serial Port Test screen to test or troubleshoot serial communications between the terminal and the host computer or serial device To run this diagnostic test you must connect the terminal to a host or other serial device via the communications dock or optical link adapter System Diagnostics menu SERIAL PORT TEST Select Com Port 1 4 Esc 4 Fi Port Select 1 F2 Keypad Echo ON F3 5canner Echo ON F4 Continous TX OFF FSI Exit 242XU 170 Press _1 to test the RS 232 serial communications port The screen displays the function key options you can use in this diagnostic screen You may see the message Port Not Available if your application is currently using the serial port You need to run an application that does not use the serial port for this diagnostic test F1 Selects the serial port F2 Toggles the keypad echo on and off If you turn the keypad echo on characters you type on the keypad are displayed on the bottom line of the screen and transmitted to the host F3 Toggles the scanner echo on and off If you turn the scanner echo on the bar code label you scan is displayed on the bottom line of the screen and transmitted to the host F4 Toggles the Continuous Transmit mode on and off If you turn continuous tran
49. 8 7 Backspace reader command 8 5 backup battery charge status 2 34 7 11 charging 1 13 2 28 temperature range A 4 cold temperatures using in 6 24 connecting 1 8 2 32 definition G 16 described 2 22 2 28 disposing of safely 2 33 installing 2 31 low battery charge 2 34 6 7 power specifications A 4 power managing 6 23 removing 2 29 temperature and volts checking 7 10 bandwidth definition G 4 bar code density definition G 5 bar code labels ASCII chart B 6 to B 10 bar code symbologies enabling 1 32 conventions defined xix creating about start stop codes 9 3 decode security configuring 9 34 Multiple Read labels 8 9 quiet zone defined 2 41 reader commands troubleshooting 6 5 6 12 regular labels 8 9 1 4 rules for creating 3 15 scanning accumulating data 8 3 configuring the terminal 3 3 3 15 learning to 2 40 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 bar code symbologies choosing 3 4 Codabar configuring 9 14 Code 11 configuring 9 15 Code 128 configuring 9 24 Code 16K configuring 9 16 Code 2 of 5 configuring 9 17 Code 39 configuring 9 18 Code 49 configuring 9 22 Code 93 configuring 9 23 Code One configuring A 6 configuration commands list of 3 23 9 4 A 8 definition G 5 enabling quick reference 1 32 list of A 6 MSI configuring 9 51 PDF 417 configuring A 6 Plessey configuring 9 55 troubleshooting bad decode 6 5 UPC EAN configuring 9 85 battery charger chargin
50. Cables for Serial Communications To connect the terminal to a host computer or other device use these cables with the TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter or the TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock Cable 5 wire null modem 3 wire null modem Bar Code Symbologies Codabar Code One see Note Code 11 Code 16K Code 2 of 5 Code 39 Code 49 PC Connector Part Number 9 pin 059167 25 pin 047569 e Code 93 e Code 128 e Interleaved 2 of 5 e MSI e PDF 417 see Note e Plessey e UPC EAN Note The Code One and PDF 417 symbologies are supported when you use the module for cabled scanners with the JANUS 7010 hand held imager You configure Code One and PDF 417 on the J7010 imager For help see the JANUS 7010 Hand Held Imager User s Manual P N 060523 Terminal Specifications A Scan Module Options There are three scan module accessory options e Standard range scan module with integrated visible laser diode 670 nm Longrange scan module with integrated visible laser diode 650 nm e Module for cabled scanners Note See your Intermec sales representative for information about the availability of the long range scan module Standard Range Scan Module Optical Parameters The depth of field specifications are Bar Code Specification Depth of Field Scanning Range 5 0 mil code 5 to 7 inches 12 7 to 17 8 cm 7 5 mil code 5tollinches 12 7 to 27 9 cm 10 mil code 4 to 15inches 10 2 to 38 1 cm 15 mil c
51. Command Reference Command Processing Purpose Syntax Default Scan Command processing allows you to disable or enable reader commands For example you can disable the Backlight command There are two ways to enable or disable reader commands Use the Command Processing configuration command described here Use the Reader Command Menu option in the Configuration Menu of the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System You may want to disable reader commands to prevent a user from accidentally entering a command or to use data that would otherwise be treated as a command Any Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label that contains the 2 to 4 character commands for Command Processing is treated as a reader command unless the command is disabled If you want to disable or enable several commands it is easier to use the menu system For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal For a description of each reader command that you can enable or disable with Command Processing see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference DCdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disable all reader commands 1 Enable all reader commands 2 Disable override 3 Enable override command0 Disable reader command command Enable reader command The override option is a temporary setting that allows you to enable all the reader commands for as long as you need them When you want to return to the previous configuration you disable the override Note Th
52. Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option Communications Menu Serial Port option 3 27 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Terminal Operations Table Parameter Syntax Append Time DE Automatic Shutoff EZ Beep Volume BV Decode Security CS Display Backlight Timeout DF Display Contrast DJ Display Font Type DT Keypad Caps Lock KA Keypad Clicker KC Keypad Type KT Postamble AE Preamble AD RAM Drive Size FR Reader Commands DC 3 28 Options Disabled Enabled 0 disabled 2 75 minutes Off Quiet Normal Loud Very loud Low Moderate High Disabled 0 1 60 seconds 10 seconds 0 7 3 8x8 8x16 16x16 On Off Disabled Enabled Hardware default Terminal emulation Programmable None no characters Any 25 ASCII characters None no characters Any 25 ASCII characters 0 disabled 16 256K Disable all reader commands Enable all reader commands Enable override Disable override Location in Configuration Menu Terminal Menu Append Ti
53. Controller IP Address NC 0 0 0 0 Communications Menu The IP address field is four Primary Network option numbers separated by periods Default Router NX 0 0 0 0 Communications Menu The Router field is four Advanced Network option numbers separated by periods Host IP Address NC 0 0 0 0 Communications Menu The IP address field is four Primary Network option numbers separated by periods Maximum Retries NR 7 Communications Menu 0 99 Advanced Network option Network Activate NA Disabled Communications Menu 2 4 GHz RF enabled Primary Network option 3 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RF Network Communications Table T2425 Only continued Parameter Syntax Network Loopback NL Network Port NG RF Domain RW RF Inactivity Timeout RY RF Roaming Flag RR RF Security ID RS RF Security ID Override RN RF Transmit Mode RT RF Wakeup On Broadcast RB Subnet Mask NS TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout NH Terminal IP Address ND 3 26 Options Disabled Enabled 00023 for TCP IP 05555 for UDP Plus 1 65535 0 0 15 5 seconds 0 255 seconds Allowed Not allowed None no characters Any 20 ASCII characters No Yes BFSK OFSK Auto Disabled Enabled 255 255 255 0 The Subnet Mask field is four numbers separated by periods Each number is from 0 to 255 0 No timeout 30 120 seconds 32 seconds 0 0 0 0 The IP addres
54. DOS code page that contains the standard ASCII character set and a set of national language characters specific to the language the code page supports TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 10 downline A device that is at the terminal end of a connection to the computer is referred to as being downline When devices are connected to a computer they are connected in a line Downline is a direction relative to the computer Contrast with upline If more than one computer is connected in a line the upline computers usually handle data processing and the downline computers usually handle data collection and sometimes data preprocessing drive An electromechanical device that reads from and writes to disks The three types of common disk drives are floppy disk drives hard disk drives and PC card drives driver Software or firmware that translates operating system requests such as input output requests into a format that is recognizable by specific hardware such as adapters EAN European Article Numbering International standard bar code for retail food packages corresponding to the Universal Product Code UPC in the United States A terminal that is configured to decode EAN bar codes can decode UPC but the reverse is not true UPC code is a subset of EAN code EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code EBCDIC is a standard eight bit code developed by IBM Contrast with ASCII
55. ING Delete Chia Have 1i Brun Hram Repeat Steps 7 through 12 to select another application You can also download files used by your application such as an employee list or a part number list To download additional files choose File in the Initialization Data box Type in the filename including the backslash Disable the Binary file check box and then choose Add Choose OK to save your changes and return to the Terminal Download Configuration dialog box 5 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 16 17 18 19 In the Terminals and Groups list box choose the terminal or group you configured if it is not already highlighted and marked with an asterisk Choose Download A Download initiated message box appears Choose OK The executable binary applications and files are downloaded to the terminal or group of terminals usually within a few seconds If you are downloading the applications and files to many terminals or there is a lot of radio traffic in your 2 4 GHz RF network the download may take longer All files are downloaded and stored on the terminal s flash drive C Choose Close to close the dialog box and return to the System Maintenance dialog box To run an application continue with the instructions in the next section If you have problems downloading files see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Running the Application on the Terminal 5 16 Once you h
56. LATA M 4D 2 4 TORRE LETT DJ4 6 LAT M DJ6 Lighter Display Contrast DJ8 1 HAT DJI 3 Maximum Display Contrast DJ3 5 LATA M DJ5 7 Dark Display Contrast 4 D 7 Darker Display Contrast DJ9 Configuration Command Reference Display Font Type Purpose Syntax Default Scan Selects the type or size of font that is used on the terminal screen You can set a regular size font 8x8 a font with double height characters 8x16 or a font with double width and double height characters 16x16 DTdata Acceptable values for data are 0 8 pixels by 8 pixels 8x8 font 1 8 pixels wide by 16 pixels high 8x16 font 2 16 pixels wide by 16 pixels high 16x16 font 8x8 One of these bar codes Set Display Font Type to 8x8 DTO Set Display Font Type to 8x16 DT1 Set Display Font Type to 16x16 DT2 9 39 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual End of Message EOM 9 40 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Attaches an EOM to the end of a data block to indicate the end of data transmission to and from a terminal When EOM is disabled the terminal communicates in Character mode When EOM is enabled the terminal communicates in Frame mode You must configure a value for EOM before you can set these other serial communications commands e Configuration Commands Via Serial Port Flow Control
57. Menu You insert a main battery pack and cannot shut the battery door You insert a main battery pack The terminal will not turn on and the Battery icon is not displayed The Battery icon blinks on the top line of the terminal screen Note The terminal is not beeping Solution The screen displays the system that failed POST Report the error message to your supervisor Press to exit the error message The Boot Menu appears Press B to boot the terminal Your application appears on the screen If the terminal still will not boot contact your local Intermec service representative for help You will see the Boot Menu in these two situations You remove both batteries at the same time Once you replace the batteries and turn on the terminal the Boot Menu appears Press 8 to boot the terminal and continue working e You just finished upgrading the firmware on the terminal and POST failed Press 8 to boot the terminal Report the problem to your supervisor For help on the Boot Menu see Booting and Resetting the Terminal later in this chapter If you are using an Intermec labeled battery pack Part No 063278 make sure you remove the rubber bumper from the inside of the battery door Try closing the battery door again If you are using a Sony labeled battery pack make sure the rubber bumper is installed over the ridge near the wall on the inside of the
58. Push the Scan button on the keypad Direct the beam so that it falls across all bars in the bar code label After the terminal successfully reads the label you hear a high beep The scanner stays on or turns off depending on the scanning options you have configured When the scanner laser beam is on both scanner light emitting diodes LEDs at the top of the keypad are lit in a yellow color Once the bar code label is scanned successfully the LEDs are lit in a green color The LEDs turn off after 2 seconds unless you start scanning another label Note Some of the scanning options described in the next section allow you to scan multiple bar code labels without having to press the Scan button each time The yellow LEDs stay lit any time the scanner laser beam is on Learning How to Use the Terminal 4 Release the Scan button Scanner LED indicators 2 places il wll 242XU 034 To successfully read a bar code label the laser beam in the scan module must see all the bars in a label and a quiet zone at each end of the label A quiet zone is a clean non printed space z TTT Ne Il I a Quiet zone before and after bar code 242XU 076 With the standard range scan module you will have the best success if you hold the terminal so that the horizontal reading angle is near zero and the vertical reading angle is near 20 degrees To get the best scan angle hold the terminal so that the scan module
59. System choose System Menu and then choose File Manager Next choose the drive where the application is stored 1 Scan this bar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Run Program E I 2 Scan the bar code label s for the application you want to run You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format drive filename 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and run the application Exit Accumulate Mode x You can create your own bar code labels to run applications by creating a bar code in this command format drive filename To run the application SHIPPING BIN use this command c shipping bin 8 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Transmit File There are two ways to transmit files from the TRAKKER Antares terminals e Use the serial port to transmit files from the T2420 or T2425 e Use RF communications to transmit files from the T2425 For help connecting the terminal to a host computer or the Model 200 Controller see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Transmit File Through the Serial Port Purpose From Network 8 18 Keypad Scan Transmits a file from the T2420 or T2425 terminal through the serial port and saves it on the host computer You must have the terminal connected to the host through the communications dock or the optical link adapter On the host you n
60. Terminal s Memory and Drives The TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals come with the following memory and drives 750K flash 750K flash drive drive Drive C i 256K configurable Drive C p N De RAM drive configurable y Optional 2MB or p RAM drive X Drive E i i 4MB extended sani storage drive 242XU 180 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminal TRAKKER Antares 2420 Terminal Drive C is a 750K flash drive on the T2420 and 12425 You can store up to 32 files on drive C Applications must be stored on drive C Drive E is a configurable RAM drive up to 256K By default the RAM drive is not configured and the memory is available for programmable Malloc memory allocations To configure the RAM drive see RAM Drive Size in Chapter 9 You can store up to 32 files on drive E The contents of the RAM drive are erased when you boot or reset the terminal or change the backup battery Drive G is an optional 2MB or 4MB extended storage drive that is only available on the T2420 You can store up to 32 files on drive G Use this drive to store large lookup tables and data files Note On each drive filenames are customer defined using eight characters with a three character extension On the TRAKKER Antares terminals applications are customer defined You have 512K total RAM for the application execution space If the RAM drive is configured your application execution space is reduced by the amount of the RAM drive
61. Time and Date TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Setting the Time and Date You need to set the time and date on the terminal You use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to set the time and date To set the time and date 1 Press t Q r 2 w or scan this bar code label to access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Enter Test and Service Mode _ Note You must press the C Left Enter key in this key sequence The Q key is located just under the v9 key The Main Menu appears Configuration Menu Diagnostics Menu System Menu About TRAKKER 2466 N Select item CEnter Next screen EF11 Help CEscl Exit 242XU 001 2 Press W to choose the System Menu and then press The System Menu appears File Manager Load Default Values Set Time and Date Store Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 051 1 16 Getting Started 1 3 Press W to choose the Set Time and Date command and then press The Time and Date screen appears TIME AND DATE Current time is 12 08 06 Hew time 12 39 08 Current date is 96 01 61 Hew date MM DD OK CANCEL 242XU 009 4 Type the current time in the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds with a space character between each field and then press W The program
62. a damaged label or to an error in scanning peer to peer network A type of LAN whose workstations are capable of being both clients and servers G 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 18 PIC Peripheral interface controller The PIC processor is an internal processor that manages the terminal s batteries pixel Pixel element One spot in a rectilinear grid of thousands of such spots that are individually painted to form an image produced on the screen by a computer or on paper by a printer A pixel is the smallest element that display software can manipulate in creating letters numbers or graphics Plessey code A fixed length continuous and non self checking bar code symbology Plessey code is pulse width modulated It includes a start character data characters an eight bit cyclic check digit a termination bar and usually a reverse start character Similar to MSI code Poll Poll character Sent by the host to request terminal data port For hardware a connecting component that allows a microprocessor to communicate with a peripheral device For software a memory address that identifies the physical circuit used to transfer information between a microprocessor and a peripheral device POST Power on self test This test runs when you boot the terminal The test ensures that the terminal s hardware and peripherals are operational postamble A field of data that is sent after
63. assigned to the default router in your 2 4 GHz RF network The router provides a software and hardware connection between two or more networks that permits traffic to be routed from one network to another on the basis of the intended destinations of that traffic When the Model 200 Controller or host TCP IP network is on a different subnetwork than the T2425 you need to set the IP address assigned to the default router The terminal uses the router address to send packets across the network to the controller The default of 0 0 0 0 means there is no default router NXn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The default router address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The RF network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 0 0 0 0 To set the default value for the default router scan this bar code Default Router 4 NX0 0 0 0 To set the default router address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Default Router 4 4NX 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the default router address from these bar codes 0 x1 49 4 9 35 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Default Router continued A 5 6 47 g 9 Scan this bar code Period Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the d
64. commands sent from a network device and bar code labels for these reader commands in this section e Backlight On and Off e Change Configuration e Default Configuration e Multiple Read Labels e Reset Firmware e Save Configuration in Flash Memory e Scanner Trigger On and Off e Test and Service Mode Backlight On and Off Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Turns the backlight on to easily view the terminal screen in dimly lit environments Fak Press to turn the backlight on or off Backlight On 00 1 Turns the backlight off 0 Press z7 to turn the backlight on or off Backlight Off 0 Note You can use the command to toggle the backlight on and off TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Change Configuration Purpose From Network Keypad Example This command must precede any configuration command If you enter a valid string the terminal configuration is modified and the terminal sounds a high beep For help on the configuration commands see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference S tcommand command command n where command is a configuration command with the value you want to set Press 5 Q 7 L2 m to access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System From the Main Menu choose the Configuration Menu to change the terminal s configuration Ch
65. configured for XON XOFF flow control e Handshake e LRC e Start of Message SOM If EOM is disabled or not set you need to disable these serial communications commands EOM cannot equal the same value that is set for SOM You cannot set EOM to any of these values e AFF ACK e REQ ENQ e DLE e SEL e NEG NAK e XOFF e Doll e XON e RES EOT PFdata Acceptable values for data are one or two ASCII characters x03 hexadecimal value for ETX To disable EOM scan this bar code Disable EOM PF To set EOM to one or two ASCII characters 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set EOM PF Configuration Command Reference 2 Scanone or two bar codes for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode x Flow Control Purpose Syntax Default Scan Regulates the data transmission through the serial port The terminal is a DTE device Clear To Send CTS is a hardware signal flow control The terminal sets and clears Request To Send RTS when it is ready to receive The terminal checks CTS when it tries to transmit data XON XOFF response causes the terminal to respond to XON XOFF characters received while transmitting XON XOFF control specifies that the terminal transmits XON XOFF characters to control the incoming data flow XON XOFF response and control specify that the terminal respon
66. direct connect network The host IP address you set on the 12425 must match the address that is set on the host NCn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The host IP address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The RF network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 0 0 0 0 To set the default host IP address scan this bar code Default Host IP Address NCO0 0 0 0 To set the host IP address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Host IP Address 4 4 NC 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the host IP address from these bar codes 0 o 3 A 45 9 43 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Host IP Address continued 6 47 g 9 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the host IP address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LL x 9 44 Configuration Command Reference Interleaved 2 of 5 Purpose Syntax CAUTION Default Scan Enables or disables decoding of Interleaved 2 of 5 I2 of 5 symbology 12 of 5 is a high density self checking continuous numeric symbology It is mainly used
67. four separate bar code labels in Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference When you create a bar code label to set several configuration commands follow these rules e The bar code label must be printed using Code 39 or Code 93 symbology 3 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 16 e The bar code label must include the start and stop character Most bar code printing utilities automatically include the start and stop character The bar code label must start with Change Configuration command e Each configuration command must include the command syntax and the value for the command For example BV is the command syntax for Beep Volume and the value 4 sets the beep volume to very loud If you set one configuration command to a string of ASCII characters and another configuration command follows you must enclose the value in quotes If you do not include the quotation marks the terminal will interpret everything after the first command as data and will not find the second configuration command For example to set the preamble to BV use ADBV no quotes are needed To set the preamble to BV and turn off the beep volume use AD BV BVO or change the order and use BVOADBV To clear the preamble and postamble from a single label use AD AE Note To scan a Code 39 bar code label that includes quotes you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode
68. in inventory distribution and the automobile industry Enabling I 2 of 5 automatically disables Code 2 of 5 CAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 2 32 Fixed length even number only 97 Variable length without a check digit 98 Case code 6 or 14 with a check digit 99 Variable length with a check digit Caution Using the variable length without a check digit configuration option can cause substitution errors Conseil Des erreurs de substitution peuvent survenir si vous utilisez la longueur variable sans option de v rification de configuration de chiffres Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Interleaved 2 of 5 CA0 Enable Variable Length Without a Check Digit CA97 Enable Variable Length With a Check Digit CA99 9 45 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Interleaved 2 of 5 continued Enable Interleaved 2 of 5 Case Code CA98 Or To set Interleaved 2 of 5 to a fixed length 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Fixed Length CA 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes Use even numbers 2 32 only ANT A ATA 0 ANTM MAT 2 3 AMT AMAT A 6 LL g 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode HII M _ 9 46 Configuration Command Reference Keypad Caps Lock Purpose Syntax Default Scan Turns the caps lock on and off With the caps lock turned on all alph
69. is installed correctly You must install a module for cabled scanners a standard range scan module or a long range scan module before you can turn on the terminal A main battery pack is not installed Remove the battery door on the terminal and make sure the main You see the Battery icon on the top lithium ion battery pack is installed correctly Slide the battery line of the screen pack toward the top of the terminal to lock the battery pack into the connectors The main battery pack is not charged The main battery pack may be discharged Replace the battery You see the Battery icon on the top pack with a spare charged battery pack or charge the battery pack line of the screen and try again Problems While Operating the Terminal If you are operating the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal and have trouble check these possible problems and solutions Problem Solution You scan a reader command such as The reader commands are disabled Scan the Enable Override Backlight On and nothing happens command shown here to temporarily enable all of the reader commands You can also enable or disable reader commands with the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help see Command Processing in Chapter 9 When you are finished remember to disable the override so that your data is not interpreted as a command Enable Override 4 DC3 You scan a valid bar code label to The terminal may have decoded the bar code label in a
70. letter A followed by a space in the TMF field If the TMF field does not contain CG Cg CS Cs or A the terminal ignores the transaction Example with TMF In the host application you want to set the value for two configuration commands on the terminal Send this transaction from the host application CSS BV4DF30 1 where Note SOM and EOM are not shown in this example is a TMF Configuration Set request is the Change Configuration reader command 4 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual BV4 sets the Beep Volume configuration command to a value of 4 which is a very loud beep volume DF30 sets the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command to a value of 30 seconds 1 is the reader command that saves configuration changes to the terminal s flash memory The terminal returns this transaction to the host application Cs BV4DF30 1 where Cs is a TMF Configuration Set response is the Change Configuration reader command BV4 means the Beep Volume configuration command has been changed to a value of 4 which is a very loud beep volume DF30 means the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command has been changed to a value of 30 seconds 1 means the configuration changes have been saved in flash memory Using RF Communications on the T2425 4 14 CAUTION Before you can begin using the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal to collect data you need to install and configur
71. line from one device to another You can use the terminal s COM port to communicate with other devices serial port You can communicate with other RS 232 devices such as modems PCs and printers through COMI by e using a TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock using a TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 2 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Learning About the Terminal s Batteries 2 22 There are two rechargeable batteries in the TRAKKER Antares terminal Main Battery Pack This lithium ion battery provides the main power source to operate the terminal Backup Battery This NiCad Nickel Cadmium battery backs up all memory and the real time clock while you change the main battery pack Main Battery Pack The main power source for the terminal is a lithium ion battery pack Follow these tips to get the best battery performance and life possible e You should always keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal to maximize the backup battery s life e When you remove a battery pack insert another charged battery pack in the terminal e Keep a spare charged battery pack available so you can continue to operate the terminal without interruption e If you use the terminal for extended periods of time in a sub freezing environment you may need to change the battery pack more often e If you have been
72. need the following e TFIT Trivial File Transfer Protocol server must be running on the host TFIP server must be running at least a Pentium processor or equivalent e 12425 must be communicating with the host that is running the TFTP server Intermec has prepared a sample Win95 NT application or utility called CLIENT CPP that first prompts you to enter a reader or configuration command and then sends the data to the T2425 in a TCP IP direct connect network You can use the sample utility to develop your own application The source code for CLIENT CPP is listed at the end of this section To transfer files from the terminal or manage files on the terminal e Scan the reader command For help see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference For example to transmit a file called T DAT from the terminal s drive C to drive C on the host scan this bar code label AINE NL AM Transmit File T DAT to Host VR C T DAT C T DAT Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 To transfer files or send configuration data from the host 1 Make sure the TFTP server is running on the host and the T2425 is communicating with the host 2 Start the host application that can send TMF commands to the terminal Send the two character TMF code CS Configuration Set request followed by the reader or configuration command For example to send the application INVENTRY BIN from drive C on the host to drive C on the T2425 enter this c
73. number from 200 to 2000 ms 300 ms To set the default acknowledgement delay lower limit scan this bar code Default Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit NV300 To set the acknowledgement delay lower limit 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit 4 4 NV 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes NTA ANT 0 1 HAMM LUAM 2 3 LAM TATEM A 5b LOL AMT 6 x7 9 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit continued MEAM ATUM g 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LOL UL Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit Purpose When the T2425 sends a message to the Model 200 Controller the terminal waits to receive a response acknowledging the message If no response is received within the Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit time the terminal sends the message again at the time interval set for the lower limit The terminal will continue to send the data at increasingly longer intervals until it reaches the Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit time The terminal continues sending the message at the time interval set for the upper limit until a response is received or a timeout error occurs Syntax NUdata Acceptable values for data are any number from 2000 to 60000 ms Default 5000 ms Scan To set the default acknowledgement delay upper limit scan this bar code Default Acknowled
74. page 5 13 Use the System Menu in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to load and run an application For help see page 5 16 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Use a host application to download applications and files to the T2425 1 Create your applications using the TRAKKER Antares PSK or EZBuilder For help see page 5 6 2 Convert each application to a binary file using the PSK utility EXE2ABS EXE For help see page 5 8 Or use the EZBuilder option to convert each application to a binary file Copy the applications and files to the host 4 Wirite an application for the host that can communicate with the T2425 directly via an access point Use the host application to download applications and files to the T2425 For help see Transferring Files in a TCP IP Direct Connect Network in Chapter 4 Note The host must be running a TFTP server 5 Use the System Menu in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to load and run an application For help see page 5 16 Or use the host application to send the Run Program command About the TRAKKER Antares Programmable Terminals The TRAKKER Antares terminals ship loaded with a terminal emulation application a screen mapping application or a sample application You can develop your own data collection application for the T2420 and T2425 and then download the application to the terminal The main difference between the T2420 and T2425 is how you dow
75. point MAC If you have a problem with the radio or the connection to the access point use the information on this screen to troubleshoot your network configuration Running Diagnostics Application Efficiency Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Use the Application Efficiency screen to find out if your application is making the best use of and maximizing battery life on the terminal System Diagnostics menu APP EFFICIENCY Application is running at 907 sa 1664 Fai FOOR G UDP Battery life is affected hy application efficiency L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 064 The screen displays the application efficiency percentage The closer the percentage is to 100 the more efficient the application is at using battery power The terminal automatically goes into an internal Standby mode to draw power at a lower level when less power is required An efficient application uses the TRAKKER Antares PSK Programmer s Software Kit functions to wait for events to occur and it does not poll in an infinite loop When programmed correctly with the PSK or EZBuilder the application does not prevent the terminal from going into Standby mode and uses the terminal s battery power as efficiently as possible 7 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Malloc Application Information Purpose A programmer or application developer can use the Malloc Application Information screen to
76. read bar code labels very quickly Solution You may not be using an input device that is supported with the module for cabled scanners Make sure you are using one of the supported input devices ntermec 126X and 127X wands ntermec 146X CCD scanners ntermec 151x 1545 and 155x laser scanners JANUS 7010 hand held imager Compatible Symbol scanners reverse polarity enabled You must use an interface cable to connect the input device to the module If you are using the J7010 imager you need to use a wedge interface cable Part No 062168 and set the Cable ID parameter on the J7010 to the Force 97xx Wedge option For help see the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Module for Cabled Scanners Instruction Sheet Try one of these solutions Make sure you aim the scanner beam so it crosses the entire bar code label in one pass e The angle you are scanning the bar code label may not be working well or you may be scanning the label straight on Try scanning the bar code label again but vary the scanning angle The bar code label print quality may be poor or unreadable To check the quality of the bar code label try scanning a bar code label that you know scans Compare the two bar code labels to see if the bar code quality is too low You may need to replace the label that you cannot scan Make sure the bar code symbology you are scanning is enabled Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to check the sym
77. response is received a timeout error occurs IEdata Acceptable values for data are 0 5 ms 1 100 ms 2 500 ms 3 2 sec 4 10 sec 5 20 sec 6 40 sec 7 60 sec 8 No timeout 10 seconds One of these bar codes No Timeout Delay IE8 Timeout Delay 100 ms IE1 Timeout Delay 2 sec IE3 Timeout Delay 20 sec IE5 Timeout Delay 60 sec IE7 Timeout Delay 5 ms IE0 Timeout Delay 500 ms TE2 Timeout Delay 10 sec TE4 Timeout Delay 40 sec IE6 UPC EAN Purpose Syntax Default Configuration Command Reference Enables or disables the decoding of Universal Product Code UPC European Article Numbering EAN symbology UPC EAN are fixed length numeric continuous symbologies that use four element widths A terminal that is configured to decode EAN bar codes can decode UPC but the reverse is not true UPC code is a subset of EAN code To define the UPC EAN symbology you set up to seven digits The fifth sixth and seventh digits are optional To set the sixth digit you must set the fifth digit To set the seventh digit you must set all seven digits CEdata where data must be 4 to 7 digits selected from this list First digit Second digit Third digit Fourth digit Fifth digit Sixth digit Seventh digit First digit Second digit Third digit Fourth digit Fifth digit Sixth digit Seventh digit FO FO FPO FPO eO FPO NFO UP
78. see how memory is allocated and used by the current application Where Available Choose the Malloc Info Menu from the System Diagnostics menu Sample Screen APPLICATION Total Free BB60864656 Largest Free B6G80864656 Fragments Badia Allocated Blocks 66801 242XU 171 Definition The screen displays the memory allocation used by the application You can view the total free memory the largest block of free memory number of memory fragments and the total number of allocated blocks of memory You can use this diagnostic screen to troubleshoot a memory leak where the application is mallocing memory but not freeing memory 7 22 Running Diagnostics Malloc Firmware Information Purpose A programmer or application developer can use the Malloc Firmware Information screen to see how memory is allocated and used in the terminal firmware The firmware includes the operating environment firmware drivers and TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Where Available Choose the Malloc Info Menu from the System Diagnostics menu Sample Screen BEN TIT NN Total Free 66600607646 Largest Free BBBG0067658 Fragments BEBG2 Allocated Blocks 00015 242XU 172 Definition The screen displays the memory allocation for the terminal firmware You can view the total free memory the largest block of free memory number of memory fragments and the total number of allocated blocks of memory
79. symbology enter data for your application The other than the label s actual symbology Try scanning the bar code data decoded by the scan module label again Make sure you scan the entire label does not match the data encoded in ae the barcode abel To operate the terminal quickly and efficiently you should enable only the bar code symbologies that you are going to scan If you enable multiple symbologies the terminal may on rare occasions decode a bar code according to the wrong symbology and produce erroneous results 6 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Operating the Terminal continued Problem You want to set the terminal back to the default configuration to start over configuring the terminal You cannot scan bar code labels with the standard range scan module the long range scan module or the module for cabled scanners The terminal appears to be locked up and you cannot enter data 6 6 Solution Scan this bar code label Default Configuration op Or use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration in Chapter 3 Note After you load the default configuration you may need to set the primary network communications parameters on a T2425 to communicate with other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network See Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan later in this chapter Try these possible solutions
80. terminal may be out of range of an access point or the access point may have recently been turned off Make sure the access point is still turned on Each device in the 2 4 GHz RF network must have a valid IP address The IP addresses set on the terminal must match the addresses configured on the controller or host For help see Using RF Communications on the T2425 in Chapter 4 You may have gone out of range of an access point Try moving closer to an access point or to a different location to re establish communications Once you are in range again the Connect icon will appear and remain on Any data you collected while you were out of range will be transmitted over the network The 12425 is connected to the access point but is trying to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller and the host computer Make sure the terminal is correctly configured for your network Make sure the controller is configured and running Make sure the host computer is configured and running If you have configured the network correctly try restarting the controller to establish communications You can also try resetting the terminal For help resetting the terminal see Booting and Resetting the Terminal later in this chapter There may be a problem with the connection between the Model 200 Controller and the host computer UDP Plus Check with your network administrator or use the Model 200 Controller System Manual to troubleshoot any pot
81. terminal that allows you to move the cursor around the screen and to type numbers and mathematical symbols The terminal s number pad is designed to work like the number pad on a regular PC keyboard One Shot mode See Scanner mode OSI model Open Systems Interconnection reference model A model for network communications consisting of seven layers that describe what happens when computers communicate with one another The OSI model was developed by the International Standards Organization ISO to provide worldwide standards for computer communications packet The unit of information that the network uses to communicate A packet includes a single network message with its associated header addressing information data and optional trailer A packet can also be called a frame or datagram parameter See configuration command parity A system for encoding characters with odd or even bar code patterns Parity provides a self checking feature in bar codes and other data transmission techniques Even parity characters have an odd number of binary ones in their structure partition See logical partition PDF 417 A two dimensional stacked symbology Each row in the symbol includes start stop characters row identifiers and symbol characters which consist of four bars and four spaces each and contain the actual data PDF 417 provides an extensive error detection and correction option that can recover up to 510 characters lost due to
82. the data in a message It is typically used to tag transactions from the bar code reader or terminal for rapid processing by the host and it expands the data field record length Similar to the preamble power management Software and procedures that extend the life of a terminal s lithium ion main battery pack and NiCad backup battery preamble Predefined data that is automatically appended to the beginning of entered data Similar to the postamble Glossary G protected field In word processing preset data or an area that cannot be changed or overridden by an operator without altering the program On a display device a display field in which a user cannot enter modify or erase data Contrast with unprotected field protocol character See ASCII control character protocol stack A group of drivers that work together to span the layers in the network protocol hierarchy PSK TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit A library of software functions for creating applications on the TRAKKER Antares terminals radio frequency RF A frequency at which coherent electromagnetic radiation of energy is useful for communications purposes roughly the range from 10 KHz to 300 GHz RAM Random access memory Memory that can be written into or read by locating any data address RAM drive A configurable disk drive that exists only in your terminal s extended memory You create read write and delete files on a RAM drive
83. the keypad Use the previous sections in this chapter to learn about typing characters that are shown on the keypad using the Function Left Function Right and Shift keys or capitalizing all characters 2 10 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 To type characters with an accent mark 1 Press f The Function Right icon appears on the terminal s screen 2 Press the function key that the accent mark appears above For example press to type the umlaut To type circumflex grave umlaut acute tilde 990903 A special Function Right icon appears with a third line to indicate that an accent mark is stored in the keypad buffer 242XU 115 To flush the accent mark from the keypad buffer without entering any key press f twice The icons disappear from the terminal s screen 3 There are three types of characters you can enter e To accent a lowercase character press the character For example press A to type the character e To accent an uppercase character press the key Next press the character you want to accent For example press and release the key and then press 4 to type the A character e To type the accent mark by itself press the key The accented character or accent mark appears on the screen and the special Function Right icon disappears If you try to accent a character and the resulting character is not support
84. the terminal For help see Enabling Bar Code Symbologies in Chapter 1 or find the symbology in Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Note The Scan button on the terminal keypad does not activate the scanner device connected to the module for cabled scanners The next sections cover these topics Installing a Scan Module e Using the Standard Range Scan Module Scanning Options Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Installing a Scan Module To use the terminal you must have a scan module installed on the terminal The scan module is installed at the Intermec factory You may want to change the scan module and install another type of scan module on the terminal Use these instructions to remove and install the scan module Note Observe all static electricity precautions before installing a module To install a scan module 1 Make sure the terminal is off and then lay it face down on a clean and sturdy work surface 2 Usea Phillips screwdriver and remove the three screws that secure the scan module to the terminal Remove the existing scan module from the terminal To install the module align the module guides with the guides on the terminal Gently press down on the module to seat the connector guide pins and the module connector into the connector on the terminal Scan module Scan module guide 2 places Terminal guide 2 places 242XU 040 2 39 TRAKKER Antares 2420 an
85. the two icons shown in the illustration to monitor communications between the T2425 and other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network Paszword Program procedure Menu Current Library 242XU 093 You See These Icons The Radio icon remains on No icons appear Status of Communications No communications The T2425 is not connected to an access point The Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and it is turned off No communications The T2425 is not connected to an access point What You Need to Do You need to enable the Network Activate command For help see Network Activate in Chapter 9 Make sure the access points are turned on and operating You may also be using the terminal out of the RF range of an access point Try moving closer to an access point to re establish communications If the access point is on and you are in range you may need to configure the terminal to communicate in the network For help see Configuring the T2425 earlier in this chapter 4 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the Icons to Monitor RF Communications continued You See These Icons Mz IKN The Connect icon blinks The Connect icon remains on fe The Connect icon remains on and the Data icon blinks The Connect i
86. this section The file management commands are listed in alphabetical order You will find the purpose syntax for commands sent from a network device and bar code labels for these reader commands in this section e Abort Program Delete File e Receive File e Rename File e Run Program e Transmit File Aborts or exits the application that is running The terminal exits the current application and starts running the default sample application APPTSK BIN Not supported Abort Program Deletes a file from a drive on the terminal drive filename where is the command to delete a file drive indicates the drive where you want to delete a file You must y include the colon after the drive letter filename is the file you want to delete In the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System choose System Menu and then choose File Manager Next choose the drive where you want to delete files Reader Command Reference Scan 1 Scanthis bar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Delete File 4 2 Scan the bar code label s for the file you want to delete You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format drive filename 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and delete the file Exit Accumulate Mode _ Or You can create your own bar code labels to delete files by creating a bar code
87. this section to find a solution For easy reference problems are grouped into these topics e Terminal Will Not Turn On e Problems While Operating the Terminal e Problems While Configuring the Terminal e 12425 Will Not Communicate With RF Network Devices e Problems Transmitting Data Through the Serial Port e Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application e Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan e Guidelines for Managing Batteries Note You can also use the diagnostics to help analyze and solve problems For help see Chapter 7 Running Diagnostics Caution There are no user serviceable parts inside the terminal Opening the unit will void the warranty and may cause damage to the internal components Conseil La terminal ne contient pas de pi ces r visibles par l utilisateur Le fait d ouvrir l unit annule la garantie et peut endommager les pi ces internes If you send the terminal in for service it is your responsibility to save the terminal data and configuration Intermec is responsible only for ensuring that the keypad and other hardware features match the original configuration when repairing or replacing your terminal Troubleshooting Terminal Will Not Turn On If you press 9 to turn on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal and nothing happens check the terminal for these possible problems For more help see Chapter 1 Getting Started Problem Solution A scan module is not installed Make sure a scan module
88. time the laser turns off Simply releasing the button or the trigger does not turn the laser off If the laser is left on the scanner timeout turns the laser off SCdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Level triggering 1 Edge triggering Level triggering One of these bar codes Enable Level Triggering 5C0 Enable Edge Triggering SC1 9 75 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Start of Message SOM Purpose SOM is the first character in a message sent to or received from the host computer through the terminal s serial port SOM cannot equal the same value that is set for EOM You cannot set SOM to any of these values AFF ACK REQ ENQ DLE e SEL e NEG NAK e XOFF Poll e XON RES EOT Note Before you can enable SOM you must configure the EOM command Syntax PEdata An acceptable value for data is any ASCII character Default x02 hexadecimal value for STX Scan To disable SOM scan this bar code Disable SOM PE Or To set SOM to an ASCII character 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set SOM PE 2 Scan a bar code for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LU EU _ 9 76 Stop Bits Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference Sets the number of stop bits on the serial port ICdata Acceptable values
89. to 4 27 overview of 3 3 Controller Connect Check Receive Timer 9 29 Controller Connect Check Send Timer 9 30 Controller IP Address 9 32 Data Bits 9 33 Decode Security 9 34 Default Router 9 35 default settings list of A 8 to A 11 definition G 8 Display Backlight Timeout 9 36 Display Contrast 9 38 Display Font Type 9 39 EOM 9 40 Flow Control 9 41 Handshake 9 42 Host IP Address 9 43 Interleaved 2 of 5 9 45 Keypad Caps Lock 9 47 Keypad Clicker 9 47 Keypad Type 9 48 LRC 9 49 Maximum Retries 9 49 MSI 9 51 Network Activate 9 52 Network Loopback 9 52 Network Port 9 53 Parity 9 55 I 6 Plessey 9 55 Poll 9 56 Postamble 9 57 Preamble 9 58 RAM Drive Size 9 60 recording the configuration 3 23 to 3 30 Resume Execution 9 62 RF Domain 9 63 RF Inactivity Timeout 9 64 RF Roaming Flag 9 65 RF Security ID 9 66 RF Security ID Override 9 67 RF Transmit Mode 9 68 RF Wakeup On Broadcast 9 69 Scan Ahead 9 69 Scanner Mode 9 70 Scanner Redundancy 9 71 Scanner Selection 9 72 Scanner Timeout 9 74 Scanner Trigger 9 75 scanning labels to configure the terminal 3 15 SOM 9 76 Stop Bits 9 77 Subnet Mask 9 77 syntax listed by A 12 TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout 9 79 Terminal IP Address 9 80 Time and Date 9 82 Time in Seconds 9 83 Timeout Delay 9 84 troubleshooting 6 11 6 12 6 13 UPC EAN 9 85 using 9 3 variable data entering 9 6 Configuration Commands Via Serial Port command 9
90. two numbers in the subnet mask address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ANIM A 9 78 Configuration Command Reference TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout Purpose Syntax Default Scan Defines the maximum timeout that TCP will allow between retries of a transmission in a TCP IP direct connect network before it gives up For example 32 means that the timeout between retries is never longer than 32 seconds Intermec has determined that the optimum setting is 32 seconds NHdata Acceptable values for data are 0 No timeout 30 120 Transmit timeout in seconds 32 seconds To set the default TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout scan this bar code Default TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout NH32 To set the TCP IP maximum transmit timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout 4 4 NH 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes ANA AT 0 ANTM NANT 2 3 LL LTEM A 45 AMAT ANT 6 47 9 79 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout continued AUAM ATUM Q Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode UITIUM x Terminal IP Address Purpose Defines the IP address assigned to the T2425 in your 2 4 GHz RF network An IP address is a uni
91. using the terminal in a cold temperature environment and need to replace or charge the battery pack let the battery packs warm up for a half hour before you charge them e Store the battery chargers and spare battery packs in a warm office environment to ensure the most efficient operation Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack The battery pack is the main power source for the terminal and it charges the backup battery when required If the main battery pack charge goes low you need to replace it or charge the battery pack as soon as possible There are two ways to find out if the battery pack is low The Battery icon appears and remains on solid on the top line of the screen and the terminal beeps once every 15 seconds Check the status of the battery pack using the Battery Status diagnostic test For help see Chapter 7 Running Diagnostics If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment and need to replace or charge the battery pack let the battery packs warm up for a half hour before you charge them Store the battery chargers and spare battery packs in a warm office environment CAUTION Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Caution Removing the battery pack while the terminal is on may cause loss of data Conseil Ne d tachez pas le jeu de piles pendant que le lecteur est actif car cela pourrait entra ner la perte de donn es To remove the battery pack 1 Press to turn of
92. when the screen prompts you to enter a file name Note Make sure your template name has a TPL file extension File name 242XU 060 3 Press The new template menu appears on your terminal Loading a Validation File Use a validation file to ensure that the information you enter in the input fields of your terminal screen is correct There are two ways to load a validation file on the T2425 e You can download the validation file T2425 from the Model 200 Controller For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual e You can use the T2425 to request a validation file from the Model 200 Controller To request a validation file from the controller 1 From the template menu press to download a new file The screen prompts you to enter a file name File name 242XU 060 5 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 Type the name of the validation file you want to download Note Make sure that your filename contains a valid file extension The filename cannot have the TPL extension or the screen mapping application will try to load the validation file as a template 3 Press to download the validation file from the controller 5 22 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This chapter lists the problems you may have while using the terminal and gives some possible solutions You will also find instructions that explain how to replace the antenna and clea
93. when you press the Scan button or activate a cabled laser scanner In One Shot mode the laser turns on and stays on until you release the button or scanner trigger or a label is decoded In Automatic mode you can continuously scan bar code labels without having to release the button or scanner trigger between labels Scanner Redundancy Defines the number of scans voting the scanner takes of the same label When set voting requires the terminal to decode the same bar code label multiple times during a single scanner event and compare the decoded information for a match before signaling a good read Scanner Selection Identifies the type of scanner you have connected to the TRAKKER Antares terminal module for cabled scanners The terminal can optimize the scanning performance by using the scanner you define in this command If you have a long range scan module Scanner Selection allows you to configure the spotting beam Scanner Timeout Defines the maximum length of time the scanner stays on each time you press the Scan button or activate the cabled laser scanner Scanner Trigger Allows you to set the triggering to level or edge triggering With level triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on until you release the Scan button or the trigger on a cabled scanner In edge triggering you activate the scanner and the laser turns on and stays on until you activate the scanner a second time or the scanner timeout turn
94. with the 64K block number and the checksum value before and after the test If you do get an error contact your local Intermec service representative Caution If the Suspend Resume Test fails stop using the terminal Contact your local Intermec service representative Conseil Si le test Suspend Resume choue veuillez ne plus utiliser le terminal Contactez le repr sentant du service client le Intermec de votre r gion Reader Command Reference Reader Command Reference This chapter describes the reader commands that you can use while operating the terminal Reader commands such as Backlight On allow you to perform a task on the terminal Using Reader Commands A reader command causes the terminal to perform a task Some reader commands temporarily override the configuration settings and some actually change the configuration settings For example you can turn the backlight on to easily view the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal s screen when you are working in a dimly lit environment You can execute reader commands by scanning a command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label pressing keys on the keypad or choosing a command from the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System e sending a command from a device on the serial or RF network There are three general types of reader commands e Accumulate mode commands e Operating commands File management commands The reader commands are listed in alphabetica
95. 0 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal 1 191 BF L 192 CO 193 C1 T 194 C2 H 195 C3 196 C4 197 C5 a 198 C6 A 199 C7 L 200 C8 F 201 C9 L 202 CA T 203 CB t 204 CC 205 CD 206 CE a 207 CF 5 208 DO D 209 D1 E 210 D2 211 D3 212 D4 213 D5 214 D6 215 D7 216 D8 4 217 D9 r 218 DA E 219 DB C 10 International Character Support English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal 220 DC broken pipe 221 DD I 222 DE m 223 DF 224 EO B 225 E1 226 E2 227 E3 6 228 E4 O 229 E5 u 230 E6 P 231 E7 232 E8 233 E9 234 EA 235 EB y 236 EC Y 237 ED E 238 EE i 239 EF 240 FO 241 Fl a 242 F2 34 243 F3 244 F4 245 F5 246 F6 247 F7 degree 248 F8 C 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal 249 F9 dot 250 FA superscript 251 FB 3 superscript 252 FC 2 superscript 253 FD a 254 FE Space 255 FF C 12 Glossary Glossary G 10BaseT 10Base2 or 10Base5 An implementation of Ethernet IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers standards to describe the primary characteristics of the cabling system The 10 signifies 10 Mbps Base indicates that the type of signaling used is baseban
96. 18 Scanner Timeout command 2 42 9 74 Scanner Trigger configuration command 2 42 9 75 Off reader command 8 11 On reader command 8 10 scanning ASCII characters list of labels B 6 to B 10 bar code labels 2 40 button trigger operation configuring 9 70 options defined 2 42 reader commands using 8 10 safety information 2 40 Scan Ahead command configuring 9 69 standard range scan module using 2 40 timeout configuring 9 74 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 screen adjusting from the keypad 2 16 contrast adjusting 2 17 conventions defined xx icons Battery 2 19 2 34 Caps Lock 2 18 Connect 2 19 Ctrl 2 18 Data 2 18 Function Left 2 18 Function Right 2 18 I 14 Radio 2 18 Shift 2 18 Viewport 2 19 overview of using 2 15 specifications A 5 troubleshooting 7 14 viewport using 2 16 screen mapping communications errors 6 18 data entry errors 6 19 definition G 21 downloading a template 5 19 entering data in a screen 5 20 initialization errors 6 16 keypad chart for entering characters 2 12 illustrated 2 5 using 2 4 to 2 11 Model 200 Controller preparing 4 15 requesting new template 5 20 starting 1 30 5 19 troubleshooting 6 16 to 6 19 validating input 5 21 script files definition G 21 security ID See RF security ID serial communications See serial port Serial Loopback screen defined 7 19 serial port cable specifications A 6 communications troubleshooting 6 15 configurat
97. 25 DEdata Append Time 9 10 DFdata Display Backlight Timeout 9 36 Djdata Display Contrast 9 38 DTdata Display Font Type 9 39 ERdata Resume Execution 9 62 A 12 Terminal Specifications A Configuration Commands by Syntax continued Syntax EZdata FRdata HBdata IAdata IBdata ICdata IEdata IFdata Idata ILdata ITdata KAdata KCdata KTdata NAdata NCdata NCdata NDdata NGdata NHdata NLdata NPdata NOdata NRdata NSdata NUdata NVdata NXdata PEdata PFdata PGdata Command Automatic Shutoff RAM Drive Size Poll Polling Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Timeout Delay LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Data Bits Flow Control Configuration Commands Via Serial Port Keypad Caps Lock Keypad Clicker Keypad Type Network Activate Controller IP Address UDP Plus network Host IP Address TCP IP network Terminal IP Address Network Port TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout Network Loopback Controller Connect Check Receive Timer Controller Connect Check Send Timer Maximum Retries Subnet Mask Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit Default Router Start of Message SOM End of Message EOM Handshake also known as AFF For Help See Page 9 10 9 60 9 56 9 12 9 55 9 77 9 84 9 49 9 33 9 41 9 28 9 47 9 47 9 48 9 52 9 32 9 43 9 80 9 53 9 79 9 52 9 29 9 30 9 49 9 77 9 8 9 7 9 35 9 76 9 40 9 42 A 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Te
98. 28 configuration file not found screen 1 15 Configuration Menu exiting and saving changes 3 13 options defined 3 8 problems while exiting 6 8 to 6 13 Configure Device Initialization Download dialog box 5 14 Configure Download Server dialog box 5 14 configuring 2 4 GHz RF network overview 1 22 4 14 access point 4 16 bar code symbologies 1 32 choosing 3 4 booting the terminal on resume 6 25 Change Configuration command using 8 8 controller IP address 1 25 default configuration command using 8 8 restoring 3 19 6 6 configuring continued default settings list of A 8 to A 11 host IP address 1 25 Model 200 Controller 4 15 network activate parameter 1 25 network parameters 1 23 to 1 28 network port 1 27 operating parameters described 3 5 overview of configuration parameters 3 3 recording the configuration 3 23 to 3 30 remotely network overview 4 22 serial port via 4 12 T2425 from controller 4 22 T2425 from host 4 23 to 4 27 RF domain 1 26 RF network parameters defined 4 17 RF security ID 1 26 Save Configuration command using 8 10 scanning bar code labels 3 15 serial port parameters 1 18 to 1 21 4 11 summary of methods 3 3 terminal emulation applications 1 15 terminal IP address 1 26 time and date 1 16 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System using 3 6 to 3 15 troubleshooting 6 8 to 6 13 Connect icon blinks troubleshooting 4 20 6 14 described 2 19 not displayed troubleshooting 4 19
99. 2XU 144 The serial port test begins immediately If the serial port hardware is functioning correctly the terminal displays WAITING and then RECEIVING The Serial Port Loopback test uses the serial communications settings that are listed on the bottom half of the screen On the host you can use a serial communications package to send data to the terminal If the terminal is communicating with the host the data is echoed back If there is a problem an error message appears on the terminal screen The status information on the screen is updated every 500 ms For help with serial port errors contact your local Intermec service representative 7 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Defining the System Diagnostics Screens Access Point Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition 7 20 Each system diagnostic screen is defined in this section Use the Access Point screen to get version and address information about the access point the terminal is communicating with across the 2 4 GHz RF network Note The Access Point diagnostic applies only to the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal System Diagnostics menu Radio ROM Uer U1 6EB Radio MAC Addr 6620A6366516 Access Point Name SHIPPING Access Point MAC B620A6301365 L Esc1 Exit 242XU 139 The screen displays the radio ROM firmware version radio MAC machine address the access point name and the access
100. 3 These characters were replaced to provide additional line draw capability Character Decimal Hexadecimal Space 0 00 1 01 2 02 T 3 03 T 4 04 j 5 05 6 06 7 07 C 8 08 Q 9 09 o 10 0A F 11 0B T 12 0C 13 0D 14 OE D 15 OF gt 16 10 C 3 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual C 4 English and Western European Character Set continued Character 4 1 Y e Un A r comma dash Decimal 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Hexadecimal 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D International Character Support English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal period 46 2E 47 2F 0 48 30 1 49 31 2 50 32 3 51 33 4 52 34 5 53 35 6 54 36 7 55 37 8 56 38 9 57 39 58 3A 59 3B 60 3C 61 3D gt 62 3E 63 3F 64 40 A 65 41 B 66 42 C 67 43 D 68 44 E 69 45 F 70 46 G 71 47 H 72 48 I 73 49 J 74 4A C 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal K 75 4B L 76 4C M 77 4D N 78 4E O 79 AF P 80 50 Q 81 51 R 82 52 S 83 53 T 84 54 U 85 55 V 86 56 W 87 57 X 88 58 Y 89 59 Z 90 5A 91 5B N 92 5C 93 5D A 94
101. 400 communications dock Host computer 242XU 160 You need to set these serial port parameters to have the terminal communicate with a host computer or serial device in a wired network Serial Port Parameter Baud rate Data bits EOM End of Message Flow control Handshake LRC Parity Poll Polling SOM Start of Message Stop bits Timeout delay Default Value 19200 7 x03 hexadecimal value for ETX None Disabled Disabled Even Disabled x02 hexadecimal value for STX 1 10 seconds The values you set for the terminal s serial port must match the values set for the host s or other device s serial port You use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to set the parameters on the terminal For a detailed definition of these parameters see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Getting Started To set the serial port parameters 1 From the Main Menu press A or W to choose the Configuration Menu and then press 4 The Configuration Menu appears Note If you are not in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System press SGQIr L2 w to access the Main Menu CONFIGURATION MENU Sumbologies Menu Communications Menu Terminal Menu TL Felect item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 010 2 Press W to choose the Communications Menu and then press The Communications Menu appears T2425 Communications Menu T2420 Communications Menu
102. 425 terminals such as the volume of its audio signals and the bar code symbologies it decodes These characteristics are controlled by configuration parameters The values you set for the configuration parameters determine how the terminal operates By customizing the terminal s configuration you can set up the terminal to operate easily and efficiently within your data collection system Note To learn the purpose and syntax of each configuration parameter or command see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference The configuration parameters can be organized into three groups which are discussed in the next sections bar code symbologies communications and general operation When you configure the terminal you are performing one or more of these tasks e Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes e Specifying How the Terminal Will Communicate e Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes This list contains all the bar code symbologies the terminal can decode e Codabar e Code 2 of 5 e Interleaved 2 of 5 I2 of 5 e Code 11 e Code 39 e MSI e Code 128 e Code 49 e Plessey e Code 16K e Code 93 e UPC EAN When the terminal ships only these three symbologies are enabled e Code 39 e Code 128 e UPC EAN If you are using one of the other symbologies to encode your bar code labels you need to configure the termina
103. 5E _ underline 95 5F 96 60 a 97 61 b 98 62 c 99 63 d 100 64 e 101 65 102 66 g 108 67 C 6 International Character Support English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal h 104 68 i 105 69 j 106 6A k 107 6B l 108 6C m 109 6D n 110 6E o 111 6F P 112 70 q 113 71 r 114 72 115 73 t 116 74 u 117 75 v 118 76 w 119 77 x 120 78 y 121 79 z 122 7A 123 7B solid pipe 124 7C j 125 7D 126 7E a 127 7F 128 80 129 81 130 82 131 83 132 84 C7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal 133 85 134 86 135 87 136 88 137 89 138 8A 139 8B 140 8C i 141 8D A 142 8E A 143 8F E 144 90 ee 145 91 A 146 92 147 93 6 148 94 149 95 150 96 151 97 y 152 98 153 99 154 9A 155 9B 156 9C 157 9D x 158 9E f 159 9F 160 AO 161 A1 C 8 International Character Support English and Western European Character Set continued Character Decimal Hexadecimal 162 A2 163 A3 164 A4 165 A5 a 166 A6 o 167 A7 i 168 A8 169 A9 not symbol 170 AA 171 AB V 172 AC i 173 AD 174 AE 175 AF 176 BO 177 B1 178 B2 179 B3 d 180 B4 181 B5 182 B6 183 B7 184 B8 1 185 B9 l 186 BA 1 187 BB d 188 BC e 189 BD Y 190 BE C 9 TRAKKER Antares 242
104. 6 19200 Baud 38400 Baud LOB ATALANTA M IA7 1TA8 9 12 Configuration Command Reference Beep Volume Purpose Syntax Default Scan Or Adjusts the volume of the terminal s audio signals For a list of all the beep sounds and audio signals see Understanding the Terminal s Audio Signals in Chapter 2 Set the beep volume according to operator preference and work environment BVdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Off 1 Quiet 2 Normal 3 Loud 4 Very loud 8 Lower volume 9 Raise volume Normal One of these bar codes Beep Volume Off Beep Volume Quiet HORAM AMT ITA EA M BV0 BV1 Beep Volume Normal Beep Volume Loud O A AORTA BV2 BV3 Beep Volume Very Loud BV4 Scan one of these bar codes repeatedly to achieve the desired volume Raise Beep Volume Lower Beep Volume LULA EM M LULA M M BV9 BV8 9 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Codabar 9 14 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Enables or disables decoding of Codabar symbology Codabar is a self checking discrete symbology The American Blood Commission ABC Codabar requires that you retain and transmit the start stop code digits when processing a Codabar symbol As a result configuration CD10 is an illegal configuration CDdata Acceptable values for data must be two digits corresponding to Digit Value Description Disabled ABC Standard Fi
105. Appucaton 4 512K RAM execution space Note The remaining RAM is the Malloc free memory pool 2 37 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the Scan Module 2 38 You use the scan module accessories with the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals to scan and enter bar code data The terminal decodes the bar code label and enters the data or command you scanned There are three types of scan modules available e Module for cabled scanners e Standard range scan module e Long range scan module Note See your Intermec sales representative for information about the availability of the long range scan module The module for cabled scanners has a port to attach a wand laser scanner or CCD scanner The standard range scan module has an integrated laser scanner The long range scan module has an integrated laser scanner with a spotting beam For more information about your scan module see the instruction sheet that ships with the module You can scan bar code labels with the integrated standard or long range scan module or with the scanner device that is connected to the module for cabled scanners Important You must have a scan module attached to use the terminal When you unpack the terminal and begin using it only three bar code symbologies are enabled Code 39 Code 128 and UPC EAN If you are using bar code labels that are encoded in another symbology you need to enable that symbology on
106. Backlight Timeout To send and receive configuration data or files you need to write an application for the host that can communicate with the Model 200 Controller in a UDP Plus network or directly through the access point in a TCP IP direct connect network You use the Terminal Message Format TMF protocol in the 2 4 GHz RF network to send and receive transactions between the host application and the terminal UDP Plus is an Intermec value added protocol TCP IP is an industry standard protocol For help see About Network Connectivity and Protocols later in this chapter Configuring the T2425 in a UDP Plus Network You can use the host computer to configure one TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal in your 2 4 GHz RF network For example you may want to change the Beep Volume command and the Display Backlight Timeout 4 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 24 To send and receive configuration data you need to write an application for the host that can communicate with the Model 200 Controller For help see the Model 200 Controller Technical Reference Manual You use the Terminal Message Format TMF protocol in the 2 4 GHz RF network to send and receive transactions between the host application and the terminal Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal while configuring the terminal To set up the Model 200 Controller e Configure a peer to peer destination
107. C A EAN 13 disabled UPC A EAN 13 enabled UPC A only enabled UPC E disabled UPC E enabled EAN 8 disabled EAN 8 enabled Supplementals are not allowed Supplementals are allowed Discard check digit Transmit check digit Discard number system digit Transmit number system digit Discard the leading zero for UPC A Retain the leading zero for UPC A UPC A EAN 13 enabled UPC E enabled EAN 8 enabled Supplementals allowed Transmit check digit Transmit number system digit Retain leading zero for UPC A 9 85 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual UPC EAN continued Scan To disable UPC EAN scan this bar code Disable UPC EAN CE000000 Or To enable UPC EAN 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Enable UPC EAN CE 2 Scan one of these bar codes to set the first digit Disable UPC EAN 13 Enable UPC EAN 13 0 1 Enable UPC A Only o 3 Scanone of these bar codes to set the second digit Disable UPC E Enable UPC E 0 1 4 Scanone of these bar codes to set the third digit Disable EAN 8 Enable EAN 8 0 1 5 Scanone of these bar codes to set the fourth digit Supplementals Not Allowed Supplementals Allowed 0 1 9 86 Configuration Command Reference Optional Scan one of these bar codes to set the fifth digit Discard Check Digit Transmit Check Digit 0 1 Optional Scan one of these bar codes to set the sixth digit
108. Command LATA 0 Configuration Command Reference continued continued Rename File _ Run Program LAM Scanner Trigger On LAM sy se Transmit File oYo Enable the Command 1 RepeatSteps 2 and 3 to disable or enable another reader command Note You can accumulate up to 250 characters in the buffer If the data accumulated exceeds 250 characters you will hear an error beep and the terminal will reject the last bar code read Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ANIM x 9 27 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Command Processing continued Or To disable or enable the ability to scan multiple read labels scan one of these bar codes Disable Multiple Read Labels Enable Multiple Read Labels DC 0 DC 1 Configuration Commands Via Serial Port 9 28 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Allows you to control the data the terminal receives through the serial port You can set this command to execute reader and configuration commands received through the serial port or treat all data as data without checking for special command syntax There are three options Disabled All data received through the serial port is treated as data The terminal will not execute reader or configuration commands sent or encoded in the data Enabled with TMF If the data is sent with the TMF Terminal Message Format h
109. Control Control Character Definition Character NUL Null or all zeroes DC1 SOH Start of Heading DC2 STX Start of Text DC3 ETX End of Text DC4 EOT End of Transmission NAK ENQ Enquiry SYN ACK Acknowledgment ETB BEL Bell CAN BS Backspace EM HT Horizontal Tab SUB LF Line Feed ESC VT Vertical Tab FS FF Form Feed GS CR Carriage Return RS SO Shift Out US SI Shift In SP DLE Data Link Escape DEL Full ASCII Charts The Code 39 characters P through Y may be interchanged with the numbers 0 through 9 Definition Device Control 1 XON Device Control 2 Device Control 3 XOFF Device Control Negative Acknowledge Synchronous Idle End Transmission Block Cancel End of Medium Substitute Escape File Separator Group Separator Record Separator Unit Separator Space Delete B 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Full ASCII Bar Code Chart The charts in this section list the Code 39 bar code label for each ASCII character To use these bar code labels you must configure the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 in Chapter 9 Control Characters NUL A U ETX AMT C ACK MIT GR HT LATTE I FF MITA M OL SI MI TIN O0 DC2 LIA M OR NAK MIT M U B 6 SOH NN AX EOT MIT 6D BEL AMI TM G LF LU CR MI TIN M DLE MI p DC3 LATA M S SYN LA
110. E FROM SYSTEM 0 dwError 0 szPrompt sizeof szPrompt 0 if bRet lstrcpy szPrompt X TEXT Unknown Error wsprintf szTitle X TEXT s failed with error code 0x x szFn dwError int id MessageBox HWND DESKTOP szPrompt szTitle MB ABORTRETRYIGNORE MB SETFOREGROUND if id IDIGNORE ExitProcess 0 4 32 Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 About Network Connectivity and Protocols The TRAKKER Antares terminals are hand held data collection terminals with network support The T2420 and T2425 communicate with a host computer or other serial device through the terminal s RS 232 serial port The T2425 also communicates with a host in the 2 4 GHz RF network either through the Model 200 Controller or directly through the access points The access point acts as a bridge between the Ethernet or token ring network and the wireless 2 4 GHz RF network In a UDP Plus network the terminal communicates through the Model 200 Controller to a host on an Ethernet token ring twinaxial coaxial or SDLC network In a TCP IP network the terminal communicates through the access point to the host on an Ethernet or token ring network The communications protocol stack for the TRAKKER Antares terminal is developed using the Open Systems Interconnection OSI seven layer model The illustration on the next page shows how the 2 4 GHz RF network and RS 232 serial port m
111. File 5 8 Using the Serial Port to Transfer Applications and Files 5 8 Using the Model 200 Controller to Download Applications 5 11 Copying Files to the Model 200 Controller 5 12 Downloading Applications and Files to the T2425 5 13 Running the Application on the Terminal 5 16 Using Screen Mapping 5 19 Starting the Screen Mapping Application 5 19 Running Screen Mapping on Your Terminal 5 20 Requesting a New Template 5 20 Loading a Validation File 5 21 Troubleshooting How to Use This Chapter 6 3 Finding and Solving Problems 6 4 Terminal Will Not Turn On 6 5 Contents Problems While Operating the Terminal 6 5 Problems While Configuring the Terminal 6 8 T2425 Will Not Communicate With RF Network Devices 6 13 Problems Transmitting Data Through the Serial Port 6 15 Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application 6 16 Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan 6 20 Guidelines for Managing Batteries 6 23 Booting and Resetting the Terminal 6 25 Booting the Terminal 6 25 Booting the Terminal on Hesume 6 25 Using the Boot Menu 6 26 Resetting the Terminal 6 26 Maintaining and Cleaning the Terminal 6 28 Replacing the Antenna 6 28 Cleaning the Scan Module Window and Terminal Screen 6 30 Running Diagnostics What Diagnostics Are Available 7 3 Running Diagnostics From the Menu System 7 4 Defining the Diagnostics Screens 7 7 Defining the Software Diagnostics Screens 7 7 Application Events 7 7 Clear Task Profiles 7 8 Error Logger 7 8 Tas
112. For help see Code 39 in Chapter 9 e To include quotation marks when you set a value the entire value must be enclosed in quotation marks Type two sets of quotation marks to include one quotation mark as the value for a command For example to set the preamble to ABC D use AD ABC D When you scan bar code labels you change the terminal s current runtime configuration The changes are not saved in the terminal s flash memory To save the changes in flash memory scan this bar code label Save Configuration in Flash Memory 1 You can also use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help see the next section Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory Configuring the Terminal 3 Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory The TRAKKER Antares terminals use two copies of the configuration Runtime or RAM configuration is the current or active set of parameters and options enabled on the terminal The configuration is stored in RAM and will be lost if you boot or reset the terminal Boot or flash configuration is the set of parameters and options last saved in flash memory The configuration is stored in flash memory and will be saved and used if you boot or reset the terminal Here are the four ways you can configure the terminal and how the configuration is updated Runtime or RAM Boot or Flash Configure the Terminal Configuration Updated Configuration Updated Using the TRAKKER Antares Ye
113. Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference 6 47 g 9 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 RepeatSteps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the controller IP address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scanthis bar code Exit Accumulate Mode AL Sets the number of data bits the terminal uses when communicating with another device i e host computer through the serial port IIdata Acceptable values for data are 7 7 data bits 8 8 data bits 7 One of these bar codes 7 Data Bits AT AU TAM II7 8 Data Bits AUT AACA II8 9 33 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Decode Security Purpose Syntax Default Scan 9 34 Defines the security level to use when decoding bar codes When you select a lower decode security level the terminal can decode bar codes with poorer print quality Note Only use the low parameter as a temporary solution until you can improve the bar code label print quality CSdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Low 1 Moderate 2 High Moderate One of these bar codes Low Decode Security CS0 Moderate Decode Security CS1 High Decode Security 4CS2 Configuration Command Reference Default Router Purpose Syntax Default Scan Or Defines the IP address
114. RF driver network or radio subsystem information does not apply to the TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal since it does not have a radio 7 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Suspend Resume Test Where Available Purpose Sample Screen 7 26 Definition CAUTION Use the Suspend Resume Test to test the terminal memory and make sure the memory is being preserved through a suspend and resume cycle System Diagnostics menu SUS PEND RESUME TEXT Press ENTER to start After first heep press I The unit suspends Hait minimum 1 min Press I O to resume Unit will beep Results are displayed CEnter Execute test CEsc Exit 242XU 140 Press to start the test The terminal performs a checksum for each 64K block of memory After the terminal beeps press j to suspend Leave the terminal off for at least 1 minute If you suspect that a suspend resume is causing data loss leave the terminal off for several minutes or even several hours If there is a problem the error is easier to detect if the terminal stays in Suspend mode for a longer time Press j to resume The terminal again creates a checksum for each 64K block of memory and compares the checksums The results of the test appear on the screen If the CHECKSUMS MATCH message appears suspend resume is preserving the terminal memory and there are no problems If there is a problem the message CHECKSUM ERROR appears
115. Scan Determines whether or not the T2425 radio can roam between access points All access points are master stations and each master has a unique channel If you have five access points in one domain the T2425 will connect to one access point when you turn it on This access point becomes the master station for the T2425 When you set the RF roaming flag to Not Allowed the T2425 will only communicate with the master station access point to which it first connects If you allow roaming the T2425 can communicate with any access point in the same domain RRdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Allowed 1 Not allowed Allowed One of these bar codes RF Roaming Allowed 4 RRO RF Roaming Not Allowed 4 RRI1 9 65 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RF Security Identification Purpose Defines the password you can set for secured transmission and receipt of data between devices in the network To communicate all access points and T2425 terminals in the subnetwork must have matching security IDs Syntax RSdata Acceptable values for data are up to 20 ASCII characters When you enter the RS command without data the RF security ID is disabled or set to no characters blank Note You can only set the RF security ID with the 2 4 GHz RF network enabled The Network Activate configuration command must be configured to 2 4 GHz RF Network before you can save any changes to the RF sec
116. TA V STX AU AA B ENQ LATA SE BS TULIT 6H VT UNAM 6K SO LATI 6N DC1 LAT Q DC4 AMT T ETB LU oW Control Characters continued CAN MIL OX ESC AX RS TL D EM AU Y FS AT IA B US MT M oE Wii and Punctuation Marks exclamation point i D apostrophe asterisk ANON O comma quotation marks AUT IMT H AUN K LAT H colon Full ASCII Charts SUB HAM 7 GS AT AC oC DEL HARI M oT AMA FAC amp LATINAM F NIN AG dash BALAAM M period semicolon B 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Symbols and Punctuation Marks continued 2 UT NA J UH A oV tilde UAM S RUT L LANI pt Numbers 0 MITA 0 3 HIA 3 6 LL s 9 HIT 9 B 8 lt LL G I K LATTE N left single quote E R 1 UL ai 4 AMT 4 7 px gt LUAM ULM M underline DIDI pipe LUAM O Space 2 HII o 5 LIA p 8 HIA Q Uppercase Letters A HII A D LATA D G AM G J AMA p M LATA M P ELM P S LIU Gx V LIA Vt Y LULA Y B MUM B E LIA E H MUA H K AUT K N LRL N Q AU O f LII T W TIL PE Z HAMA
117. VT ANSI Telnet communications RF Domain The domain defines a logical partition or subnetwork of the network To establish communications you must assign the same domain number to every RF device in a wireless network The domain number you set on the terminal must match the domain that is set on each access point the terminal may communicate with You can continue to collect data with the terminal as you roam between access points as long as all the devices have the same domain number RF Security Identification ID This optional parameter defines the password you can set for secured transmission and receipt of data between devices in the wireless network To communicate each access point and terminal must have matching security IDs If the security ID is set on the access point you must also set the security ID on each T2425 that may communicate with the access point Note The Network Activate command must be configured to 2 4 GHz RF network before you can save any changes to the RF security ID parameter Default Router Provides a software and hardware connection between two or more networks that permits traffic to be routed from one network to another on the basis of the intended destinations of that traffic When the Model 200 Controller UDP Plus or host TCP IP is on a different subnetwork than the T2425 you need to set the default router IP address The terminal uses the router address to send packets across the network to the contr
118. Viewport 2 16 2 19 input devices configuring for scan module 9 72 list for scan module A 8 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 installing 2 4 GHz RF network overview 1 22 4 4 to 4 8 4 14 access point 4 16 backup battery 1 8 2 31 battery pack 1 10 2 25 Model 200 Controller 4 15 network overview 4 3 scan module 2 39 Interactive Reader Language See IRL interface cable connecting to scan module 6 21 Interleaved 2 of 5 command 9 45 disabled with Code 2 of 5 9 17 Intermec support services xv international characters accent marks typing 2 11 keypad using to enter 2 9 table of C 3 to C 12 IP address definition G 14 See also address IP definition G 14 IRL programs converting 5 7 Italian See European languages J K JANUS 7010 imager configuring for scan module 6 21 A 8 key Ef using 2 7 Cf using 2 7 S7 using 2 16 using 2 7 I 10 accent marks typing 2 11 conventions defined xix cursor using 2 8 Scan button using 2 40 special keys finding 2 4 keypad key described 1 31 f key using 2 7 Cf key using 2 7 key using 2 16 key using 2 7 alphanumeric illustrated 2 5 buffer definition G 14 characters capitalizing 2 8 chart for entering characters 2 12 conventions defined xix cursor keys using 2 8 European accent marks typing 2 11 illustrated 2 10 using 2 9 key code values displaying 7 16 options described 2 4 A 5 Scan button using 2 40 screen
119. When you press a second key the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Caps Lock This icon appears when you press _f z to enable the Caps Lock feature and type all alphabetic characters as uppercase letters When you press _f z to disable Caps Lock the icon disappears Function Left This icon appears when you press f The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key When you press a second key the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Function Right This icon appears when you press The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key When you press a second key the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Radio This icon appears when the Network Activate command is disabled on a T2425 or there is a problem with the radio card and it is turned off The Radio icon disappears when the network is enabled and the radio is on and transmitting For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Data This icon contains a period It appears on the screen when data is buffered in the RF interface The data is either waiting to be transmitted to the Model 200 Controller or host or received data has not been accepted by the T2425 s application When no data is being buffered in the RF interface the Data icon is off Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Understand
120. XU 132 Definition When you select the Clear Task Profiles option the terminal clears the Time field on the Task Status screen It also resets all counters that are used to calculate the Application Efficiency screen Error Logger Purpose You can use the Error Logger screen to display any errors that the system detected while you were using the terminal For help solving an error contact your local Intermec service representative Where Available Software Diagnostics menu Sample Screen ERROR LOGGER Current Time 231912 Time Err Address 624461 GES 9088080548 024359 GBB2 398000545 024358 BGBI 398000545 LEnter Next screen CEsc Exit 242XU 134 Definition Task Status Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Running Diagnostics The Error Logger screen shows the last 30 errors Press to see the next screen of errors The first column displays the time in HHMMSS The second column displays the error number The third column displays the internal firmware address which helps identify why the error occurred A programmer can use the Task Status screens to view the task name stack and the percentage of time a task has been running You can also use the Task Status screen to determine the type of RF network protocol TCP IP or UDP Plus loaded on the terminal Software Diagnostics menu Po TASK STATUS OE TASK STATUS SLOT ADDRESS TIME SLOT STACK UNUSED a 4
121. You need to change the default router address Choose Advanced Network from the Communications Menu The terminal and controller or host TCP IP network are on different networks and the terminal is not on the same network as the default router When the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork from the controller or host you must set the Default Router and Subnet Mask commands Set a valid IP address for terminal controller or host and default router For help see Using RF Communications on the T2425 in Chapter 4 If you cannot fix the addressing problem check with your network administrator to get the IP addresses for each RF network device TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems While Configuring the Terminal continued Problem You are configuring the serial port and see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Serial port configuration error SOM is set You must also set EOM Configuration was not updated You are configuring the serial port and see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Serial port configuration error SOM cannot equal EOM Configuration was not updated You are configuring the serial port and see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Serial port configuration error EOM 1 cannot equal EOM 2 Configuration was not updated You are configuring the serial port and see this er
122. a in a Configuration Command 9 6 Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit 9 7 Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit 9 8 Append Time 9 10 Automatic Shutoff 9 10 Baud Rate 9 12 Beep Volume 9 13 Codabar 9 14 Code 11 9 15 Code 16K 9 16 Code 2 of 5 9 17 Code 39 9 18 Code 49 9 22 Code 93 9 23 Code 128 9 24 Command Processing 9 25 Configuration Commands Via Serial Port 9 28 Controller Connect Check Receive Timer 9 29 Controller Connect Check Send Timer 9 30 Controller IP Address 9 32 Data Bits 9 33 Decode Security 9 34 Default Router 9 35 Display Backlight Timeout 9 36 Display Contrast 9 38 Display Font Type 9 39 End of Message EOM 9 40 Flow Control 9 41 Handshake 9 42 Host IP Address 9 43 Interleaved 2 of 5 9 45 Keypad Caps Lock 9 47 Keypad Clicker 9 47 Keypad Type 9 48 LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check 9 49 Contents xi TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Xii Maximum Retries 9 49 MSI 9 51 Network Activate 9 52 Network Loopback 9 52 Network Port 9 53 Parity 9 55 Plessey 9 55 Poll Polling 9 56 Postamble 9 57 Preamble 9 58 RAM Drive Size 9 60 Resume Execution 9 62 RF Domain 9 63 RF Inactivity Timeout 9 64 RF Roaming Flag 9 65 RF Security Identification 9 66 RF Security ID Override 9 67 RF Transmit Mode 9 68 RF Wakeup On Broadcast 9 69 Scan Ahead 9 69 Scanner Mode 9 70 Scanner Redundancy 9 71 Scanner Selection 9 72 Scanner Timeout 9 74 Scanner Tri
123. abetic characters you type on the keypad will be uppercase or capital letters KAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Caps lock off 1 Caps lock on Caps lock off One of these bar codes Caps Lock Off s Lock On HORTON Mi HH A KA0 KA1 Keypad Clicker Purpose Syntax Default Scan Enables or disables the keypad clicks The terminal sounds a click each time you press a key or decode a row of a two dimensional symbology KCdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disable keypad clicker 1 Enable keypad clicker Enabled One of these bar codes Disable Keypad Clicker Enable Keypad Clicker ANTUN T MITT TAM KCO 4 KC1 9 47 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Keypad Type Purpose Syntax Default Scan 9 48 The keypad type is initially configured in the terminal s firmware at the Intermec factory If you change the keypad from a terminal emulation keypad overlay to a programmable keypad overlay or vice versa you need to configure the keypad type to match the new keypad overlay Important After you change the keypad type you must save the configuration in flash memory and boot the terminal for the change to take effect Note The programmable keypad may be either an English language version or a European language version With the programmable keypad you can access all the characters in the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Font Set in Appendix C KTdata
124. abled Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Code 93 Enable Code 93 ORLON M HOHEM CFO 4 CFI1 9 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 128 9 24 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Notes Enables or disables decoding of Code 128 symbology Code 128 is a very high density alphanumeric symbology that supports the extended ASCII character set It is a variable length continuous code that uses multiple element widths CHdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Standard Code 128 2 UCC EAN Code 128 Standard One of these bar codes Disable Code 128 4CHO0 Enable Standard Code 128 CH1 Enable UCC EAN Code 128 CH2 If you configure Standard Code 128 the terminal will not decode Function Code 1 characters in the first position of a bar code label Any subsequent Function Code 1 characters are translated to the ASCII GS character as a separator for variable length fields If you configure UCC EAN Code 128 the terminal will decode a bar code label as Standard Code 128 unless one of the first two characters are a start character and a Function Code 1 In this case the bar code label is processed as described next 1 The Function Code 1 character is not transmitted 2 The three symbology ID characters C1 are transmitted 3 Theremaining Code 128 characters are decoded as Standard Code 128 Configuration
125. ached to the backup battery The other connector is attached to the terminal Firmly push the two battery wire connectors together until they lock The connectors are keyed so they cannot be connected incorrectly Battery wire connectors 242XU 086 3 Gently fold and push the backup battery wires into the open area of the backup battery compartment near the wall 242XU 089 4 Install a fully charged main battery pack For help see Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 2 32 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 5 Hook the bottom edge of the battery door into the bottom case above the backup battery compartment Push the door down to close it over the battery compartment Push the battery door latch down and slide it toward the top end of the terminal to lock the door in place ox Battery door latch LAA Du EN v 242XU 088 The main battery pack charges the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours Note The backup battery charges enough to operate the terminal within 20 minutes However the backup battery will only provide limited backup power if it is not fully charged Disposing of the NiCad Backup Battery The materials used in the construction of the TRAKKER Antares NiCad backup battery are recyclable Intermec strongly urges that you recycle the backup batteries when they reach the end of their useful lives Addition
126. ad Scan Backspace Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Enters Accumulate mode You can accumulate data from a series of bar code labels and enter them as a single label Not supported Not supported Enter Accumulate Mode 4 Deletes the last character from the current data record being accumulated If there is no data in the buffer the command has no effect Not supported Not supported Backspace 4 8 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Clear Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Enter Purpose Deletes the entire data record you are accumulating If there is no data in the buffer the command has no effect Not supported Not supported Clear o Enters the current data record and remains in Accumulate mode If no data exists a null string is entered From Network Not supported Keypad Not supported Scan Enter Exit Accumulate Mode Purpose Exits Accumulate mode and transmits the current data record If no data has From Network Keypad Scan been accumulated an empty data record is entered Not supported Not supported Exit Accumulate Mode _ Reader Command Reference Operating Reader Commands The reader commands you can use to operate or change the terminal s configuration are listed in this section The operating commands are listed in alphabetical order You will find the purpose syntax for
127. alled in the terminal Insert a fully charged main battery pack before you store the terminal If you are going to store the terminal for more than 2 weeks save your data and end your TE or screen mapping session to minimize the risk of data loss Remove both the main battery pack and the backup battery from the terminal 6 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 24 Guidelines for Managing Batteries continued Cold Temperatures Using the terminal in sub freezing environments If you use the terminal in a cold temperature environment battery life will be reduced Battery life depends on temperature battery model input device age of the battery pack your usage and duty cycle factors If you use the terminal for extended periods of time in sub freezing environments you may need to change the main battery pack more often Do not store the terminal in a cold temperature environment When you are not using the terminal keep it in a warmer area to make sure the battery chargers will continue operating If the Battery icon blinks the backup battery charge is low Move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery The backup battery charger operates between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C If you are using the terminal in an area outside this temperature range the backup battery will not charge Store the battery chargers and spare batteries in a warm office envi
128. ally the Environmental Protection Agency has classified worn out or damaged NiCad batteries or battery packs to be hazardous waste Several states have passed legislation that prohibits discarding these batteries into the municipal waste stream If you have any question on how to recycle or dispose of the NiCad backup batteries contact your local county or state hazardous waste management office 2 33 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 34 Checking the Power Remaining in the Batteries You can use the terminal s diagnostics to check the power remaining in the main battery pack and to check the status of the backup battery Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to check the status of the batteries For help see Chapter 7 Running Diagnostics Recognizing a Low or Discharged Battery If you see the Battery icon or hear a beep every 15 seconds the terminal is indicating that the main battery pack or the backup battery power is almost exhausted Use this table to find out which battery is low or discharged Low Battery Warning 242XU 110 The Battery icon turns on and stays on and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds 242XU 126 The Battery icon blinks 242XU 126 The Battery icon blinks and the terminal beeps every 15 seconds What You Need to Do Main battery pack is low 5 to 45 minutes of power left Replace the battery pack with a spare charged battery pack charg
129. ally distinct portion of memory or a storage device that functions as though it were a physically separate unit LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check character This character is an error checking character that is optionally appended to transmitted blocks of data and optionally checked on received blocks of data malloc The C library function that lets you allocate memory dynamically while the application is running If you disable the RAM drive on the terminal you can use the additional 256K for programmable memory allocation Model 200 Controller A network controller that connects Intermec s wired and wireless products to your local area network or directly to a host computer Modulus 43 check character Check character derivation method for Code 39 MSI code MSI code includes a start pattern data characters one or two check digits and a stop pattern It is fixed length continuous and non self checking This code is used to mark retail shelves for inventory reordering The character set is 0 to 9 plus additional symbols Similar to Plessey code G 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 16 multiple read label A bar code label that has a space as the first character after the start code The terminal stores a multiple read label in the buffer until you execute a command to transmit the label or scan a regular label Contrast with regular label NAU Network addressable unit A network add
130. ange Configuration Turn Off Beep Volume BVO The Change Configuration command is followed by the configuration command to turn off the beep volume BVO Default Configuration Purpose From Network 8 8 Keypad Scan Sets the terminal to its default configuration resets the firmware boots the terminal and runs your application The default configuration for the terminal is listed in Appendix A For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration in Chapter 3 When you use the Default Configuration command the default configuration is saved in RAM and flash memory The runtime and boot configuration are changed to the default configuration Note In the default configuration the Primary Network parameters are set to the default values The T2425 will no longer have a valid IP address and cannot communicate with other devices You need to configure the 12425 again For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 0 In the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System choose System Menu and then choose Load Default Values Default Configuration 0 Reader Command Reference Multiple Read Labels Purpose From Network Keypad Label Syntax Example A multiple read label is a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label that has a space as the first character after the start code The terminal stores a multiple read label in the buffer until you execute a command t
131. ap into the OSI model The terminal applications including terminal emulation and screen mapping are on top of the protocol stack Intermec provides a terminal communications API application program interface to interface to the protocol stack The API provides a common interface to these Intermec value added protocols e Terminal Message Format TMF is an Intermec proprietary protocol that is used to route data and network management messages between applications on the terminal and peer tasks on the controller or host e UDP Plus is an Intermec protocol built on top of the User Datagram Protocol UDP It maximizes the performance of wireless RF and hardwired networks and provides robust data communications Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP allows efficient file exchange between the terminal and the Model 200 Controller or host e Configurable Serial Port CSP protocol allows efficient file exchange between the T2420 or T2425 and the host through RS 232 serial communications The terminal uses the XMODEM protocol to transfer files via reader commands e Network management provides network access to the terminal configuration status and statistics Network management uses the Terminal Message Format to receive and send messages The remaining layers in the protocol stack are a series of standard protocols that interface with the drivers and hardware needed to support the 2 4 GHz RF network and RS 232 serial communications
132. ar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Receive File X1 2 Scan the bar code label s for the file you want to receive You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format drive filename 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and receive the file Exit Accumulate Mode _ You can create your own bar code labels to receive files by creating a bar code in this command format X1 drive filename To receive the file SHIPPING BIN on the terminal s drive C use this command X1 c shipping bin Receive File Via RF Communications Purpose From Network 8 14 Receives a file from the Model 200 Controller or host and saves it on the T2425 SR fromfilename drive tofilename Keypad Scan Example Reader Command Reference where oe ve is the command to receive a file that is transmitted over the RF network The R indicates a file transmitted via RF communications to the T2425 fromfilename is the name of the file you are transmitting from the Model 200 Controller or host to the T2425 On the controller the file must be sent from the D USERDATA directory To receive a file from the host you need to identify the path and filename Note Do not specify the controller pathname D USERDATA in the fromfilename field drive indicates the drive on the T2425 where you want to receive and st
133. arameters which includes configuring for terminal emulation screen mapping or client server applications Define the host communications parameters which includes the physical connection network adapter cards to the host 4 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 16 To use the screen mapping application on the T2425 you must also configure the following e Create the script file using the Script Builder tool on the controller Generate the template to download to the T2425 Configuring the Access Point The access point acts as a bridge to provide RF communications between the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal and the Model 200 Controller or host For help see your access point user s manual Note All access points that the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal may communicate with and roam between must be in the same IP subnetwork To have the T2425 communicate with the access point you must know the value of these parameters on the access point e RF domain e RF security identification ID optional Configuring the T2425 When you install the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal in a network you must configure a set of network parameters that control how the terminal communicates in the network There are two ways to configure the network parameters e Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help on configuring the network parameters see Chapter 1 Getting Started e Scan the conf
134. ares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Keypad Test Where Available Purpose Sample Screen 7 16 Definition An application programmer can use the Keypad Test screen to quickly find the hexadecimal key code value the decimal key code value and the scan code for any key on the keypad You can also use the test to make sure the keypad is operating correctly Hardware Diagnostics menu KEYPAD TEST Key Hex Dec can 1a 6i 9 1E hk 62 98 38 cd 63 99 2E Td 64 168 28 e 65 161 12 t 66 162 21 g 67 1803 22 7h 68 1804 23 d 69 1805 17 t 6A 1606 24 URS 6E 1807 25 T1 6c 168 26 CEscl Exit 242XU 133 Press any key or key combination on the keypad to display the hexadecimal decimal and scan code value of the key When you press the terminal pauses for a few seconds to display the values before you exit the screen For a complete list of key codes see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Font Set in Appendix C or refer to the TRAKKER Antares Application Development Tools System Manual Part No 064433 Radio Test Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition CAUTION Running Diagnostics Use the Radio Test screen on a T2425 to verify that you have a working radio Note The Radio Test applies only to the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal Hardware Diagnostics menu RADIO TEXT Test PASSED CEsec Exit 242XU 138 Before you start
135. ating 2 21 4 9 Command Processing command 9 25 to 9 28 commands configuration commands using 9 3 conventions defined xx reader commands using 8 3 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System selecting 3 9 communications cable specifications A 6 icons using to monitor 4 19 network protocols defined 4 33 to 4 35 network specifications A 6 RF configuration commands list of 3 25 A 10 RF specifications A 5 serial port configuration commands list of 3 27 A 11 connecting 4 10 using 4 11 troubleshooting 6 13 6 15 See also network communications dock charging batteries 2 27 connecting and using 4 10 copy files using to 5 8 power supply using 2 36 terminal accessory 1 4 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual communications dock continued upgrading the firmware using to 3 21 communications port See COM port communications protocol definition G 8 computer See host computer Configurable Serial Protocol defined 4 11 4 33 configuration commands Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit 9 7 Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit 9 8 AFF 9 42 Append Time 9 10 Automatic Shutoff 9 10 Baud Rate 9 12 Beep Volume 9 13 category listed by 9 4 Codabar 9 14 Code 11 9 15 Code 128 9 24 Code 16K 9 16 Code 2 of 5 9 17 Code 39 9 18 Code 49 9 22 Code 93 9 23 Command Processing 9 25 to 9 28 Configuration Commands Via Serial Port 9 28 configuring from controller 4 22 from host 4 12 4 23
136. attery Charger Quick Reference Guide 064213 Xxi Getting Started Getting Started 1 This chapter introduces the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals and explains how to get your new terminal up and running What Are the TRAKKER Antares Terminals The TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals are hand held data collection terminals You use these programmable terminals to run custom applications terminal emulation applications or screen mapping applications You use the TRAKKER Antares 2420 T2420 terminal to collect data and periodically upload the data to a host computer via serial wired communications The TRAKKER Antares 2425 T2425 terminal transmits data via serial communications or radio frequency RF communications in Intermec s 2 4 GHz RF network EN CGA compatible display Scan module Sx Antenna for RF communications Rechargeable batteries 7 Serial port 242XU 030 The TRAKKER Antares terminals are ergonomically designed to make data collection easy and include these features e Scan module accessory for bar code data collection e CGA compatible display angled for easy viewing e Keypad with 56 keys to support data collection The terminal ships with a keypad to match the application or language you ordered e Serial port to support RS 232 communications e Rechargeable lithium ion battery pack sold separately for main power and rechargeable NiCad backup battery fo
137. ave downloaded an application to the terminal you are ready to run and use it There are three ways to run an application Use the FileCopy utility For help see Using the Serial Port to Transfer Applications and Files earlier in this chapter Use the Run Program reader command For help see Run Program in Chapter 8 Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System The instructions in this section explain how to use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to load and run an application Note To run an application on a terminal with firmware version 1 x scan the Reset Firmware command or download the Reset Firmware command from the Model 200 Controller To run an application on the terminal 1 Press t Q rT 2 m or scan this bar code label to access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Enter Test and Service Mode _ Note You must press the C Left Enter key in this key sequence Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping The Main Menu appears Configuration Menu Diagnostics Menu Sustem Menu About TRAKKER 2466 N Select item CEnter Next screen EF11 Help CEsc Exit 242XU 001 2 Choose System Menu and press The System Menu appears File Manager Load Default Values Set Time and Date tore Configuration Upgrade Firmware TL Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 051 3 Choose File Manage
138. band signals occupy a 25 KHz bandwidth The 2 4 GHz radio frequency signal occupies a 1 MHz bandwidth Glossary G bar code density Number of data characters that can be represented in a linear unit of measure Bar code density is often expressed in characters per inch bar code label A label that contains a bar code symbol bar code symbology A scheme for encoding data as bar code Code 39 Codabar UPC EAN and Interleaved 2 of 5 are examples of different symbologies battery pack See lithium ion battery pack baud rate The number of discreet conditions or signal events per second In RS 232 and RS 422 485 systems baud rate is the same as bits per second bps binary file A file that contains a sequence of 8 bit data characters or executable code Compare to ASCII text file Binary files require special software for transmission boot Usually means to invoke a bootstrap process which involves building up a system from some simple preliminary instructions or information A boot invokes the BIOS boot sequence clears all memory and performs a complete power on self test POST to ensure that the hardware and peripherals are operational A boot initializes the system hardware for use by the system firmware and loads the default configuration currently stored in flash memory bridge An internetworking device that incorporates the physical and data link layers of the OSI model and allows you to connect networks or subnetwor
139. bled Symbologies Menu No check digit MSI option 1 modulus 10 check digits 2 modulus 10 check digits Check digits Discard Symbologies Menu Retain MSI option Plessey CI Disabled Symbologies Menu Discard check digit Plessey option Retain check digit UPC EAN CE UPC A EAN 13 Version A UPC E Version E EAN 8 Supplementals 3 24 Disabled Enabled UPC A only Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Yes No Symbologies Menu UPC EAN option Configuring the Terminal 3 Bar Code Symbologies Table continued Parameter Syntax Options Location in Configuration Menu UPC EAN continued Check digit Discard Retain Number system digit Discard Retain UPC A leading zero Discard Retain RF Network Communications Table T2425 Only Note The RF network parameters are different for each type of RF network protocol TCP IP or UDP Plus loaded on the terminal Parameter Syntax Options Location in Configuration Menu Acknowledgement Delay Lower 300 milliseconds Communications Menu Limit NV 200 2000 milliseconds Advanced Network option Acknowledgement Delay Upper 5000 milliseconds Communications Menu Limit NU 2000 60000 milliseconds Advanced Network option Controller Connect Check 60 seconds Communications Menu Receive Timer NP 1 3600 seconds Advanced Network option Controller Connect Check Send 35 seconds Communications Menu Timer NQ 1 3600 seconds Advanced Network option
140. bologies On the Symbologies Menu each symbology that is enabled has an asterisk next to the name of the symbology If your bar code symbology is disabled enable it and then try scanning the bar code label again Try setting the Scanner Selection command to the specific input device you have attached Check the bar code symbologies you have enabled on the terminal Enable only the symbologies that you are using 6 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan continued Problem When you press the Scan button the scanner LEDs at the top of the keypad do not light up When you release the Scan button the scanner LEDs at the top of the keypad do not turn off 6 22 Solution Move within 2 feet of a wall and press the Scan button again Make sure the scan module emits the red laser beam If the LEDs do not light there may be a problem with them For help contact your local Intermec service representative If the laser beam does not turn on check the other problems in this section for a possible solution The scanner LEDs will remain on if you configure the terminal to use edge triggering If you configure the terminal for level triggering and the scanner LEDs remain on there may be a problem with the LEDs Press the Scan button again without scanning a bar code label If the LEDs are still on contact your local Intermec service representative Troubleshooting
141. bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Note If you have a handstrap installed stretch the handstrap s elastic band to allow the T bar to slide out of the T bar opening on the bottom end of the terminal Move the handstrap out of the way to open the battery door 2 29 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Opening the Battery Door Battery door TOP 242XU 079 4 Remove the main battery pack For help see Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 5 Hold each of the backup battery connectors and gently pull to disconnect the backup battery Battery wire connectors 242XU 086 6 Holding the visible end of the backup battery slide the battery up and out of the battery compartment Continue with the next instructions to install the new backup battery 2 30 Learning How to Use the Terminal Removing the Backup Battery Backup battery Main battery pack compartment 242XU 083 To install a backup battery 1 Slide the backup battery into the lower half of the battery compartment The wired end of the backup battery should be visible in the compartment Backup battery Nc Main battery Ro Ze C fn pack compartment UZ 242XU 085 2 31 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 Find the two connectors in the backup battery compartment One connector is att
142. by name Defining the Software Diagnostics Screens Each software diagnostic screen is defined in this section Application Events Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition A programmer can use the current status of each event to help debug applications running on the terminal Software Diagnostics menu APPLICATION EVENTS APPLICATION EVENTS 0 0 COMI RX SELECT 8 0 HET TX SELECT 1 8 COM2 RX SELECT 9 0 TIME SELECT 2 0 RESERVED 16 6 COM4 RX SELECT 3 48 HET SELECT 11 6 4 0 LABEL SELECT 12 6 5 8 KEYBOARD SELECT 13 6 6 0 COM3 RX SELECT 14 6 7 8 15 0 CEnter Next screen CEnterl Next screen CEsecl Exit CEsc Exit 242XU 062 The terminal uses an event driven architecture All inputs to the terminal such as keypad or from the network arrive in the form of an event You can check the status of each event using the Application Events screen When an event is serviced by the application the event is cleared 0 means the event is cleared 1 means the event has occurred or is set TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Clear Task Profiles Purpose Clears the task profile counters so that you can begin accumulating statistics on the firmware subsystem tasks from a known point in time Where Available Software Diagnostics menu Sample Screen CLEAR TASK PROFILES Operating system task profile counters have heen cleared CEsecl Exit 242
143. cation programming interface A well defined interface to routines that an application can use to request and perform system level tasks application A software program or program package that makes calls to the operating system and manipulates data files allowing a user to perform a specific job ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard 7 bit code usually transmitted with a parity bit for a total of 8 bits per character Contrast with EBCDIC ASCII control character One of the first 32 characters 0 through 31 in decimal representation in the ASCII character set Each of these characters has a standard control function such as backspace or carriage return audio signals The terminal has a beeper and a clicker that produce audio signals to indicate terminal status You can change the beep volume and enable or disable the keypad clicker with configuration commands Automatic mode See Scanner mode automatic shutoff A terminal configuration feature that defines the maximum time the terminal stays on when there is no activity At automatic shutoff the contents of terminal memory are saved and the terminal resumes when it is turned on again backlight A light built into the terminal screen to make it easier to view the screen in dimly lit environments backup battery See NiCad backup battery bandwidth The size in hertz of the frequency range that a signal transmission occupies Typical narrow
144. cations see the TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit Reference Manual Converting IRL Programs The TRAKKER Antares terminals support IRL Intermec Reader Language by using IRL to C conversion programs You can convert IRL programs to Microsoft C C applications that use the TRAKKER Antares PSK functions For information about converting IRL programs contact your local Intermec service representative TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Converting the Application to a Binary File For your application to run on the T2420 or T2425 it must be stored as an executable binary file BIN instead of an executable file EXE Use the EXE2ABS EXE program that comes with the TRAKKER Antares PSK or EZBuilder to convert the file Note The FileCopy utility or the EZBuilder download tool will automatically convert an executable file EXE to an executable binary file BIN when you download the file If you download the applications using another method you need to convert the application to a binary file To convert an executable file to a binary file 1 Usethe TRAKKER Antares PSK or EZBuilder to develop the application 2 Convert the application from an executable file to a binary file by typing this command on your development PC drive NintermecNimt24NlibNexe2abs filename exe The conversion application EXE2ABS EXE creates an executable binary file named FILENAME BIN For example if your a
145. ck For example there is 30 power remaining You can continue using the battery pack until the Battery icon appears on the screen to indicate a low battery The backup battery test shows that the backup battery power is either GOOD or LOW If the status is LOW turn off the terminal Let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours 7 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Beeper Test Where Available Purpose Sample Screen 7 12 Definition You can test the terminal beeper to make sure the entire beep volume range and beep frequency range are available and working correctly The Beeper Test can also help you distinguish the different beep volumes to choose a level that you can hear in your working environment Choose the Main Board Menu from the Hardware Diagnostics menu BEEPER TEST SELECT BEEP TEST Hold down any key to stop test lub 39 Jam 622 L Esc1 Exit 242XU 145 Press 1 to test the beep frequency range The terminal will sound a series of beeps starting from a low frequency beep through the range to a high frequency beep and then back to a low frequency beep Press _2 to test the beep volume The terminal sounds a series of beeps from a quiet beep to a very loud beep Tests 3 and 4 also test the beep volume and frequency by playing a short tune If you do
146. cludes sample commands that are shown exactly as you should type them on your terminal or network device The manual also describes the syntax for many commands defining each parameter in the command This example illustrates the format conventions used for commands To send a configuration command from the Model 200 Controller use this syntax command command command n where is the Change Configuration command command is a configuration command For example BV is the command to set the Beep Volume on the terminal Enter the command BVO to turn off the beep volume You can include multiple configuration command parameters in the command to configure the terminal This table defines the conventions used in the example Convention Description Special font Commands appear in this font You enter the command exactly as it is shown Italic text Italics indicate a variable which you must replace with a real value such as a number filename keyword or command Before You Begin Conventions for Commands continued Convention Description Brackets enclose a parameter that you may omit from the command Do not include the brackets in the command Required parameters If a parameter is not enclosed in brackets the parameter is required You must include the parameter in the command otherwise the command will not execute correctly where This word introduces a list of the command s parameters and e
147. code It is based on Code 128 and is used widely to label unit dose packaging for the healthcare industry CPdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Standard Code 16K enabled 2 Code 16K enabled with Function Code 1 When you enable Code 16K with Function Code 1 the terminal decodes the bar code label and checks for a Function Code 1 in the first data character position If a Function Code 1 is the first character the terminal substitutes this Code 16K symbology identifier string for the Function Code 1 character K1 Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Code 16K CP0 Standard Code 16K Enabled CP1 Code 16K Enabled With Function Code 1 CP2 Code 2 of 5 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Or Configuration Command Reference Enables or disables decoding of Code 2 of 5 symbology Code 2 of 5 uses the bars to encode information and the spaces to separate the individual bars This code is discrete and self checking You can only enable Code 2 of 5 if the Interleaved 2 of 5 I2 of 5 code is disabled If you enable I 2 of 5 Code 2 of 5 is automatically disabled CCdata where data consists of three digits as follows First digit 0 Code 2 of 5 3 Bar Start Stop 1 Code 2 of 5 2 Bar Start Stop Second and 00 Disable Code 2 of 5 third digits 01 32 Label Length Disabled To disable Code 2 of 5 scan this bar code Disable Code 2 of 5 4 CC000 To enable Code 2 of 5 1
148. con and Data icon remain on 4 20 Status of Communications Partial communications The T2425 is trying to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller UDP Plus or is trying to connect to an access point Normal communications The T2425 can communicate with an access point and the Model 200 Controller UDP Plus or host Normal communications The T2425 is sending data to or receiving data from the Model 200 Controller or host Normal communications The T2425 has received data for an application from the Model 200 Controller or host The data is stored in the terminal s radio buffer until the application is ready to process the data What You Need to Do You may need to configure the terminal to communicate with other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network For help see Configuring the T2425 earlier in this chapter If the terminal is configured you may be out of range of an access point you may be about to go out of range of an access point or the access point may have recently been turned off You may also need to configure the controller UDP Plus or host Make sure the terminal is configured correctly and enabled Make sure the controller is turned on and data collection is started You can send and receive data between the terminal and the access point You can send and receive data between the terminal and the Model 200 Controller or host Note You may not see the Data icon bl
149. correctly 1 2 If the terminal is not on press 9 to turn it on Look at the top line of the terminal s screen If the Connect icon shown in the illustration appears and remains on solid the terminal is communicating with the access point Ina UDP Plus network a solid Connect icon also means that the terminal is communicating with the controller The terminal can send and receive data to the connected devices 242XU 109 Note The Connect icon is not instantaneously updated but it does tell you the communications status the last time data was sent or received from the terminal If you are having problems with network communications If the Connect icon blinks or is not on you need to check the network IP addresses and configuration Make sure the RF domain and RF security ID on the terminal match the values that are set on the access point If the Radio icon shown in the illustration remains on solid the Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and the radio is turned off 242XU 116 Make sure the Network Activate command is enabled and all the network parameters are set correctly For help follow the instructions for Configuring the T2425 and the RF Network earlier in this chapter 1 29 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Starting the Application and Using the Terminal Your T2420 ships loaded with a sample application You
150. creen When you move the cursor or viewport out of the home position upper left corner the Viewport icon displays until the viewport is returned to its home position 242XU 111 Adjusting the Screen From the Keypad The Backlight key is one of the special features built into the terminal s keypad You can use the Backlight key to e Turn the backlight on and off on the terminal s screen e Adjust the display contrast Change the beep volume of the terminal s audio signals For a detailed description of the backlight contrast and beep volume commands see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Note The Backlight key temporarily changes the backlight contrast or beep volume These changes are not saved permanently in flash memory Learning How to Use the Terminal Using the Backlight Key to Adjust the Screen Backlight key ace Obs 242XU 049 To turn the backlight on and off e Press QJ Turn the backlight on to more easily see the terminal s screen in dimly lit environments The backlight stays on for the length of time set in the Display Backlight Timeout command or until you press K77 again For more information about the command see Display Backlight Timeout in Chapter 9 Note You use the battery power at a faster rate with the backlight turned on To change the display contrast Press Lf G7 Each time you press f G7 it makes the display contrast o
151. d The T at the end means that twisted pair cable is used The number 2 5 or 10 at the end indicates the maximum cable length in hundreds of meters 3270 or 5250 terminal emulation An application that allows Intermec devices to emulate an IBM 3270 or 5250 terminal access point A wireless bridge that allows RF packets to go from the Intermec 2 4 GHz RF network to the Ethernet or token ring network Accumulate mode Operating mode in which the terminal stores scanned information in the terminal s data buffer until the terminal receives an Enter command AFF Affirmative Acknowledge character See handshake AID Attention Identifier character A character in a data stream indicating that the user has pressed a key such as Enter requesting an action by the system alphanumeric Character set containing letters numbers and other characters such as punctuation marks alphanumeric keypad The alphanumeric keypad on the TRAKKER Antares terminal has 56 keys to type alphabetic and numeric characters Although the keypad is smaller than a desktop terminal keyboard you use special keys on the terminal s keypad and press key combinations to access all the keys and functions ANSI American National Standards Institute A non governmental organization responsible for establishing many standards including a number of data communications and terminal standards TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual API Appli
152. d 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 40 WARNING Note The module guide pins and connector should fit easily into the connector on the terminal DO NOT force the module into the connector or you may damage the module connector the terminal connector or both 5 Insert the three screws into the module and tighten them to secure the scan module to the terminal Using the Standard Range Scan Module The standard range laser scan module emits a beam of laser light that is visible on a bar code label as you scan it The terminal decodes the bar code label and enters the data or command you scanned This section only explains the standard range scan module For help using the long range scan module or the module for cabled scanners see the instruction sheet that ships with the module Warning Do not look directly into the window area or at a reflection of the laser beam while the laser is scanning Long term exposure to the laser beam can damage your vision Avertissement Ne regardez pas directement la r flexion d un rayon laser ou dans la fen tre du laser lorsque celui ci est en op ration Si vous regardez trop longtemps un rayon laser cela peut endommager votre vue To scan a bar code label with the standard range scan module 1 Press to turn on the terminal 2 Hold the terminal at a slight angle a few inches from the bar code label The laser scan window in the scan module must be pointing toward the label 3
153. d determine if the RF security ID does not match between the access point and the terminal RNdata Acceptable values for data are 0 No 1 Yes ignore the RF security ID No One of these bar codes No RF Security ID Override RNO RF Security ID Override RN1 9 67 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RF Transmit Mode 9 68 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Defines the transmit mode that the T2425 radio uses There are three modes BFSK Binary Frequency Shift Key A broadcasting method the radio uses that lengthens the range but halves the throughput This method is switched when the RF protocol on the terminal determines that communications are degrading QFSK Quad Frequency Shift Key A broadcasting method the radio uses that shortens the range but doubles the throughput QFSK is the method used under standard radio conditions Auto The terminal radio automatically switches modes between BFSK and QFSK as needed Note Even if you set this configuration command the terminal radio will reset the parameter as needed to maximize the broadcasting range and throughput RTdata Acceptable values for data are 0 BFSK Binary Frequency Shift Key 1 QFSK Quad Frequency Shift Key 3 Auto BFSK One of these bar codes Set RF Transmit Mode to BFSK RTO Set RF Transmit Mode to QFSK RT1 Set RF Transmit Mode to Auto RT3 Configuration Command Ref
154. d is a 2 byte field containing one of these values CG Configuration Get request sent from the host application Cg Configuration Get response sent from the 12425 to the host CS Configuration Set request sent from the host application Cs Configuration Set response sent from the 12425 to the host configuration command _ is the reader or configuration command or commands you want to set on the terminal or the current value you want to retrieve from the terminal To save configuration changes in flash memory send the reader command 1 as the last command For a list of commands see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference or Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference To see examples of the host application transactions see Example 1 and Example 2 later in this section Configuring the T2425 in a TCP IP Direct Connect Network You can use the host computer to configure one TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal in your 2 4 GHz RF network For example you may want to change the Beep Volume command and the Display Backlight Timeout command To send and receive configuration data you need to write an application for the host that can communicate with a T2425 directly via an access point You use the Terminal Message Format TMF protocol in the 2 4 GHz RF network to send and receive transactions between the host application and the terminal For more about developing an application see Transferring Files in a TCP IP Direct Conn
155. d not work Repeat Step 1 Make sure you press and hold the 4 and 23 keys and then press the 9 key Press 8 to boot the terminal Once the terminal has finished booting your application appears If the terminal still will not reset or boot try loading the firmware For help contact your local Intermec service representative 6 27 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Maintaining and Cleaning the Terminal 6 28 The TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals are built for use in a rugged industrial working environment You may need to perform these minor maintenance tasks to keep the terminal in good working order e Replace the antenna on the T2425 e Clean the screen e Clean the scan module window The antenna is one of the few exposed parts that may be damaged while you use the T2425 You can order and replace the antenna using the instructions in this section If you do have problems with other mechanical parts contact your local Intermec service representative for help Clean the scan module window and terminal screen as often as needed for the environment in which you are using the terminal Each procedure is described in detail in this section To order replacement parts contact your local Intermec service representative or contact Intermec at Intermec Corporation 6001 36th Ave West P O Box 4280 Everett Washington 98203 9280 Telephone 1 425 348 2600 Replaci
156. d your access point user s manual To use your T2425 in a TCP IP direct connect 2 4 GHz RF network you must first install and configure the access points For help see your access point user s manual You must also set up your host to communicate with the devices in the RF network Note You can use a T2425 running UDP Plus protocol and the Model 200 Controller in a pass through network You establish a direct TCP IP socket connection from the T2425 to the host through the controller For more information see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Configuring the T2425 Network Parameters You need to set these network parameters to begin using RF communications UDP Plus Network Parameters Network Parameter Default Value Network activate Disabled Controller IP address 0 0 0 0 Terminal IP address 0 0 0 0 RF domain 0 RF security identification ID None not set 1 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual TCP IP Network Parameters Network Parameter Default Value Network activate Disabled Host IP address 0 0 0 0 Terminal IP address 0 0 0 0 Network Port 23 RF domain 0 RF security identification ID None not set You use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to set these parameters For a detailed definition of these parameters see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Note If the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork from the Model 200 Controller or host you must also con
157. de generator You enter simple commands to create menus screens and transactions and to define menu items labels and data fields You can also set attributes define function keys and specify other processing such as calculations for the application Once you have defined the application EZBuilder generates the application program code The Simulator Editor mimics a TRAKKER Antares terminal and lets you test the application on your computer Converting Applications Between JANUS and TRAKKER Antares You can develop applications that run on both the JANUS devices and the TRAKKER Antares terminals However there are some differences that you need to plan for in your applications The TRAKKER Antares is an intelligent terminal A JANUS device is a DOS compatible computer Because of these differences there are some features and functions that are different between the JANUS PSK and the TRAKKER Antares PSK In general a C C application written for TRAKKER Antares terminals requires minor changes to run on a JANUS device However an application written for a JANUS device may require more changes to work properly on a TRAKKER Antares terminal JANUS applications developed with the JANUS PSK and compiler libraries are relatively easy to convert to an application for the TRAKKER Antares terminals There are several methods you can use to convert applications to and from JANUS devices and TRAKKER Antares terminals For help on converting appli
158. ds to and transmits XON XOFF characters Note To enable Flow Control with the XON XOFF options you must first configure the EOM command ILdata Acceptable values for data are None CTS checking XON XOFF response XON XOFF control XON XOFF response and control HOOSHMN HC None One of these bar codes No Flow Control CTS Checking IL0 IL1 9 41 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Flow Control continued Handshake Purpose Syntax Default Scan 9 42 XON XOFF Response XON XOFF Control IL2 IL3 XON XOFF Response and Control IL4 Enables or disables the handshake event that is an affirmative acknowledge to a message received through the serial port Note Before you can enable Handshake you must configure the EOM command Handshake is also referred to as AFF affirmative acknowledge on other Intermec data collection devices PGdata Acceptable values for data are Disabled No ACK or NAK transmitted Enabled Set to ACK Acknowledge Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Handshake 4 PG Enable Handshake Set to ACK PG F Configuration Command Reference Host IP Address Purpose Syntax Default Scan Or Defines the IP address assigned to the host computer in your 2 4 GHz RF network An IP address is a unique network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP
159. e Check digit e ASCII Code 49 CJ Options Disabled ABC Standard Concatenated Discard Retain ABCD Retain DC1 DC4 Disabled One check digit Two check digits Disabled Standard Function code 1 Disabled 3 bar start stop label length 2 bar start stop label length Disabled No check digit Check digit HIBC AIAG check digit Discard Retain Non full ASCII Full ASCII Mixed full ASCII Disabled Enabled Location in Configuration Menu Symbologies Menu Codabar option Symbologies Menu Code 11 option Symbologies Menu Code 16K option Symbologies Menu 2 of 5 I2 of 5 option Symbologies Menu Code 39 option Symbologies Menu Code 39 option Symbologies Menu Code 49 option 3 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Bar Code Symbologies Table continued Parameter Syntax Options Location in Configuration Menu Code 49 continued Function Code 1 CK None disabled Any two ASCII characters Function Code 2 CL x0D x0A CR LF Any four ASCII characters Function Code 3 CM None disabled Any two ASCII characters Code 93 CF Disabled Symbologies Menu Enabled Code 93 option Code 128 CH Disabled Symbologies Menu Standard Code 128 option UCC EAN 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 CA Disabled Symbologies Menu Fixed length 2 of 5 I2 of 5 option Variable length no check digit Case Code check digit Variable length check digit MSI CN Disa
160. e Enable Override option is the only bar code label you can scan to enable reader commands if you have disabled all reader commands DCO You can also enable reader commands in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System All reader commands enabled To enable all the reader commands or override the current settings scan one of these bar codes Disable All Reader Commands Enable All Reader Commands DCO0 DC1 9 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Command Processing continued Disable Override Enable Override LOHNT LOHNT 4 DC2 4DC3 Or To disable or enable specific reader commands perform these steps 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Command Processing DC 2 Scan the bar code to disable or enable one reader command Note If there are two bar codes for a reader command you must scan them in order left to right Accumulate mode commands are separated into two bar codes so that the command can be accumulated rather than executed as a command Abort Program Backlight MUNA WEM 9 Backspace continued oct Change Configuration O Clear continued 4 Default Save Configuration Delete File Ep tasak 9 26 Enter Accumulate Mode FER Exit Accumulate Mode ox Receive File 968 Reset o Scanner Trigger Off HAE 96 Test and Service Mode 0x Scan one of these bar codes Disable the
161. e Protocol ICMP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 826 The User Datagram Protocol UDP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 768 Transmission Control Protocol TCP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 793 UDP Plus is an Intermec proprietary session layer protocol built on UDP The UDP Plus session layer provides these services guaranteed delivery duplicated message removal link connection and status management network error recovery congestion control device error detection Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP allows efficient file exchange between the terminal and the Model 200 Controller or host TFTP complies with the standard outlined in RFC 1350 Terminal Message Format is an Intermec proprietary protocol that is used to route data configuration and network management messages between applications on the terminal and peer tasks on the controller or host 4 35 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 This chapter introduces the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 programmable terminals and explains how to download and run applications on the terminals You will also find instructions on how to use the screen mapping application How To Download and Run Applications Here s a brief summary of the steps you follow to download applications and files to the programmable TRAKKER Antares terminals To learn more about the programmable featu
162. e configuration commands are listed alphabetically by command name in Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Note The order in which you scan serial port protocol configuration commands is important To use Frame mode you need to set EOM first Next configure Handshake LRC SOM and then Poll e Send a command from an application through the serial port on the host computer For help see the next section Configuring the Terminal Via the Serial Port Once the terminal is connected and configured you can transfer data between the terminal and the other serial device For help transferring files see Chapter 5 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping Configuring the Terminal Via the Serial Port You can use an application on the host computer to configure the TRAKKER Antares terminal by sending commands through the serial port For example you may want to change the Beep Volume command and the Display Backlight Timeout command To send and receive configuration data you need to write an application for the host that can communicate with the terminal through the serial port You must connect the terminal to the host by using the communications dock or optical link adapter Once the terminal is communicating you can configure it You must enable Frame mode and the Configuration Commands Via Serial Port command to configure the terminal through the serial port For help see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference
163. e each device in the 2 4 GHz RF network by performing these steps 1 Plan and prepare your network Make sure you have all the equipment required to use the T2425 in the network Make sure you have IP addresses for all devices in the network 2 Configure the Model 200 Controller T2425 with UDP Plus 3 Configure the access points 4 Configure each TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal Each step is described in detail in the next sections Caution Make sure all components with antennas are at least 10 feet 3 meters apart when power is applied Failure to comply could result in equipment damage Conseil Assurez vous que la distance entre tous les l ments avec antennes soit d au moins dix pieds 3 m tres avant de faire la connexion avec l alimentation lectrique faute de quoi vous risquez d endommager votre installation Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Planning the Network Connection To use the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal in the 2 4 GHz RF network you need these minimum requirements Model 200 Controller 12425 with UDP Plus e Access point When you first consider purchasing a wireless data collection system an Intermec representative works with you to perform a site survey at your facility The site survey analyzes the range of radio frequency devices in your facility and determines the placement of the access points The site survey ensures that the coverage of each access point overlaps to provide uninterru
164. e the battery pack or attach an external power supply Backup battery is low Keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal Leave the terminal off and let the battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery charge will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours The main battery pack and the backup battery charge are both low Immediately turn off the terminal Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack Leave the terminal off and let the battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery charge will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours If the Battery icon continues to blink you need to replace the backup battery Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Managing Your Battery Power To maximize the life of the terminal s backup battery and main battery pack use these power management features Tip Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand to operate the terminal without interruption Always keep a charged or partially charged main battery pack in the terminal Situation You are not using the terminal for 5 minutes or longer You are operating the terminal and the main battery pack charge becomes low The Battery icon remains on solid You are operating the terminal and the backup battery charge becomes low The Battery icon blinks Ways to Save Battery Power Press 9 to turn off the terminal and put it in Suspend mode Suspend mode maximiz
165. e the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery CAUTION Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 To fully charge a discharged backup battery 1 Install a fully charged main battery pack For help see Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter 2 The main battery pack charges the backup battery It will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours After you finish charging the backup battery the main battery pack still has most of its power remaining Note The backup battery charges enough to operate the terminal within 20 minutes However the backup battery will only provide limited backup power if it is not fully charged Removing and Installing the Backup Battery The backup battery should provide years of backup battery power and you will seldom need to replace it You can remove and replace the backup battery if it will no longer hold a charge or the battery is dead Call your local Intermec service representative to order a new backup battery Caution When you replace the backup battery all data stored in RAM is lost Conseil Lors du remplacement de la batterie de secours toutes les donn es stock es dans la m moire vive RAM sont perdues To remove the backup battery 1 Save your data or last transaction and exit your application 2 Press 9 to turn off the terminal 3 Open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the
166. eader the terminal will check for and execute reader or configuration commands received through the serial port Enabled without TMF The terminal will check for and execute all reader and configuration commands i e Receive File reader command or Beep Volume change configuration command Note Before you can enable Configuration Commands Via Serial Port with or without TMF you must configure the EOM command ITdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled with TMF 2 Enabled without TMF Enabled without TMF One of these bar codes Commands Via Serial Port Disabled IT0 Configuration Command Reference Commands Via Serial Port Enabled With TMF IT1 Commands Via Serial Port Enabled Without TMF IT2 Controller Connect Check Receive Timer Purpose During periods of inactivity on the T2425 the terminal still sends messages to the Model 200 Controller to check the RF connection If no message is received within the time set for the Controller Connect Check Receive Timer the terminal is no longer connected to the controller and the Connect icon begins blinking The timer countdown resets each time a valid message is received Power Management Tip Intermec strongly recommends that you use the optimum setting of 60 seconds to preserve the main battery pack s power Syntax NPdata Acceptable values for data are any number 1 to 3600 seconds 60 minutes Default 60 seconds Sca
167. ecific type of terminal The generic term TRAKKER Antares terminal indicates any TRAKKER Antares terminal More specific terms such as TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal or T2425 indicate a specific type of terminal The term TRAKKER Antares identifies the product family of TRAKKER Antares hand held terminals For definitions of the technical terms used in this manual see the glossary Before You Begin Conventions for Input From a Keypad or Keyboard This table describes the formatting conventions for input from PC or host computer keyboards and terminal keypads Convention How to Interpret the Convention Special text Shows the command as you should enter it into the terminal See Conventions for Commands later in this chapter Italic text Indicates that you must replace the parameter with a value See Conventions for Commands later in this chapter Bold text Indicates the keys you must press on a PC or host computer keyboard For example press Enter means you press the key labeled Enter on the PC or host computer keyboard Shows the key you must press on the terminal For example yy P P press 23 directs you to press the Enter key on the terminal keypad C0 Q Lr E 2 bw Shows a series of terminal keys you must press and release in the 2 m to run the 4 order shown For example Press t Q TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System
168. ect Network later in this chapter Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal while configuring the terminal from the host To set up the host computer e Verify that you can communicate with the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal 4 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 26 To set up the application Prepare and write a host application that can communicate with the T2425 Configuration commands must be sent to network port 6000 on the terminal Message transactions to and receive transactions from the T2425 on network port 6000 must conform to the following format TMF field configuration command where TME field is a 2 byte field containing one of these values CG Configuration Get request sent from the host application Cg Configuration Get response sent from the 12425 to the host CS Configuration Set request sent from the host application Cs Configuration Set response sent from the 12425 to the host configuration command is the reader or configuration command or commands you want to set on the terminal or the current value you want to retrieve from the terminal To save configuration changes in flash memory send the reader command 1 as the last command For a list of commands see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference or Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Example 1 In the host application you want to get the current
169. ect check send timer 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Controller Connect Check Send Timer NQ 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes LL LUE 0 LAM AUAM 2 3 AMT AMA 4 5 DILE LEE 6 px HALE LOL g 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ANIM _ 9 31 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Controller IP Address 9 32 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Or Defines the IP address assigned to the Model 200 Controller in your 2 4 GHz RF network An IP address is a network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The controller IP address you set on the T2425 must match the address that is set on the controller NCn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The controller IP address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The RF network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 0 0 0 0 To set the default controller IP address scan this bar code Default Controller IP Address 4 NCO0 0 0 0 To set the controller IP address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Controller IP Address 4 4 NC 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the controller IP address from these bar codes 0 3 A 5 Data Bits
170. ed on the terminal the plain unaccented character displays on the terminal screen For a complete list of the English and Western European characters available in the terminal font see Appendix C International Character Support TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual To Enter 0 to 9 atoz A to Z backlight on off backtab beep volume Bksp backspace caps contrast ctrl cursor down cursor left cursor right cursor up enter escape F1 to F5 F6 to F10 FnL function left FnR function right resume suspend shift space tab viewport down viewport end 2 12 Quick Reference Keypad Chart Use this keypad chart to enter any character or function on the alphanumeric English or Western European keypad For help about additional functions that are available on a TE keypad see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Press the Key s oj to 9 A to Z A to lt gt Z t Tab t o7 EJES BID f A v 4 A enter Esc to AA to 09 C e Tab f 3 ld To Enter viewport home viewport left viewport right viewport up period comma colon semicolon 4 dash slash backslash lt gt exclamation point amp asterisk _ underline Press the Key s
171. ed on drive C Maximum size of a single application is 512K less the size of the RAM drive if configured Customer defined eight characters with three character extension Multiple maximum depends on the drive space Using TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit or EZBuilder Via RS 222 serial communications from the PC or host computer Via RF to the terminal s flash drive from the Model 200 Controller Via RF and TFIP to the terminal s flash drive from a host application Drive C flash up to 32 files Drive E configurable RAM disk up to 32 files Drive G T2420 optional extended memory up to 32 files TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Creating Applications for the Terminal You create applications for the terminal using the TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit PSK or EZBuilder and Microsoft C C functions To start creating applications 1 Use the PSK or EZBuilder to develop your application 2 Convert the application to a binary file Each step is described in the next sections Once you have completed these steps you can download the application to the T2420 and T2425 terminals Using the PSK or EZBuilder to Develop Applications Intermec has two development tools PSK and EZBuilder that you can use to create applications for the TRAKKER Antares terminals The TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit Part No 065332 has a full set of programming tools to help you create applica
172. ed to use a wedge interface cable P N 062168 and set the Cable ID parameter on the J7010 to the Force 97XX Wedge option For help see the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Module for Cabled Scanners Instruction Sheet P N 064219 001 Default Configuration The next tables show the terminal s default configuration You can use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to set the terminal to the default configuration For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration in Chapter 3 Default Configuration for Bar Code Symbologies Parameter Default Codabar Disabled Code 11 Disabled Code 16K Disabled Code 2 of 5 Disabled Code 39 Full ASCII Code 39 enabled with no check digit Code 49 Disabled Code 93 Disabled Code 128 Standard Interleaved 2 of 5 Disabled MSI Disabled Plessey Disabled UPC EAN UPC A EAN 13 enabled UPC E and EAN 8 enabled supplementals allowed transmit check digit transmit number system digit and retain leading zero for UPC A Terminal Specifications A Default Configuration for Operations Parameter Append Time Automatic Shutoff Beep Volume Command Processing Decode Security Display Backlight Timeout Display Contrast Display Font Type Keypad Caps Lock Keypad Clicker Keypad Type Postamble Preamble RAM Drive Size Resume Execution Scan Ahead Scanner Mode Scanner Redundancy Scanner Selection Scanner Timeout Scanner Trigger Time and Date Time in Seconds Default Disabled 0 m
173. eed to know how to install configure test and use the terminal to operate in a network You should have a good knowledge of your company s network and data collection software You should be familiar with data communications and network protocols What You Will Find in This Manual This table summarizes the information in each chapter and appendix Chapter What You Will Find 1 Summarizes the terminal s features functions and accessories Explains how to get your TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal started for the first time 2 Describes and explains how to use your terminal s keypad screen audio signals serial port batteries memory and drives and scan modules 3 Explains how to configure your terminal 4 Describes serial communications and the 2 4 GHz radio frequency network and explains how to install and configure your terminal to communicate with other devices 5 Introduces the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 programmable terminals and explains how to download and run applications Also explains how to use the screen mapping application 6 Lists solutions for the problems you may have while operating your terminal Also explains how to boot or reset the terminal 7 Explains how to use the terminal s built in diagnostics to research and troubleshoot problems 8 Describes the commands that you can use to change the TRAKKER Antares terminal s operation or manage files 9 Describes the commands that you can scan to c
174. eed to Get Started To use the TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal you need this equipment TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal Lithium ion battery pack Battery charger TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit or EZBuilder to develop applications TD2400 communications dock or TRAKKER Antares optical link adapter RS 232 cable 3 wire or 5 wire null modem to connect the terminal to a host To use the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal you need this equipment TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal Lithium ion battery pack Battery charger Access point Model 200 Controller software version 2 2 or higher for T2425s that use the UDP Plus network protocol option TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit or EZBuilder to develop applications Getting Started 1 To use the serial port on the T2425 you also need this equipment e TD2400 communications dock or TRAKKER Antares optical link adapter e RS 232 cable 3 wire or 5 wire null modem to connect the terminal to a host Note Intermec recommends that you keep at least two lithium ion battery packs on hand so that you can use one battery pack while the other is recharging Using the Terminal for the First Time Follow these steps to start using your new TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal Unpack the terminal and documentation Charge the main battery pack sold separately Connect the backup battery Install the charged main battery pack Charge the backup battery Turn on
175. eed to receive the file using a serial communications package that supports the XMODEM protocol i e Windows 3 1 Terminal or Win95 Hyperterminal 9X1 drive filename where SEX is the command to transmit a file using XMODEM protocol 1 indicates the terminal s serial port drive indicates the drive where the file is stored on the terminal You must include the colon after the drive letter filename is the file you want to transmit Not supported 1 Scan this bar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Transmit File 4 V X1 2 2 Scan the bar code label s for the file you want to transmit You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format drive filename 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and transmit the file Exit Accumulate Mode _ Reader Command Reference Or You can create your own bar code labels to transmit files by creating a bar code in this command format 6 X1 drive filename Example To transmit the file SHIPPING DAT from drive C to the host use this command SX1 c shipping dat Transmit File Via RF Communications Purpose Transmits a file from the T2425 and saves it on the Model 200 Controller or host From Network SSR drive fromfilename tofilename where SSR is the command to transmit a file over the RF network The R indicates a file transmitted via RF communications
176. een appears The Firmware Installation utility includes detailed online help You click the Help button anytime to get more information 3 Choose the COM port and the Firmware Type application For example the TRAKKER Antares 2420 sample application is one firmware type 4 On the TRAKKER Antares terminal press 1 Q 7 2 m or scan this bar code label Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears 5 Choose System Menu and press JJ The System Menu appears File Manager Load Default Values Set Time and Date tore Configuration Upgrade Firmware TL Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 051 3 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 Choose Upgrade Firmware and press 4J The Upgrade Firmware screen appears UPGRADE FIHRHMHA RE Upgrade terminal firmware Make sure the terminal is connected to a host computer through the optical adapter Uu CANCEL 242XU 074 7 Choose OK to continue The next screen appears Are you sure you want to continue Selecting YES will upgrade and replace all of the terminal s firmware Selecting NO will exit without upgrading firmware ES 242XU 152 8 Choose Yes to continue and upgrade the firmware The terminal reboots and then displays the Loader Waiting screen T
177. efault router address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode HII M x Display Backlight Timeout Purpose Syntax Default 9 36 Defines the amount of time the backlight remains on The backlight timeout setting significantly affects the terminal s battery life If you set a longer backlight timeout value you will use the power in the main battery pack at a faster rate DFdata Acceptable values for data are Disabled 01 60 Timeout in seconds 10 seconds Configuration Command Reference Scan To disable the backlight timeout scan this bar code Disable Backlight Timeout DF00 Or To set the backlight timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Backlight Timeout DF 2 Scan a two digit numeric value for data from these bar codes LATA HIA 0 st HII IAM FIF 3 NONN LIA A b5x LL LATINI 6 uid HIA LIA Q 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LITT M x f 9 37 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Display Contrast Purpose Syntax Default Scan 9 38 Defines the contrast light or dark of the characters against the terminal screen D data Acceptable values for data are 0 light to 7 dark 3 One of these bar codes 0 Light Display Contrast DJ0 2
178. eference Manual Here are the serial port parameters you can define Baud rate e Configuration commands via serial port e Data bits e FOM End of Message Flow control e Handshake enabled or disabled e LRC e Parity Poll Polling enabled or disabled e SOM Start of Message e Stop bits e Timeout Delay CSP uses EOM to determine the serial communications mode When EOM is disabled the terminal communicates in Character mode When EOM is enabled the terminal communicates in Frame mode You must configure a value for EOM before you can set the serial port parameters listed next If EOM is disabled or not set you need to disable these serial port parameters e Configuration commands via serial port e Handshake e LRC e SOM You can only enable Flow Control with XON XOFF control when the terminal is communicating in Character mode Flow Control with CTS is allowed in either Character or Frame mode To enable Poll you must first configure EOM and Handshake 4 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 12 The values you set for the terminal serial port must match the values set for the serial port on the connected device There are three ways to configure the serial port parameters e Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help on configuring the parameters see Chapter 1 Getting Started e Scan the configuration command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label Th
179. elete File 8 12 enabling or disabling 9 25 to 9 28 Enter 8 6 Enter Accumulate mode 8 5 Exit Accumulate mode 8 6 file management commands 8 12 Multiple Read Labels 8 9 operating commands 8 7 Receive File 8 13 Rename File 8 16 Reset 8 9 Run Program 8 17 Save Configuration 8 10 Scanner Trigger Off 8 11 Scanner Trigger On 8 10 Test and Service Mode 8 11 Transmit File 8 18 troubleshooting 6 5 6 12 using 8 3 Receive File reader command 8 13 removing backup battery 2 29 battery pack 2 23 scan module 2 39 Rename File reader command 8 16 Index renaming files 8 16 replacement parts ordering 6 28 Reset reader command 8 9 resetting the terminal 6 25 to 6 27 8 9 default configuration restoring 3 19 firmware and hardware 6 26 Restore User Files dialog box 5 12 restoring files on the controller 5 12 resume booting the terminal on 6 25 definition G 20 described 1 31 Resume Execution command 9 62 retaining ring replacing on antenna 6 28 RF communications 2 4 GHz RF network illustrated 1 22 4 4 to 4 8 battery power managing 2 35 configuration commands list of 9 5 A 10 downloading files 4 28 5 11 5 13 icons using to monitor 2 18 4 19 port locating 4 9 Receive File reader command 8 14 roaming between access points 4 21 site survey planning 4 15 specifications A 5 A 6 TCP IP direct connect network defined 1 22 Transmit File reader command 8 19 UDP Plus network defined
180. em application running 5 16 ASCII control characters entering 3 11 configuring the terminal 3 6 to 3 15 default configuration restoring 3 19 Diagnostics Menu using 7 4 exiting 3 14 firmware upgrading 3 21 flash memory saving changes 3 17 illustrated 3 7 menus and commands selecting 3 9 network parameters configuring 1 23 to 1 28 screens using 3 10 serial port parameters configuring 1 18 to 1 21 starting 3 6 Test and Service Mode using 8 11 time and date setting 1 16 TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal 2 4 GHz RF network illustrated 1 22 4 4 to 4 8 antenna replacing 6 28 applications downloading 4 28 5 13 configuring from controller 4 22 from host 4 23 to 4 27 overview 1 22 installing overview 4 14 network parameters configuring 1 23 to 1 28 4 16 network protocols defined 4 33 to 4 35 RF communications troubleshooting 6 13 TCP IP direct connect network defined 1 22 UDP Plus network defined 1 22 I 16 See also TRAKKER Antares terminal TRAKKER Antares FileCopy utility screen 5 9 TRAKKER Antares Firmware Installation utility screen 3 21 TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit PSK See PSK TRAKKER Antares terminal accessories list of 1 4 bar code symbologies enabling 1 32 batteries learning about 2 22 booting and resetting 6 25 to 6 27 characters table of C 3 to C 12 configuring from host 4 12 4 23 to 4 27 summary of methods 3 3 default configuration list of
181. en CFil Help CEscl Exit 242XU 051 3 Choose the Store Configuration command and press The Store Configuration screen appears STORE CONFIGURATION Store Configuration in Flash Memory OK CANCEL 242XU 072 Choose OK to save the configuration in flash memory To exit without saving the configuration choose Cancel The System Menu appears Press to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to exit the 3 18 Configuring the Terminal 3 Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration When you configure the terminal according to the instructions presented in this chapter the parameters remain in effect until you reconfigure them If you configure the terminal but do not save your changes in flash memory the parameters will remain in effect until you boot or reset the terminal The default configuration for the terminal is listed in Appendix A You can use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System or scan the Default Configuration bar code label to return the terminal to its default configuration Note If you restore the default configuration you need to set the primary network communications parameters on the T2425 to reestablish communications with other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network You may also need to reset the serial port parameters to communicate with ano
182. end of the human readable interpretation to represent the start and stop codes If you are creating your own Code 39 bar code labels your bar code printing utility may automatically supply the asterisks as the start stop code 9 3 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuration Commands Listed by Category 9 4 This chapter lists the configuration commands in alphabetical order Use this next list to find the configuration commands you may need to set for bar code symbologies operations serial network communications or RF network communications Bar Code Symbologies Codabar 9 14 Code 11 9 15 Code 16K 9 16 Code 2 of 5 9 17 Code 39 9 18 Code 49 9 22 Code 93 9 23 Code 128 9 24 Interleaved 2 of 5 9 45 MSI 9 51 Plessey 9 55 UPC EAN 9 85 Operations Append Time 9 10 Automatic Shutoff 9 10 Beep Volume 9 13 Command Processing 9 25 Decode Security 9 34 Display Backlight Timeout 9 36 Display Contrast 9 38 Display Font Type 9 39 Keypad Caps Lock 9 47 Keypad Clicker 9 47 Keypad Type 9 48 Postamble 9 57 Preamble 9 58 RAM Drive Size 9 60 Resume Execution 9 62 Scan Ahead 9 69 Scanner Mode 9 70 Scanner Redundancy 9 71 Scanner Selection 9 72 Scanner Timeout 9 74 Scanner Trigger 9 75 Time and Date 9 82 Time in Seconds 9 83 Configuration Commands Listed by Category continued RF Network Communications Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit 9 7 Acknow
183. ential problems on the controller In a TCP IP network there may be a problem with the connection between the access point and the host computer Check with your network administrator or use your access point user s manual There may be a problem with the host computer a problem with the connection between the Model 200 Controller and the host computer or a problem with the connection between the access point and the host TCP IP Check with your network administrator to make sure the host is running and allowing users to login to the system Troubleshooting T2425 Will Not Communicate With RF Network Devices continued Problem Solution When you turn on the terminal after it The host may have deactivated or lost your current terminal was suspended for awhile 10 15 emulation session In a TCP IP direct connect network you need minutes or longer the terminal can to turn off the Keep Alive message if possible from the host so no longer send or receive messages that the TCP session is maintained while a terminal is suspended over the network Problems Transmitting Data Through the Serial Port If you are having problems sending or receiving data through the serial port on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal check these possible problems e Make sure the terminal is connected to the host computer or serial device through the TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock or the TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter e Ma
184. er Next screen CFil Help Ezsc1 Exit 242XU 069 Note The Radio Test and Access Point diagnostics are only available for a TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal You will not see these options on a T2420 since it does not have a radio 4 Press A or V to choose the diagnostic test you want to run and press J The diagnostic screen appears Use the information on the screen or follow the instructions to run the diagnostic test For help see Defining the Diagnostics Screens later in this chapter 5 Press to exit each diagnostic screen and to exit the diagnostics menus 6 Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press 1 to exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System If you have made any changes a screen prompts you to store the changes in flash memory For help see Exiting the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System in Chapter 3 After you exit the menu system the terminal will resume the application you were running when you started the menu system Running Diagnostics Defining the Diagnostics Screens You can find the following information about each diagnostic test e Description and purpose Menu where the diagnostic is available e Sample diagnostic screen e Definition and explanation of the diagnostic screen The diagnostics are grouped into three categories e Software diagnostics e Hardware diagnostics e System diagnostics Within each category the diagnostics are listed alphabetically
185. erence RF Wakeup On Broadcast Purpose Syntax Default Scan Scan Ahead Purpose Syntax Default Determines if the T2425 can receive broadcast messages sent from the network If the wakeup on broadcast is enabled the T2425 radio will turn on to receive broadcast messages If this command is disabled the terminal radio will ignore broadcast messages Power Management Tip If your network has many broadcast messages you may want to disable the wakeup on broadcast command to preserve the main battery pack s power RBdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled One of these bar codes Disable RF Wakeup On Broadcast 4 RBO Enable RF Wakeup On Broadcast RB1 Enables or disables scan ahead If you enable this parameter you can scan a number of labels that are held in a stack until the terminal can process the data If you disable this parameter the terminal processes each label you scan before you can scan the next label SDdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled scan one label at a time 1 Enabled scan many labels at a time Disabled 9 69 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scan Ahead continued Scan One of these bar codes Disable Scan Ahead SD0 Enable Scan Ahead SD1 Scanner Mode Purpose Defines how the scanner operates when you press the Scan button or activate a cab
186. erent bar code before attempting a second scan scanner timeout Maximum time the scanner stays after you press the Scan button or activate a cabled laser scanner screen mapping An application that that allows you to map data fields from a smaller reader or terminal screen to larger 3270 5250 or VT ANSI screens This image can be stored in the host in the Model 200 Controller or on the local device script file A file that provides instructions for navigating around host application screens It also provides instructions for mapping transaction fields from the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal to the host application screens serial A communications scheme in which the bits of a byte are transferred one at a time Often serial transmission is used to link host computers to terminals and PCs to printers serial port The terminal s COMI is an optical serial port You can communicate through COMI using a communications dock or optical link adapter server A computer that is configured to provide services to the network session A single runtime copy of a 3270 or 5250 terminal emulator through which a host application can be accessed SNA System Network Architecture The IBM architecture for supporting computer communications between dissimilar systems G 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 22 software Coded instructions that direct the operation of a computer A set of such instructi
187. es 2400 Menu System 3 6 turning on the terminal 1 13 Stop Bits command 9 77 Store Configuration screen using 3 18 storing the terminal batteries managing 2 28 6 23 cold temperatures guidelines 6 24 humidity range A 4 temperature range A 4 subnet mask 2 4 GHz RF network illustrated 4 8 configuration command 9 77 defined 4 18 G 22 determining when to configure 4 16 subnetworks terminal using across 4 6 to 4 8 See also network Subsystem Versions screen defined 7 25 Suspend mode automatic shutoff using 9 10 battery power managing 2 35 definition G 23 described 1 31 Suspend Resume screen defined 7 26 symbologies See bar code symbologies Index symbols bar code labels to scan B 7 syntax configuration commands listed by A 12 System Diagnostics menu diagnostic tests defined 7 20 using 7 6 System Menu options defined 3 8 system message flag defined 4 24 system network architecture See SNA T Task Status screen defined 7 9 TCP definition G 23 TCP IP direct connect network checking the protocol loaded 3 6 7 9 configuration commands using 9 3 file management commands using 8 12 firmware upgrading 1 35 illustrated 1 22 4 5 4 7 protocols defined 4 33 to 4 35 reader commands using 8 3 RF parameters default values 1 23 4 16 specifications A 6 transmitting files 4 28 8 14 8 19 TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout command 9 79 TCP IP socket connection 1 23 4 15 TD2400 C
188. es 2425 terminal through the Model 200 Controller to a host application On the controller you create the terminal screens group them into menus and generate each menu into a terminal template that is downloaded to the terminal Script files that you build on the controller allow the transaction fields from the terminal screens to be mapped to different host screen fields Make sure you have installed the terminal in your Intermec 2 4 GHz RF network For help see Chapter 1 Getting Started Before you can run screen mapping on your terminal you need to generate a terminal template and script file on the controller For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual If you have completed these tasks you can start the screen mapping application Note Screen mapping is only available in a Model 200 Controller network Starting the Screen Mapping Application There are two ways to load a template on the T2425 e You can download the template from the controller For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual e You can have the T2425 request a template from the controller To request a template from the controller 1 Press the 9 key to turn on the terminal The T2425 screen prompts you to enter the name of the template you want to use File name 242XU 060 2 Type a template name and press The terminal displays your template menu Note Make sure your template name has a TPL file extension 5 19
189. es No CANCEL 242XU 059 9 Press to exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Getting Started 1 10 Press to choose Yes and store your changes permanently in flash memory Ettore configuration changes in flash memory fused when rebooting the terminal Ho CANCEL 242XU 054 11 Press to choose OK and exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System OK Exiting TRAKKER Antares 2460 Menu System CANCEL 242XU 055 12 If you have a T2420 continue with the section on Starting the Application and Using the Terminal later in this chapter If you have a T2425 continue with the next section Configuring the T2425 and the RF Network 1 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuring the T2425 and the RF Network The TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal can communicate with a host computer in Intermec s 2 4 GHz network either through the access points and the Model 200 Controller or directly through the access points The terminal uses one of these RF network protocol options to communicate with other devices e UDP Plus e TCP IP Each terminal ships with only one of these RF network protocols In a UDP Plus network the terminal communicates through the Model 200 Controller to a host on an Ethernet token ring twinaxial coaxial or SDLC net
190. es the life of the main battery pack s power Make sure the battery pack is charged not in a low battery state Or use the Automatic Shutoff feature Automatic shutoff turns off the terminal Suspend mode when there is no activity on the terminal for the length of time you set For help see Automatic Shutoff in Chapter 9 Press to put the terminal in Suspend mode Remove the main battery pack and insert another charged battery pack For help see Main Battery Pack earlier in this chapter Press to put the terminal in Suspend mode Keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal The battery pack will fully charge the backup battery in approximately 18 hours Note If you use the terminal in a cold temperature environment battery life will be reduced For more information see Guidelines for Managing Batteries in Chapter 6 2 35 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 36 Using an External Power Supply You can operate the terminal using an external power supply with the following TRAKKER Antares accessories e TD2400 communications dock connected to a power supply e Optical link adapter connected to a power supply You can use the external power supply to operate the terminal and to charge the terminal s batteries at the same time For help see the accessory quick reference guides To power supply 242XU 186 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Defining the
191. ese bar codes Disable Network Loopback NLO Enable Network Loopback NL1 Network Port Purpose Syntax Default Scan Defines the network port that the TCP IP or UDP Plus network protocol uses for communications in your 2 4 GHz RF network In a TCP IP network set the network port to the appropriate port for the application you are using on the T2425 The default network port of 23 enables VT ANSI Telnet communications In a UDP Plus network the network port you set on the 12425 must match the network port that is set on the Model 200 Controller Note In firmware versions 2 11 and earlier Network Port was called UDP Port on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals It is now called Network Port on all terminals NGdata Acceptable values for data are any number from 1 to 65535 00023 T2425 with TCP IP network protocol 05555 T2425 with UDP Plus network protocol To set the default network port for a T2425 with TCP IP scan this bar code Default TCP IP Network Port NG23 9 53 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Network Port continued To set the default network port for a T2425 with UDP Plus scan this bar code Default UDP Plus Network Port NG5555 Or To set the network port 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Network Port 4 4 NG 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes ATA AT 0 HAM AUAM 40 3 AMT AMA 4
192. ession Try moving closer to an access point to re establish communications Make sure the T2425 is configured correctly for your network To communicate with the access point the RF domain and RF security ID on the terminal must match the values set for all access points the terminal may communicate with For help see Using RF Communications on the T2425 in Chapter 4 6 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual T2425 Will Not Communicate With RF Network Devices continued Problem The Connect icon blinks on the terminal screen The T2425 is connected to the host computer and you move to a new site to collect data The Connect icon was on and now begins to blink or turns off ERA IN The Connect icon blinks on the terminal screen and you see this message Unable to connect to controller Error 102 Unable to establish connection to host Session ended The Connect icon remains on but the host computer is not receiving any data from the T2425 The Connect icon remains on but you cannot establish a terminal emulation session with the host computer 6 14 Solution In a UDP Plus network the terminal is trying to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller You may need to check the T2425 configuration or make sure the controller is running and data collection is started For either a UDP Plus or TCP IP network the
193. eters let you adjust the way the terminal operates By customizing the operating parameters you can set the terminal to automatically shut off after a specified length of time set the terminal to resume applications or restart applications modify data transactions by appending the time modify bar code data by using preambles and postambles enable or disable specific reader commands configure a RAM drive change the volume of the audio signals beeper and keypad clicker control the display contrast backlight timeout and font size enable or disable the keypad clicker and keypad caps lock customize the way the scan module operates by selecting scan ahead data buffering type of scanner device decode security level scanner timeout value and trigger modes TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 6 Configuring the Terminal With the Menu System The TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System is a menu driven application that lets you configure the terminal manage files view system information and run diagnostics You can access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System while running any application To access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System e Press t 7 2 w or scan this bar code Note You must press the Left Enter key in this key sequence Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears displaying four menu options Configuration Menu C
194. f all access points in the network the data is stored in the terminal s radio buffer The Data icon appears on the screen and the Connect icon starts flashing or turns off You can continue to collect data until the radio buffer is full When the buffer is full the application displays a communication timeout status When you move back into range and network communications are re established the data in the radio buffer is transmitted to the access point and you can once again transmit data In a TCP IP direct connect network with a terminal running a terminal emulation application the application may disconnect from the host if you remain out of communications range too long or if the host sends Keep Alive messages while the terminal is in Suspend mode You may need to restart the application and log back into the host to re establish a terminal emulation session For help see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting In a UDP Plus network the session is maintained any time the terminal is out of range or in Suspend mode 4 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuring the T2425 Over the Network 4 22 You can remotely configure the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal by using one of these methods e Send a command from the Model 200 Controller UDP Plus network only e Send a command from an application on the host computer UDP Plus and TCP IP networks You cannot configure any of the RF network parameters suc
195. f necessary For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Login to a terminal emulation session Start using the T2425 to collect and transmit data Getting Started f Step 2 Using the Application continued Screen Mapping Application File Mame Turning the a Download or request a template from the Model 200 Controller b Download or request a validation file from the controller c Start using the T2425 to collect and transmit data 242XU 168 Note You can download applications to the T2425 either through the serial port or via RF communications from the Model 200 Controller or host Terminal On and Off The terminal s Suspend Resume key is the j key in the upper left corner of the keypad as shown in this illustration When you press 9 to turn off the terminal the t inal inal the terminal does Sispa 3 not actually shut off but goes Resume key into a Suspend mode This ae 9 a mode is referred to as off in the rest of this manual In Enter Enter Suspend mode the terminal continues to power all memory and turns off the power to most i F10 of the hardware ED s 242XU 045 D When you press 9 to turn on the terminal the terminal either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or the terminal boots and restarts your application Resume is controlled through a parameter or command called Resu
196. f the terminal 2 Open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Note If you have a handstrap installed stretch the handstrap s elastic band to allow the T bar to slide out of the T bar opening on the bottom end of the terminal Move the handstrap out of the way to open the battery door Battery door TOP 242XU 079 2 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 Disconnect the battery pack from the connectors inside the bottom case by sliding the battery pack toward the bottom end of the terminal 242XU 103 4 Tiltthe terminal to one side and let the battery pack drop out of the compartment into your hand Continue with the next instructions to install a charged battery pack l 242XU 106 2 24 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 To install the battery pack 1 Hold the battery pack with the flat side facing down toward the inside of the battery compartment The small arrow on the top of the battery pack must point toward the top screen end of the terminal Place the battery pack into the upper larger half of the battery compartment Connector end Connector pin 2 places 242XU 082 Hook the slots on the bottom of the battery pack into the slots on the bottom of the battery compartment Slide the battery pack toward the top end of the te
197. figuration The Main Menu appears Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press to exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help exiting the menu system see the next procedure for Exiting the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System 3 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Exiting the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System 1 From the Main Menu press If you have made any changes the next screen prompts you to store the changes in flash memory You can also save the runtime configuration in flash memory by choosing the Store Configuration command from the System Menu For help see Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory later in this chapter Note When you boot or reset the terminal it uses the configuration you last saved in flash memory Etore configuration changes in flash memory fused when rebooting the terminal CANCEL 242XU 054 2 Choose Yes and press to save your changes in flash memory Choose No and press to exit without saving The Exiting TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System screen appears Note If you changed the configuration you were prompted to save your changes in RAM as you exited the Configuration Menu If you want the configuration changes to be stored in flash memory you need to choose Yes in this screen Exiting TRAKKER Antares 2466 Menu System OK CANCEL
198. figure the default router and subnet mask For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network To set the network parameters 1 From the Main Menu press A or W to choose the Configuration Menu and then press The Configuration Menu appears Note If you are not in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System press 4SQlr L2 w to access the Main Menu CONFIGURATION MEHU Sumbologies Menu Terminal Menu N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 010 1 24 Getting Started 1 2 Press V to choose the Communications Menu and then press The Communications Menu appears COMMUNICATIONS MENU Primary Hetwork Advanced Network Radio Serial Port N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 01 1 3 Press to choose the Primary Network command The Primary Network screen appears UDP Plus Primary Network TCP IP Primary Network PRIMARY NETHORK PRIMARY NHETHORK Activate Controller IP Addr 6 86 68 Activate Host IP Addr 8 6 a 8 8 8 8 Terminal IF Address Terminal IP Address 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 OK CANCEL OK CANCEL 242XU 186 4 In the Activate field press P to toggle the field and display the 2 4 GHz RF option and activate radio frequency network communications Press W to move to the next field In a UDP Plus network you set the C
199. file error reading menu Could not open Template file There are no Screen items defined in Template Error reading Screens in Template file Link List error Program exiting Build screen error Error on read Solution The template file was downloaded from the controller but either no menu items were defined in the template or there is a problem reading the template The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem reading the menu The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but the terminal could not open the template file The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but no screen items are defined in the template Check the template on the controller and make sure you have defined screens The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a proble
200. fills in the colon character in the time field For example to enter the time 04 05 03 P M type 1 el oll sit oll 3 V Note The time is not actually updated until you exit the Time and Date screen When you set the time set the time ahead so that the correct time is saved when you exit the screen in Step 6 5 Type the current date in the format YY MM DD year month day with a space character between each field and then press W The program fills in the slash character in the date field For example to enter the date August 9 1997 type z Loll 8al Lo 9 v Press 23 to save the changes and exit the Time and Date screen 7 Press amp to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears If you have a T2420 or want to configure the serial port on a T2425 continue with the next section Configuring the Serial Port Parameters If you have a T2425 follow the instructions for Configuring the T2425 and the RF Network later in this chapter TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 1 18 Configuring the Serial Port Parameters You use the terminal s serial port and a communications dock or optical link adapter to transfer data in a wired network between the T2420 or T2425 and a host computer printer or other RS 232 serial device To power supply Terminal in TD2
201. for data are 1 1 stop bit 2 2 stop bits 1 One of these bar codes 1 Stop Bit 2 Stop Bits HAUT HAT IC1 IC2 Subnet Mask Purpose Syntax Default Scan Defines the subnet mask an internal TCP IP protocol stack variable that is used to separate the subnetwork address from the local IP address The TCP IP protocol stack performs a bit wise AND on the IP address and the subnet mask Each address segment represents one byte where 255 converts to FF hex The default subnet mask 255 255 255 0 means the T2425 uses a standard IP network mask For example if the IP address is 192 009 150 184 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the subnetwork address is 192 009 150 X NSn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The subnet mask field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period 255 255 255 0 To set the default subnet mask address scan this bar code Default Subnet M NS255 255 255 0 9 77 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Subnet Mask continued Or To set the subnet mask 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Subnet Mask 4 4NS 2 Scan a numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the subnet mask address from these bar codes ANA AN 0 ANTM NAT x 3 AMT ANAT 4 5 DILE AMT 6 AI LUE LL g 9 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next
202. for the Change Configuration command command is the syntax for the command you want to change For example the command syntax for a preamble is ADdata To change or set a preamble scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Change Configuration Set Preamble AD Scan a bar code label from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B To set the preamble to the character T scan this label T T Note To use the bar code labels in Appendix B you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 later in this chapter Scan the Exit Accumulate Mode bar code label to update the terminal s configuration Exit Accumulate Mode ui Configuration Command Reference Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit Purpose Syntax Default Scan When the T2425 sends a message to the Model 200 Controller the terminal waits to receive a response acknowledging the message If no response is received within the Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit time the terminal sends the message again at the time interval set for the lower limit The terminal will continue to send the data at increasingly longer intervals until it reaches the Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit time The terminal continues sending the message at the time interval set for the upper limit until a response is received or a timeout error occurs NVdata Acceptable values for data are any
203. from the T2425 to the controller or host drive indicates the drive where the file is stored on the T2425 You must include the colon after the drive letter fromfilename is the name of the file you are transmitting from the T2425 to the controller or host tofilename is the name of the file that will be saved on the controller or host On the controller the file is saved on the D NUSERDATA directory To transmit a file to the host you need to identify the path and filename where you want to save the file Note Do not specify the pathname D NUSERDATA in the tofilename field Keypad Not supported Scan 1 Scan this bar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Transmit File 4 R 2 Scan the bar code label s for the file you want to transmit You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format drive fromfilename tofilename 8 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Transmit File Via RF Communications continued 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and transmit the file Exit Accumulate Mode a Js Or You can create your own bar code labels to transmit files by creating a bar code in this command format SSR drive fromfilename tofilename Example To transmit the file SHIPPING DAT from drive C to the controller or host use this command 6R c shipping dat shipping dat
204. g the battery pack 1 7 2 27 cold temperatures guidelines 6 24 terminal accessory described 1 4 battery door opening 1 8 2 23 Battery icon blinks low battery power 6 7 6 24 described 2 19 low battery power 2 34 remains on low battery power 6 8 Battery Monitor screen defined 7 10 battery pack charging 1 7 2 27 temperature range A 4 cold temperatures using in 6 24 definition G 15 described 2 22 installing 1 10 2 25 low battery charge 2 34 6 8 power capacity remaining 2 22 2 34 7 11 managing 2 22 2 35 6 23 specifications A 4 removing 2 23 temperature and volts checking 7 10 terminal accessory described 1 5 Battery Status screen defined 7 11 Baud Rate command 9 12 beep audio signals for status 2 20 battery power low 6 8 Beep Volume command 9 13 testing using diagnostics 7 12 three low beeps troubleshooting 6 11 6 12 6 13 volume adjusting from the keypad 2 17 Beeper Test screen defined 7 12 belt clip terminal accessory 1 4 BFSK defined 9 68 binary files converting 5 8 binary table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 blue keys using 2 6 Boot Menu troubleshooting 6 7 using 6 26 boot definition G 5 booting the terminal 6 25 to 6 27 cold boot 6 27 configuration used 3 17 configuring the 2 key 6 25 9 62 POST failed error message 6 7 turning on the terminal 1 31 warm boot 6 26 8 9 box shipping list of contents 1 7 bridge definition G 5 broadcast defini
205. gement Delay Upper Limit NU5000 Or To set the acknowledgement delay upper limit 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit 4 NU 9 8 Configuration Command Reference 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes 0 1 ANTM NANT 2 3 LANA M TATEM A 45 MIATA AMT A 6 47 ANAT LEM g 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ANIM _ 9 9 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Append Time Purpose Syntax Default Scan Appends the time to data records that are transmitted from the terminal You can also use the Time in Seconds command to append the time in hours and minutes only or hours minutes and seconds The time is appended to each data record in the form HH MM SS For help see Time in Seconds later in this chapter DEdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Append Time DE0 Enable Append Time DE1 Automatic Shutoff 9 10 Purpose Defines the maximum length of time the terminal remains on when there is no activity When you do not use the terminal for the length of time set with this command the terminal automatically turns off as if you had pressed 9 to turn it off When you press 9 to turn on the terminal the terminal either resumes exactly where it was when you tur
206. gger 9 75 Start of Message SOM 9 76 Stop Bits 9 77 Subnet Mask 9 77 TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout 9 79 Terminal IP Address 9 80 Time and Date 9 82 Time in Seconds 9 83 Timeout Delay 9 84 UPC EAN 9 85 2 Contents Appendix A Terminal Specifications Physical and Environmental Specifications A 3 Default Configuration A 8 Configuration Commands by Syntax A 12 Appendix B Full ASCII Charts Full ASCII Table B 3 Full ASCII Bar Code Chart B 6 Control Characters B 6 Symbols and Punctuation Marks B 7 Numbers B 8 Uppercase Letters B 9 Lowercase Letters B 10 Appendix C International Character Support TRAKKER Antares Terminal Font Set C 3 Glossary Index xiii Before You Begin Before You Begin This section introduces you to standard warranty provisions safety precautions warnings and cautions document formatting conventions and sources of additional product information A list of Intermec manuals is also provided to guide you in finding the appropriate information Warranty Information To receive a copy of the standard warranty provision for this product contact your local Intermec support services organization In the U S call 1 800 755 5505 and in Canada call 1 800 688 7043 Otherwise refer to the Worldwide Sales amp Service list that ships with this manual for the address and telephone number of your Intermec sales organization Safety Summary Your safety is extremely i
207. h character and saves the next character s For example Enter These Characters Preamble Postamble Saved h h x x k k no data 7 Press or choose OK to save your changes and exit the screen 3 12 Configuring the Terminal 3 8 Choose another menu from the Terminal Menu or press to exit The Configuration Menu appears For help exiting the menu system see Exiting the Configuration Menu later in this chapter Exiting Screens and Saving Changes When you exit a screen you can save or discard your changes Task Description To exit a screen and save the Choose OK and press Or press 23 with the changes cursor in any field except the Cancel button To exit a screen and discard Choose Cancel and press Or press with the the changes cursor in any field Exiting the Configuration Menu 1 Press to exit the Configuration Menu If you have made any changes to the current configuration this screen prompts you to save the new configuration in RAM The current configuration also called the runtime configuration is the set of parameters currently enabled on the terminal Save new configuration Cin RAM Wes No CANCEL 242XU 059 Choose Yes and press J to save your changes in RAM and update the current configuration on the terminal Choose No and press to exit without changing the con
208. h an alternate action is taken token ring A type of LAN that transfers data at either 4 or 16 Mbps It is a network transport technology in which a token is passed around a ring topology TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System A menu driven application that lets you configure the terminal view system information and run diagnostics You can access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System while running any application transaction A transaction is made up of a header and a group of fields For example a work order transaction might have a transaction type and three fields consisting of a work order number part number and due date twinaxial A type of cable used to connect the Model 200 Controller directly to an IBM host Twinaxial cables consist of an outer layer of insulation an outer conductor another insulating layer and two side by side center conductors UDP User datagram protocol UDP protocol is an alternative to TCP This protocol is the Internet standard for wireless devices You can use UDP when you do not need a guaranteed delivery You can also use UDP when you do not require all the services of TCP Glossary G UDP Plus This Intermec designed protocol is based on UDP UDP Plus improves the performance of devices in a mobile wireless environment Intermec uses this protocol to communicate between the Model 200 Controller and TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals unprotected field A displayed field in which a user can enter
209. h as terminal IP address over the network Once the terminal is communicating you can configure bar code symbologies and operating commands Note You can configure the terminal locally by using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System or by scanning a command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal Configuring the T2425 From the Controller You can use the Model 200 Controller to configure one or more T2425 terminals in your 2 4 GHz RF network You can also send reader commands such as Backlight On to one or more terminals Your terminal must be configured with UDP Plus in order to communicate with the Model 200 Controller This method is very fast and efficient if you need to change the same configuration parameters for several terminals in one area For example you may want to set the Beep Volume to very loud and turn on Keypad Caps Lock for all the terminals in one area Note You can configure a T2425 from the Model 200 Controller but you cannot get configuration data from the terminal To send commands from the controller 1 Using the Download Server feature on the controller select the terminal or group to which you want to download the configuration commands For help on configuring a group of terminals see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal while configuring the terminal from the control
210. h the check digit transmitted Enable Code 39 Full ASCII with no check digit 111 To disable Code 39 Disable Code 39 CBO Or Configuration Command Reference To enable Code 39 Ti 2 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Enable Code 39 CB Scan one of these bar codes to set the first digit Without a Check Digit With a Check Digit A MA 1 o HIBC Code 39 With AIAG Check Digit 3 A Scanone of these bar codes to set the second digit Discard Check Digit Transmit Check Digit 0 1 Scanone of these bar codes to set the third digit Code 39 Non Full ASCII Code 39 Full ASCII 0 1 Code 39 Mixed Full ASCII SENE Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LAM AL 9 21 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 49 9 22 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Scan Enables or disables decoding of Code 49 symbology Code 49 is a multirow symbology for high data density The last character in each row is used for row checking and the last two characters of the symbol are used for overall checking Function codes designate where to place the predefined data string in a Code 49 label Whenever a terminal encounters a function code it replaces the function code with the defined string before transmitting the data to the Model 200 Controller A single Code 49 symbol may contain several different variable leng
211. he Battery Monitor screen to get information from the battery monitor processor about the main lithium ion battery pack and the backup battery You can use the temperature information to make sure you are using the terminal within the operating temperature range Choose the Main Board Menu from the Hardware Diagnostics menu BATTERY MONITOR Main Battery Volts B amp B 80580U LDC Backup Battery Volts 16 860 EC Temp 25C A4 gt Main Charging HO Backup Charging HO PIC Rev 8 L Esc1 Exit 242XU 005 The screen displays the current volts temperature and the charging status yes or no The PIC Rev field is the firmware version that is running on the battery monitor processor The number in parenthesis after the volts and temperature is the hexadecimal value returned from the processor For more information about the power remaining in the batteries use the Battery Status diagnostic screen Battery Status Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Running Diagnostics Use the Battery Status screen to find out how much power you have remaining in the main lithium ion battery pack and to get the current power status for the backup NiCad battery Hardware Diagnostics menu BATTERY STATUS Main Battery Capacity TI 38x BACKUP BATTERY GOOD L Esc1 Exit 242XU 141 Main Battery Capacity tells you the percentage of battery power remaining in the battery pa
212. he access method known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD See the IEEE 802 3 standard for the specifications firmware Software routines stored in read only memory ROM Unlike random access memory RAM ROM stays intact even without electrical power The TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System applications TE Configuration Menu if a TE terminal and operating environment firmware and drivers are stored in firmware Contrast with software fixed length Characteristic of a bar code symbology in which the number of characters per symbol is predetermined Opposite of variable length flash memory A type of nonvolatile memory Flash memory must be erased in blocks and is commonly used as a supplement to or replacement for hard disks in portable computers and data collection devices G 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 12 flow control A method for controlling the flow of data between the terminal and the serial port It stops the transmitting device from sending data when the receiving device buffer fills up and starts it again when the buffer empties Flow control can be done through software XON XOFF or hardware CTS RTS frequency hopping A spread spectrum technique by which the band is divided into a number of channels and the transmissions hop from channel to channel in a predetermined sequence FTP File Transfer Protocol The Internet standard high
213. heck Digit LULA T TUM ATAU A UTA AT M CI30 CI31 Poll Polling Purpose Solicits or requests data from a polled device Note Before you can enable Poll you must configure the EOM and Handshake commands Syntax HBdata Acceptable values for data are Disabled No polling Enabled Set to FS File Separator Default Disabled Scan One of these bar codes Disable Poll Enable Poll Set to FS ULTIMI LOU i EM 4 HB HB B 9 56 Postamble Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference Sets the postamble that is appended to any data you scan with the terminal Common postambles include cursor controls such as tabs or carriage return line feeds For help on using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to configure the Postamble see Entering ASCII Control Characters in Chapter 3 Note You can set the postamble to use characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE However you cannot scan in extended ASCII characters in the Postamble command You need to use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide AEdata Acceptable values for data are up to 25 ASCII characters If you enter the AE command without data the postamble is disabled If you are entering quotation marks as data or grouping configuration commands you need to enclose the data within quotation marks see the example
214. hoose the Configuration Menu to configure bar code symbologies D MAITH MENU network and communications parameters serial port parameters and the terminal s Diagnostics Menu operating characteristics e T us KEER 2400 Diagnostics Menu Choose the Diagnostics Menu to run hardware software or system diagnostics to help analyze and fix problems I enc d CEnter Next screen on the terminal You can also view LF11 Help information about batteries and the system PESGI Exit For help see Chapter 7 Running 242XU 001 Diagnostics System Menu Choose the System Menu to manage files load the default configuration set the time and date store the terminal s configuration in flash memory and upgrade the firmware About TRAKKER 2400 Choose this option to see the part number firmware version and RF protocol UDP Plus or TCP IP loaded on the terminal You may need this information if you are working a problem with an Intermec representative Configuring the Terminal The TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System at a Glance Configuration Menu Diagnostics Menu Sustem Menu About TRAKKER 2466 a etau aluez Set Time and Date Store Configuration Upgrade Firmware DIAGNOSTICS MENU Software Diagnostics Hardware Diagnostics Sustem Diagnostics SOFTWARE DIAGNOSTICS Application Events Task Status Clear Task Profiles HARDWARE DIAGNOSTICS Hardware Confi Battery Status Di
215. ial Communications Setup tab to verify and configure the PC serial communications parameters c Usethe TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to configure the serial port parameters on the terminal For help see Configuring the Serial Port Parameters in Chapter 1 Select the FileCopy tab to download or upload applications and files a In the PC filename and path field type the path and filename FILENAME EXE or FILENAME BIN for the file on your PC You can select a previously used filename from a list by clicking on the down arrow To view a list of available files on your PC click the Browse button b In the TRAKKER Antares filename field type the drive and filename on the terminal You can select a previously used filename from a list by clicking on the down arrow You can only download applications to drive C On the T2420 you can download files to drive C E or G if available On the T2425 you can download files to drive C or E RARER Antares File Copy Utility CAAPPSUNVENTHR Y H1N Browse TRAKKER Antares filename INVERT RBM If you are downloading an application and want to run it on the terminal immediately after it is downloaded turn on the Run program check box R Run program Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 Note You can also run the application at any time from the terminal For help see Running the Application on the Terminal later in this chapter 7 Click Download
216. ic device configuration command A configuration command changes the way the terminal operates You can enter a configuration command by typing on the keypad by scanning a bar code label or by sending a command from a device on the 2 4 GHz network Glossary G controller IP address Identifies the IP address assigned to the Model 200 Controller in the 2 4 GHz network data bits The number of bits the terminal uses when communicating with another device i e host computer Generally set at seven or eight data collection device A device used with a scanner that collects data by scanning bar codes and sending this data to a host computer data transmission An event in which a block of data is transmitted from one device to another default configuration The values set for each configuration parameter when the terminal is shipped device Any physical item that is attached to a computer A terminal a printer a reader and a controller are all devices direct sequencing A radio frequency spread spectrum technique by which the transmitted signal is spread over a particular frequency range domain The area within a LAN that defines a region administered by a controller or server The domain is also called a subnetwork DOS code pages A code page is a table that relates binary character codes used by a program to keys on the keypad or to characters on the screen All international keypads are translated using an installed
217. iding backup power when you turn the terminal back on the terminal resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or restarts your application If you plan to store the terminal for a long period of time insert a fully charged main battery pack to maximize battery life Store the terminal in a warm office area to make sure the backup battery continues to charge Note If the Resume Execution command is allowed the terminal will resume the application when you turn on the terminal Otherwise the terminal boots and the application restarts For help see Resume Execution in Chapter 9 Charging the Backup Battery The main battery pack charges the backup battery when required with the terminal turned on or off The terminal continuously monitors the backup battery voltage level and charges the backup battery for a fixed duration of time whenever the voltage level gets low If the main battery pack is low or discharged it will not be able to charge the backup battery There are two ways to find out if the backup battery charge is low e The Battery icon is blinking on the top line of the screen e Check the status of the backup battery using the Battery Status diagnostic test For help see Chapter 7 Running Diagnostics Note The backup battery charger operates between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C If you are using the terminal in an environment that is outside this temperature range the backup battery will not charge Mov
218. iguration command Resume Execution Not Allowed Configures the terminal to boot and restart your application each time you press 9 to turn on the terminal Use this option if you want to restart your application every time you turn on the terminal Resume Execution Allowed Configures the terminal to resume exactly where it was when you turned off the terminal Use this option to resume working each time you turn on the terminal You can configure the Resume Execution command by using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System or by scanning these bar code labels For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal or Resume Execution in Chapter 9 Resume Execution Not Allowed Resume Execution Allowed ERO ER1 6 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 26 Using the Boot Menu The Boot menu appears after you e remove both batteries install them again and turn on the terminal upgrade the firmware e reset the terminal BOOT MEHU b Boot System 1 Run Loader gq Power Down POWER DOWN IM 6 amp 8 SEC 242XU 104 The Boot Menu contains these commands Boot System If you did remove the batteries make sure you install a charged main battery pack or the terminal will not turn on Press 8 to boot the terminal Once the terminal is finished booting your application appears on the screen Run Loader Press to load the
219. iguration command from a Code 39 or Code 93 bar code label The configuration commands are listed alphabetically by command name in Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference The set of network parameters you must configure depends on whether you install the terminal on the same IP subnetwork as the Model 200 Controller or host TCP IP or on a different subnetwork The next table lists the parameters you configure in each type of network Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Same IP Different IP Subnetwork Network Parameters Subnetwork Time and date X X Network activate X X Controller IP address UDP Plus X X Host IP address TCP IP X X Terminal IP address X X Network port X X RF domain X X RF security ID Optional Optional Default router X Subnet mask X The network parameters are defined in the next section Defining the RF Network Parameters This section defines the network parameters you configure when installing the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal in an RF network For each parameter s syntax and options see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Time and Date When you turn on the terminal for the first time you must set the current time and date You also need to set the time and date any time you lose all power to the terminal For help see Setting the Time and Date in Chapter 1 Network Activate Disables or enables RF communications in the 2 4 GHz RF network If the Network Activate parameter is di
220. iguration error Network is enabled Default Router address is not on the terminal s network Configuration was not updated Solution The 2 4 GHz RF network is enabled and there is a problem with the network configuration You need to change the terminal IP address and or the default router address Choose Primary Network or Advanced Network from the Communications Menu The terminal IP address and the default router address are both set to the same address Set a valid IP address for the terminal and the default router For help see Using RF Communications on the T2425 in Chapter 4 If you cannot fix the addressing problem check with your network administrator to get the IP addresses for each RF network device The 2 4 GHz RF network is enabled and there is a problem with the network configuration You need to change the terminal IP address and or the controller IP address host IP address for a TCP IP network Choose Primary Network from the Communications Menu The terminal IP address and the controller host IP address are both set to the same address Set a valid IP address for the terminal and controller or host For help see Using RF Communications on the T2425 in Chapter 4 If you cannot fix the addressing problem check with your network administrator to get the IP address assigned to the terminal and the controller or host The 2 4 GHz RF network is enabled and there is a problem with the network configuration
221. il the laser beam is the brightest This is the best scanning angle You can test the effective range of the scanner Move within 2 feet of a wall and test the scanner You need to be within the scanning range to scan bar code labels For help on scanning distances see Physical and Environmental Specifications in Appendix A Warning Do not look directly into the window area or at a reflection of the laser beam while the laser is scanning Long term exposure to the laser beam can damage your vision Avertissement Ne regardez pas directement la r flexion d un rayon laser ou dans la fen tre du laser lorsque celui ci est en op ration Si vous regardez trop longtemps un rayon laser cela peut endommager votre vue Make sure an input device such as a 1550 laser scanner is attached correctly to the module for cabled scanners You must install an input device before scanning bar code labels The standard or long range scan module window may be dirty Clean the scanning window of the scan module with a solution of ammonia and water Wipe dry Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window Troubleshooting Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan continued Problem You have an input device attached to the module for cabled scanners and cannot read any bar code labels The scan module or input device will not read the bar code label The input device connected to the module for cabled scanners does not appear to work well or
222. iles converting 5 8 F features described 1 3 2 3 file management using reader commands 8 12 File Manager application running 5 16 option defined 3 9 file system specifications 5 5 FileCopy utility using 5 8 files deleting 8 12 naming conventions described 2 37 renaming 8 16 transmitting 8 13 8 18 RF communications using 4 28 5 13 serial port using 5 8 firmware applications restarting 6 26 8 9 definition G 11 Malloc diagnostic screen defined 7 23 new release 1 34 upgrading 1 35 Boot Menu using 6 26 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System using 3 21 version 2 x or earlier using the manual 1 34 versions listed 7 25 fixed length definition G 11 flash memory default configuration saving 8 8 definition G 11 described 2 37 saving configuration changes 3 14 3 17 8 10 specifications A 5 Flow Control command 9 41 Frame mode described 4 11 9 40 troubleshooting 6 10 French See European languages frequency hopping definition G 12 Index full ASCII bar code chart of characters B 6 to B 10 Code 39 described 9 19 definition G 12 table of characters B 3 to B 5 Function Code 1 Code 128 using with 9 24 Code 16K enable with 9 16 Code 49 enable with 9 22 Function Code 2 Code 49 9 22 Function Code 3 Code 49 9 22 Function keys typing accent marks 2 11 Function Left key definition G 12 icon described 2 18 using 2 7 Function Right key definition G 12
223. ility will automatically convert any EXE file to a binary file BIN before downloading the file With the FileCopy utility you can download either EXE or BIN application files Note If you have a T2425 you can download or upload files to or from the terminal using either the serial port or RF communications through the Model 200 Controller or host To download or upload applications and files to or from the terminal 1 Connect the TRAKKER Antares terminal to your PC 2 Start Microsoft Windows on your PC mer 3 From Program Manager start FileCopy The TRAKKER Antares FileCopy y utility screen appears FileCopy i FileCopy includes detailed online help You click the Help button or press F1 anytime to get more information FODITLETUTETEUNDT PX fltenamr sed pave se T fun program Browse TRAEKER Anions fileaame Uplosdi EE Deliris Termina File Use C Jos flesh drive E Tor ARAM daiz and te for zxipnded storage der For example Cexample hin After Upload Delete Nero s Exil 7 Help WileCapy TU Pari Setup Serial Cammssicasiuns Setup TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 10 6 Check the serial port and serial communications parameters to verify that the settings for your PC match the values that are set for the terminal s serial port a Select the COM Port Setup tab to verify and configure the PC serial port parameters b Select the Ser
224. in this command format drive filename Example To delete the file SHIPPING BIN from drive C use this command c shipping bin Receive File There are two ways to receive files on the TRAKKER Antares terminals e Use the serial port to receive files on the T2420 or T2425 e Use RF communications to receive files on the T2425 For help connecting the terminal to a host computer or the Model 200 Controller see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Receive File Through the Serial Port Purpose Receives a file from the host computer through the serial port and saves it on the T2420 or T2425 terminal You must have the terminal connected to the host through the communications dock or the optical link adapter On the host you need to transmit the file using a serial communications package that supports the XMODEM protocol i e Windows 3 1 Terminal or Win95 Hyperterminal From Network Xl drive filename 8 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Receive File Through the Serial Port continued Keypad Scan Example where SX is the command to receive a file from a host using XMODEM protocol 1 indicates the terminal s serial port drive indicates the drive on the terminal where you want to receive and store the file You must include the colon after the drive letter filename is the file you want to receive and save on the terminal Not supported 1 Scan this b
225. ing the Icons continued 242XU 109 242XU 110 242XU 111 Connect This icon contains an asterisk and tells you if the T2425 is connected via RF communications to an access point and or the Model 200 Controller e Ifthe Connect icon is not displayed the T2425 is not connected to an access point You may be out of range of an access point or the terminal may not be configured correctly If the Network Activate command is disabled the Connect icon is not displayed but the Radio icon does appear f the Connect icon blinks the T2425 is trying to connect to the controller or the access point You may be out of range of an access point you may be about to go out of range of an access point or the access point may have recently been turned off In a UDP Plus network the Connect icon also blinks when data collection is not started on the controller Ifthe Connect icon appears and remains on solid the T2425 is or was connected and communicating with the access point and controller UDP Plus within the last 2 minutes The Connect icon is not instantaneously updated but does tell you the communications status the last time data was sent or received from the T2425 For help with network communications see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Battery This icon appears when one or both of the batteries have a low power charge The Battery icon appears with the terminal turned on or off
226. ink if communications are occurring instantaneously You can send and receive data between the terminal and the Model 200 Controller or host Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Using the T2425 Between Access Points The access point acts as a bridge to provide communications between the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal and the Ethernet or token ring network You may have multiple access points in your 2 4 GHz RF network to provide uninterrupted wireless communication at any location within your facility To use the terminal between access points and continue sending and receiving data you must follow these guidelines e The radio coverage of each access point must overlap to ensure that the roaming T2425 will always have a connection available e You configure each access point with the same RF domain number and security ID e You configure the T2425 terminals with the same RF domain and security ID as the access points to which they may communicate e All access points that the T2425 terminals may communicate with and roam between must be installed in the same IP subnetwork The T2425 cannot roam between IP subnetworks Once the network is configured you can collect data anywhere within range of the access points in the wireless network When you move out of range of one access point the terminal automatically polls the other access points in the same RF domain to continue the network connection If you are out of range o
227. inutes disabled Normal All reader commands enabled Moderate 10 seconds 3 maximum contrast 8x8 font 8 pixels wide by 8 pixels high Caps lock off Enabled Hardware default No characters disabled No characters disabled 0 no RAM drive Allowed Disabled One Shot mode Normal All compatible scanners see Note below Disabled no timeout Level triggering 9601011200000 Disabled Note The Scanner Selection configuration command is only used when a module for cabled scanners or a long range scan module is installed on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal A 9 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual A 10 Default Configuration for RF Network Communications T2425 Only Parameter Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit Controller Connect Check Receive Timer Controller Connect Check Send Timer Controller IP Address Default Router Host IP Address Maximum Retries Network Activate Network Loopback Network Port RF Domain RF Inactivity Timeout RF Roaming Flag RF Security Identification ID RF Security ID Override RF Transmit Mode RF Wakeup On Broadcast Subnet Mask TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout Terminal IP Address Default 300 ms 5000 ms 60 seconds 35 seconds 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 Disabled Disabled 23 Telnet for a TCP IP network 5555 for a UDP Plus network 0 5 seconds Allowed None No BFSK N
228. ion The main battery pack charge is low You have a few minutes of power left Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack or charge the battery pack The main battery pack charge and the backup battery charge are both low Immediately turn off the terminal Replace the main battery pack with a spare charged battery pack Let the main battery pack charge the backup battery The backup battery will be fully charged in approximately 18 hours If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment move the terminal to a warmer environment to charge the backup battery If the backup battery will not charge you may need to replace it For help contact your local Intermec service representative Problems While Configuring the Terminal You can configure the terminal by using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System or by scanning configuration commands If you have problems configuring the terminal check these possible problems and solutions Problem On the T2425 you configure the RF security ID and the changes do not appear to be saved On a T2425 you see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Network configuration error Network is enabled Terminal IP address or Controller Host IP address set to an invalid address of 0 x x x or 127 x x x Configuration was not updated 6 8 Solution You can only set the RF security ID with the 2 4 GHz RF network enabled The Net
229. ion commands list of 9 5 A 11 configuring parameters 1 18 to 1 21 4 11 problems troubleshooting 6 8 to 6 13 terminal via 4 12 connecting to a device 2 21 4 10 default values 1 18 definition G 21 downloading files 5 8 locating 2 21 4 9 network illustrated 4 3 Receive File reader command 8 13 specifications A 6 Transmit File reader command 8 18 using 4 11 Serial Port Test screen defined 7 24 serial definition G 21 server definition G 21 session definition G 21 Shift key icon described 2 18 using 2 7 shipping box list of contents 1 7 site survey planning 4 15 SNA definition G 21 Software Diagnostics menu diagnostic tests defined 7 7 using 7 6 SOM command 9 76 Spanish See European languages special keys finding 2 4 specifications physical and environmental A 3 to A 8 programmable terminals 5 4 spread spectrum definition G 22 standard range scan module installing 2 39 optical parameters A 7 specifications A 7 terminal accessory described 1 4 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 7 18 using 2 38 2 40 window cleaning 6 30 See also scan module or scanning Start of Message See SOM command start stop codes conventions defined xix creating bar code labels 9 3 definition G 22 starting applications 1 30 5 16 5 19 RF network parameters configuring 1 23 to 1 28 serial port configuring 1 18 to 1 21 steps for using the terminal 1 7 time and date setting 1 16 TRAKKER Antar
230. ions Dock Quick Reference Guide To host computer or device To power supply TD2400 communications dock TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter Connect the optical link adapter to a device host computer printer or other serial device using an RS 232 null modem serial cable Part No 047569 or 059167 Connect the power supply to the optical link adapter optional Connect the optical link adapter to the serial port on the end of the terminal You can transfer data between the terminal and the device connected to the optical link adapter For help see the TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter Quick Reference Guide Optical link adapter To power supply computer or device Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Configuring and Using Serial Communications Once the T2420 or T2425 is connected to a host computer or other serial device you are ready to configure the serial port parameters on the two devices The terminal uses a Configurable Serial Port CSP protocol and XMODEM to handle data communications through the RS 232 serial port User applications use CSP The terminal s built in file operations use XMODEM for file transfer CSP is based on Intermec s Polling Mode D protocol except that you have the option to change some of the serial port protocol parameters or remove specific events from the protocol such as Poll or handshake For help on communications protocols see the Data Communications R
231. is pointing toward bar code label Tilt the terminal up or down slightly 20 degrees You can also watch the laser beam The laser beam becomes the brightest at the best scan angle 2 41 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 42 Optimum scan angles vary with the type and print quality of the bar code label the distance of the scanner from the label and the lighting in the area Note You should not scan the bar code label straight on In a 2 degree conical dead zone directly above the label the laser beam may reflect back into the scanner window and prevent the terminal from reading the label At certain angles and straight on you may not see the laser beam Scanning Options You can set several configuration command parameters to configure the laser scanner to meet your needs There are several ways to set the scanner commands on the terminal For help see Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal For help using the scanner configuration commands see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference The parameters available are Decode Security Defines the security level to use when decoding bar codes When you select a lower decode security level the terminal can decode bar codes with poorer print quality Scan Ahead Allows you to scan a number of bar code labels at one time The labels are held in a stack until the terminal can process the data Scanner Mode Defines how the scanner operates
232. isa Up Mave hrav 6 Verify that there are no files or entries listed in the Files and Data list box If there are entries then choose Clear to remove them 7 In the Initialization Data box choose File 5 14 10 11 12 13 14 15 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 In the field type filename where filename is the name of the executable binary application Or choose Find select your application and choose OK Enable the Binary file check box Enable the Overwrite option button to overwrite an existing file with the same name In the Target file name field type a name if you want to save the file under a different name on the terminal Do NOT enter a slash or backslash character before the target filename Note If you have a terminal with firmware version 1 x you can download and run only one application In the Target file name field type the name of the existing application usually APPTSK BIN that is stored on the terminal Choose Add The file appears in the Files and Data list box with a B for binary in the leftmost column Condy Devine intial ratum Orario Configee fhe files and dsla dn be reri aded in a jia ue gesup s4 terminals upum initialization Terminal or group name WIPRO Inltislization Dala x File Command oh n C Fini il Tat fila nama ii diilaront ani F a Cheese I he Fia amd Data is ikenbaad ande B SHIPPING Bil 0 0 T BHIPP
233. isk on the Symbologies Menu indicates that the symbology is active For help see Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes earlier in this chapter Communications Menu Choose the Communications menu to configure the primary network parameters the advanced network parameters the radio parameters or the serial port parameters On a T2420 only the serial port option is visible since the terminal has no radio For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Terminal Menu Choose the Terminal Menu to configure the way the terminal keypad scanner or screen operate For help see Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate earlier in this chapter The System Menu contains these commands File Manager Load Default Values Set Time and Date Store Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEsec Exit 242XU 051 Configuring the Terminal 3 File Manager Lets you manage the files on each drive You can run an application from drive C delete a file from any drive or rename a file on any drive For help using the File Manager see Running the Application on the Terminal in Chapter 5 Load Default Values Lets you load the default configuration values For help see Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration later in this chapter Set Time and Date Lets you set the current time and date For help see Setting the Time and Date in Chapter 1 Store Co
234. k Status 7 9 Defining the Hardware Diagnostics Screens 7 10 Battery Monitor 7 10 Battery Status 7 11 Beeper Test 7 12 Destructive RAM Test 7 13 Display Test 7 14 Hardware Configuration 7 15 Keypad Test 7 16 Radio Test 7 17 Scanner Test 7 18 Serial Loopback 7 19 Defining the System Diagnostics Screens 7 20 Access Point 7 20 Application Efficiency 7 21 Malloc Application Information 7 22 ix TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Malloc Firmware Information 7 23 Serial Port Test 7 24 Subsystem Versions 7 25 Suspend Resume Test 7 26 Reader Command Reference Using Reader Commands 8 3 Using Accumulate Mode 8 3 Enter Accumulate Mode 8 5 Backspace 8 5 Clear 8 6 Enter 8 6 Exit Accumulate Mode 8 6 Operating Reader Commands 8 7 Backlight On and Off 8 7 Change Configuration 8 8 Default Configuration 8 8 Multiple Read Labels 8 9 Reset Firmware 8 9 Save Configuration in Flash Memory 8 10 Scanner Trigger On and Off 8 10 Test and Service Mode 8 11 File Management Reader Commands 8 12 Abort Program 8 12 Delete File 8 12 Receive File 8 13 Receive File Through the Serial Port 8 13 Receive File Via RF Communications 8 14 Rename File 8 16 Run Program 8 17 Transmit File 8 18 Transmit File Through the Serial Port 8 18 Transmit File Via RF Communications 8 19 Configuration Command Reference Using Configuration Commands 9 3 Configuration Commands Listed by Category 9 4 Entering Variable Dat
235. k sensing pattern recognition character recognition and bar code recognition The laser scanner converts bar code symbols to electrical signals for input to a bar code reader decoder for processing and subsequent output through a data communications interface LCD Liquid crystal display A display comprised of groups of transparent anisotropic liquid segments that are switched between two transparent electrodes Application of an electric field across a segment changes the reflectivity of the liquid and it becomes opaque LED Light emitting diode A semiconductor that produces light at a wavelength determined by its chemical composition LEDs are often used as the light source in bar code readers and terminals Glossary G level triggering A scanner trigger configuration that makes the laser turn on after you activate the scanner and stay on until you release the Scan button or the trigger on a cabled scanner Contrast with edge triggering lithium ion battery pack Provides the main power source to operate the terminal The lithium ion battery pack is rechargeable and charges the backup battery when required local editing error An error that occurs when a user performs an operation in a field that is not supported by the field s properties or definition No data is sent when a local editing error occurs For example a local editing error occurs when a user enters characters in a numeric only field logical partition A logic
236. ke sure you are using a null modem RS 232 cable to connect the communications dock or optical link adapter to the host or serial device e Make sure an external power supply is connected to the communications dock and there is power to the electrical outlet e Make sure an external power supply is connected to the optical link adapter or that you have a charged battery pack installed in the terminal e Make sure the terminal s serial port parameters are configured to match the serial port configuration on the host computer or serial device For example make sure the baud rate is the same For help connecting and configuring the serial port see Using Serial Communications on the T2420 and T2425 in Chapter 4 6 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application There are three types of errors that you may see while running the screen mapping application on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal Initialization errors that occur while trying to start the screen mapping application download the template or loading a screen Communications errors that occur while trying to communicate with the Model 200 Controller Data entry errors that occur while entering data in the fields on a screen If you have a problem while using your screen mapping application check these possible initialization communications or data entry problems Screen Mapping Initialization Er
237. key to type uppercase alphabetic characters When you press 1 f or J the key is held in a buffer until you press another key The icon appears on the terminal s screen to remind you that the key is being held in the buffer When you press another key the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Shift Function left Function right fY f f 242XU 008 To flush the Lf f or key from the buffer without performing any action just press the key again The icon disappears from the screen To use the FnL FnR and Shift keys 1 Press C4 C or J The Function Left Function Right or Shift icon appears on the terminal s screen For example press The Shift icon appears on the terminal screen ft 242XU 118 2 Press the second key For example press A to type the uppercase letter A The Shift icon disappears from the terminal s screen TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Capitalizing All Characters To type all alphabetic characters as uppercase letters you can press before every letter you type or you can enable the Caps Lock feature To enable Caps Lock 1 Press Cf The Function Left icon appears on the terminal s screen 2 Press Zz The Caps Lock icon appears on the terminal s screen 3 Type an alphabetic character The letter appears as an uppercase character on the terminal s screen For examp
238. klight Timeout configuration command to a value of 30 seconds The T2425 returns this transaction to the host application Cs BV4DF30 where Cs is a TMF Configuration Set response is the Change Configuration reader command BV4 means the Beep Volume configuration command has been changed to a value of 4 which is a very loud beep volume DF30 means the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command has been changed to a value of 30 seconds 4 27 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Transferring Files in a TCP IP Direct Connect Network 4 28 You can use an application on the host computer to transfer files and send data between the terminal and host in a TCP IP direct connect network To send and receive data you need to write an application for the host that can communicate with the T2425 directly via an access point You use the file management reader commands such as Receive File and the Terminal Message Format TMF protocol to transfer files between the T2425 and the host You can also send any reader or configuration commands from the host application For help with TMF see Configuring the T2425 in a TCP IP Direct Connect Network earlier in this chapter Note You can continue running an application on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal while configuring the terminal or transferring files from the host To develop an application for the host in a TCP IP direct connect network you
239. ks with similar architectures broadcast A type of transmission in which a message sent from the host is received by many devices on the system TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual cabled scanner A wand laser scanner or other device that scans bar code information A cabled scanner is connected to a bar code reader or terminal with a cable rather than being built into integrated in the reader or terminal CCD scanner Charge coupled device A CCD scanner contains no moving parts and uses a light source to illuminate the entire symbol A symbol is scanned electronically using the digitized image of a line through the symbol provided by the linear photodiode array CGA Color graphics adapter CGA is a video adapter board channel The path for transmitting data from a device to the host computer In RF networks it is the frequency hopping sequence the radio card follows The 2 4 GHz bandwidth can be divided into 15 channels check character A character included within a message that performs a check to ensure the accuracy of the message check digit A character included in a bar code whose value is used to do a mathematical check on the value of the decoded bar code to retain accuracy checksum A calculated value that is used to test data integrity Errors can occur when data is transmitted or when it is written to disk One means of detecting such errors is the use of a checksum A value is calcu
240. l Screen To keep the terminal in good working order you need to clean the scan module window and terminal screen Clean these surfaces as often as needed or when they are dirty To clean the scan module window and terminal screen 1 Press to turn off the terminal Use a solution of ammonia and water Dip a clean towel or rag in the ammonia solution and wring out the excess solution Wipe off the scan module window and terminal screen Do not allow any abrasive material to touch these surfaces 4 Wipe dry Running Diagnostics Running Diagnostics This chapter explains how to run diagnostics on the terminal to help analyze hardware application and firmware problems What Diagnostics Are Available You can run diagnostics on the terminal to help analyze hardware and firmware problems fix application problems and view system information You use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to run diagnostics Use this table to determine the diagnostic you want to run on the terminal Diagnostic Test Access Point T2425 only Application Efficiency Application Events Battery Monitor Battery Status Beeper Test Clear Task Profiles Destructive RAM Test Display Test Error Logger Hardware Configuration Keypad Test Description Lists information about the access point the T2425 is communicating with across the network Displays the application efficiency percentage to help determine the impac
241. l and enable the symbology To quickly enable symbologies see Enabling Bar Code Symbologies in Chapter 1 To ensure that the terminal can operate quickly and efficiently you should enable only the bar code symbologies that you are going to scan When you enable each bar code symbology you may need to set a check digit the length of the bar code label or other options For help see the bar code symbology in Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Specifying How the Terminal Will Communicate The T2420 uses RS 232 serial communications to send data to and from another serial device The T2425 uses radio frequency RF communications to communicate with other devices in Intermec s 2 4 GHz RF network You can also use the T2425 s serial port to send and receive data Before you can use the terminal in your wired or RF network you must configure the serial port and or network parameters On the T2425 you must set the RF network parameters radio parameters and address information before the T2425 can communicate with other devices in your 2 4 GHz RF network For example you must set the Terminal IP Address so the T2425 can transmit data to and receive data from other network devices To learn how to configure the terminal to fit into your wired or 2 4 GHz RF network see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Configuring the Terminal 3 Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate The operating param
242. l memory that contains often used instructions such as microprograms or system software ROM is programmed during memory fabrication and cannot be reprogrammed router A software and hardware connection between two or more subnetworks that permits traffic to be routed from one network to another based on the intended destinations of that traffic RS 232 Widely recognized protocol standard for serial binary data interchange The standard covers the physical electrical and functional characteristics of the interface RS 232 is the standard American format for serial data transmission by cable that is from a computer terminal to a modem RS 232 transmission uses a distinctive 25 pin connector although in most cases not all the conductors are used See serial scanner devices Typically a light emitting device that reads a coded language This type of device includes wands and laser scanners Glossary G Scanner mode Defines how the scanner operates when the trigger is pulled There are two types of modes One Shot or Automatic One Shot mode requires you to activate the scanner each time you want to scan a bar code Once you scan a bar code the scanner turns off Automatic mode allows you to activate the scanner once and scan a series of bar codes When you release the Scan button or trigger on a cabled scanner the scanner turns off To scan the same bar code more than once you must release the button or trigger or scan a diff
243. l order within these three categories You will find the purpose command syntax and bar code labels for each reader command in this chapter Note The Code 39 bar code labels in this chapter show an asterisk at the beginning and end of the human readable interpretation to represent the start and stop codes If you are creating your own Code 39 bar code labels your bar code printing utility may automatically supply the asterisks as the start stop code Using Accumulate Mode You can use Accumulate mode to collect data from a series of bar code labels and enter them as a single label When you put the terminal in Accumulate mode the terminal will collect all scanned bar code labels in the terminal s buffer until you scan either the Enter or Exit Accumulate mode command As you accumulate the data from bar code labels the data is visible on the bottom line of the screen You can edit the accumulated data with the Backspace Clear and Enter commands 8 3 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 8 4 Backspace This command deletes the last character from the current data record you are accumulating Clear This command deletes the entire data record you are accumulating Enter This command will enter data as a record and leaves the terminal in Accumulate mode Note If you are not in Accumulate mode the Backspace Clear and Enter commands have no effect and you will hear an error beep When you exit Accu
244. late Mode ANIM oT 9 63 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RF Inactivity Timeout 9 64 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Or Defines the amount of time the radio on the T2425 waits to go into a low power state If no data is sent or received within the RF inactivity timeout period set the radio goes into a low power state to conserve battery power If you set a high value the radio stays on longer at a higher power rate and uses battery power at a faster rate Power Management Tip Intermec strongly recommends that you use the optimum RF inactivity timeout of 5 seconds to preserve the main battery pack s power RYdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Radio never turns off 1 51 RF inactivity timeout in seconds multiplied by a value of 5 where data 1 sets a timeout delay of 5 seconds data 2 sets a timeout delay of 10 seconds and so on up to data 51 for a timeout delay of 255 seconds 5 seconds To set the default RF inactivity timeout to 5 seconds scan this bar code Default RF Inactivity Timeout RY1 To set the RF inactivity timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set RF Inactivity Timeout RY 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes 0 1 uud 3 Configuration Command Reference A 45 6 wA g 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode AIM A RF Roaming Flag Purpose Syntax Default
245. lated for a given chunk of data by sequentially combining all the bytes of data with a series of arithmetic or logical operations After the data is transmitted or stored a new checksum is calculated and compared with the original one If the checksums match the transmission or storage was probably error free If they do not match an error occurred coaxial A type of cable used to connect the Model 200 Controller directly to an IBM host Coaxial cable consists of an outer layer of insulation an outer conductor another insulating layer and a central conductor Glossary G Codabar A self checking discrete bar code symbology that has these 16 characters in its set 0 to 9 dollar sign colon slash period plus and minus Codabar is commonly used in libraries blood banks and air parcel express applications The American Blood Commission ABC Codabar requires that you retain the start stop code digits when processing a Codabar symbol The maximum density for a Codabar symbol is 12 8 characters per inch Code 11 A very high density discrete numeric bar code developed by Intermec The character set includes the numbers 0 through 9 and the dash character Each character is represented by a standalone group of three bars with two included spaces This code is not self checking One or two check digits provide data security Code 11 is most extensively used in labeling telecommunications components and equip
246. lation definition G 3 keypads chart for entering characters 2 12 using 2 4 to 2 11 starting 1 30 See also TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide A ABC Codabar 9 14 Abort Program reader command 8 12 About TRAKKER Antares 2400 screen defined 3 6 accent marks typing 2 11 access point configuring 4 16 definition G 3 roaming between 4 21 Access Point screen defined 7 20 accessories for the terminal 1 4 Accumulate mode definition G 3 using reader commands 8 3 Acknowledgement Delay Lower Limit command 9 7 Acknowledgement Delay Upper Limit command 9 8 address controller IP configuring 9 32 default router configuring 9 35 host IP configuring 9 43 Index IP defined 4 17 terminal IP configuring 9 80 AFF command 9 42 Affirmative Acknowledge See Handshake command AIAG check digit Code 39 9 20 AID definition G 3 alphanumeric keypad chart for entering characters 2 12 illustrated 2 5 options described 2 4 See also keypad alphanumeric definition G 3 American Blood Commission See ABC Codabar ANSI definition G 3 Antares See TRAKKER Antares terminal antenna ordering parts 6 28 replacing 6 28 ATI definition G 4 Append Time command 9 10 Application Efficiency screen defined 7 21 Application Events screen defined 7 7 applications CLIENT CPP sample utility 4 28 to 4 32 converting binary files 5 8 JANUS and TRAKKER Antares 5 7 developing 5 6 downloading from co
247. ldfilename newfilename is the new name of the file In the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System choose System Menu and then choose File Manager Next choose the drive where you want to rename files 1 Scan this bar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Rename File 4 2 Scan the bar code label s for the file you want to rename You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format drive oldfilename drive newfilename 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and rename the file Exit Accumulate Mode _ You can create your own bar code labels to rename files by creating a bar code in this command format drive oldfilename drive newfilename To rename the file SHIPPING BIN on drive C to DOCK1 BIN use this command Cc shipping bin c dockl bin Run Program Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Example Reader Command Reference Runs the specified program or application that is stored on the terminal For help see Chapter 5 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping Note You cannot store and run applications from the RAM drive E drive filename where is the command to run an application drive indicates the drive where the application is stored You must include the colon after the drive letter filename is the application you want to run In the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu
248. le press _F to type an uppercase letter F Caps Lock remains enabled until you disable it 242XU 046 To type a lowercase letter with Caps Lock enabled e Press and an alphabetic character For example press to type a lowercase letter f To disable Caps Lock 1 Press t The Function Left icon appears on the terminal s screen Press z The Caps Lock icon disappears from the terminal s screen Type an alphabetic character The letter appears as a lowercase letter on the terminal s screen Note You can also use the Keypad Caps Lock configuration command to enable or disable Caps Lock on the terminal For help see Keypad Caps Lock in Chapter 9 How to Use the Cursor Keys You can press keys to move the cursor around an application screen The terminal s cursor keys work the same as cursor keys on a regular keyboard You use the oval shaped cursor key to move the cursor up down right or left on the screen Learning How to Use the Terminal Using the Cursor Keys 1 5 E Cursor keys E cx ar e t5 t5 i 242XU 042 To Use This Cursor Key Press Description Arrow up A Moves the cursor up one row or line Arrow down v Moves the cursor down one row or line Arrow right Moves the cursor one character to the right Arrow left 4 Moves the cursor one character to the left On the terminal emulation keypads you can use the cu
249. led laser scanner There are two types of modes In One Shot mode you must press the Scan button or activate the cabled laser scanner each time you want to scan a bar code Once you scan a bar code the scanner turns off In Automatic Auto trigger mode you press the Scan button once or activate the cabled laser scanner once to scan a series of bar codes When you release the button or trigger the scanner turns off To scan the same bar code more than once you must release the Scan button or trigger or scan a different bar code before attempting a second scan Syntax SBdata Acceptable values for data are 0 One Shot mode 1 Automatic mode Default One Shot mode Scan One of these bar codes Enable One Shot Mode SB0 Enable Automatic Mode SB1 9 70 Configuration Command Reference Scanner Redundancy Purpose Syntax Default Scan Defines the number of scans voting the scanner takes of the same label that must decode correctly for a good read of the label Voting requires the terminal to decode the same bar code multiple times during a single scanner event and to compare the decoded information a specific number of times before signaling a good read There are three options None Allows the terminal to accept the first good read which speeds up terminal performance This setting is recommended when scanning good quality bar codes Normal The terminal decodes the bar code a minimum nu
250. ledgement Delay Upper Limit 9 8 Controller Connect Check Receive Timer 9 29 Controller Connect Check Send Timer 9 30 Controller IP Address 9 32 Default Router 9 35 Host IP Address 9 43 Maximum Retries 9 49 Network Activate 9 52 Network Loopback 9 52 Network Port 9 53 RF Domain 9 63 RF Inactivity Timeout 9 64 RF Roaming Flag 9 65 RF Security Identification ID 9 66 RF Security ID Override 9 67 RF Transmit Mode 9 68 RF Wakeup On Broadcast 9 69 Subnet Mask 9 77 TCP IP Maximum Transmit Timeout 9 79 Terminal IP Address 9 80 Configuration Command Reference Serial Network Communications Baud Rate 9 12 Configuration Commands Via Serial Port 9 28 Data Bits 9 33 End of Message EOM 9 40 Flow Control 9 41 Handshake 9 42 LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check 9 49 Parity 9 54 Poll Polling 9 56 Start of Message SOM 9 76 Stop Bits 9 77 Timeout Delay 9 84 9 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Entering Variable Data in a Configuration Command You can enter variable data for many of the configuration commands For example you can set a preamble that is up to 25 ASCII characters long You need to follow these general instructions to enter variable data To enter variable data in a configuration command 1 Scan a bar code label with this syntax command where is the syntax for the Enter Accumulate Mode command is the syntax
251. ler 2 Choose the Command option button Enter the reader or configuration command and choose Add The command appears in the Files and Data box Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 For example enter this command to set the Beep Volume to very loud BV4 For a list of reader commands see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference For a list of configuration commands see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Note You can set the Postamble or Preamble command to use characters from the extended ASCII character set such as the Field Exit code for 5250 TE For help see Auto Advancing Through Fields on 5250 TE Screens in the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide 4 RepeatStep 3 to add another reader or configuration command or choose OK 5 Tosave the configuration changes in flash memory on the T2425 enter this reader command as the last command and choose Add 1 Otherwise the commands only change the runtime configuration You can also use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to save configuration changes in flash memory on the T2425 For help see Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory in Chapter 3 6 Choose Download to download the commands and change the configuration of the terminals selected Configuring the T2425 From the Host You can use an application on the host computer to configure one T2425 For example you may want to change the Beep Volume command or the Display
252. level protocol for transferring files from one device to another over TCP IP networks FTP uses TCP to deliver its data Contrast with TFTP full ASCII An operating mode that sets the terminal to properly decode Code 39 or Code 93 labels containing data that includes any of the 128 ASCII characters Function Left key The Function Left key is a special key on the keypad You use the f key to type characters or perform functions that are printed on the left side above the key When you press _f the key is held in a buffer and the Function Left key icon appears on the terminal s screen Once you press a key other than t the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears from the screen Function Right key The Function Right key is a special key on the keypad You use the f key to type characters or perform functions that are printed on the right side above the key When you press f the key is held in a buffer and the Function Right key icon appears on the terminal s screen Once you press a key other than t the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears from the screen handshake event A communications event that signifies the completion of a data block transmission The exchange signifies either an affirmative acknowledge AFF or a negative acknowledge NEG The handshake event is enabled by defining the AFF character to be other than NULL Some computers use the characters
253. lp see End of Message EOM in Chapter 9 You cannot set EOM or SOM to any of these values AFF ACK DLE NEG NAK Poll RES EOT REQ ENQ SEL XOFF or XON You need to change the value of EOM or SOM Choose Serial Port from the Communications Menu For help see End of Message EOM or Start of Message SOM in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Problems While Configuring the Terminal continued Problem You are configuring the serial port and see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu PG command failed Configuration was not updated You are configuring SOM or EOM in the Configuration Menu and cannot set two characters You are scanning a configuration command to set one of the serial port parameters and hear three low beeps For example you are trying to set EOM or SOM You see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Commandname command failed Remainder of configuration not updated Solution PG is the Handshake configuration command You need to change the value of Handshake or set other serial port parameters Choose Serial Port from the Communications Menu The order in which you set serial port protocol configuration commands is important To use Frame mode you need to set EOM first Next configure Handshake LRC SOM and then Poll To use Character mode you need to disable these same parameters in reverse order For help see Usi
254. ls 6 20 to 6 22 screen mapping 6 16 to 6 19 serial communications 6 15 terminal locked up 6 6 6 26 terminal will not turn on 6 5 6 7 turning on the terminal first time getting started 1 13 key described 1 31 troubleshooting 6 5 6 7 twinaxial definition G 24 typing characters on the keypad 2 6 2 12 TZ2400 Battery Charger See battery charger U UCC EAN Code 128 enabling 9 24 UDP Plus network configuration commands using 9 3 file management commands using 8 12 firmware upgrading 1 35 illustrated 1 22 4 4 4 6 4 8 Model 200 Controller configuring 4 15 protocol defined 1 22 4 33 to 4 35 reader commands using 8 3 RF parameters default values 1 23 4 16 specifications A 6 terminal checking the protocol loaded 3 6 7 9 transmitting files 5 13 8 14 8 19 DP Plus definition G 25 DP Port 4 18 9 53 See Network Port command DP definition G 24 niversal Product Code See UPC EAN command npacking the terminal 1 7 nprotected field definition G 25 PC EAN command 9 85 PC A EAN 13 enabling 9 85 PC E enabling 9 85 upgrading the firmware Boot Menu using 6 26 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System using 3 21 upline definition G 25 uppercase letters bar code labels to scan B 9 V validation file downloading 5 21 variable data entering in commands 8 3 9 6 vehicle mount holder terminal accessory 1 5 vertical reading angle for scanning 2 41 viewport cae as c coe Cic ci I
255. lt Scan 9 62 Defines the way in which the terminal resumes when you press 9 to turn on the terminal If you set this parameter to resume not allowed and you press to turn on the terminal the terminal will boot and restart the default application If you set this parameter to resume allowed and press 9 to turn on the terminal the terminal resumes exactly where it was when you turned off the terminal ERdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Not allowed 1 Allowed Allowed One of these bar codes Resume Execution Not Allowed ERO Resume Execution Allowed ER1 RF Domain Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference Defines a logical partition or subnetwork of the network To establish communications you must assign the same domain number to every RF device in a wireless network The domain number you set on the T2425 must match the domain that is set on each access point the T2425 may communicate with You can continue to collect data with the T2425 as you roam in between access points as long as all the devices have the same domain number RWdata Acceptable values for data are any number from 0 to 15 0 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set RF Domain 4 RW 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes LL LUE 0 ANTM NANT o 3 AMT ANAT A 45 MIATA ANT 6 47 ANT AMI g 9 3 Scanthis bar code Exit Accumu
256. lues for data are 0 12425 retries indefinitely 1 99 Number of retries 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Maximum Retries continued Scan Tosetthe default number of maximum retries scan this bar code Default Maximum Retries NR7 Or To set the maximum retries 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Maximum Retries NR 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes LATA 0 LIA 40 ATA 4 TIL 6 HIT g 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode UTI _ 9 50 HIA 1 HIM 3 TIL 5 A px HIA 9 M SI Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference Enables or disables decoding of MSI symbology MSI code is similar to Plessey code MSI code includes a start pattern data characters one or two check digits and a stop pattern CNdata Acceptable values for data are First digit 0 Disabled 1 No check digits 2 1 modulus 10 check digit 3 2 modulus 10 check digit Second digit 0 Discard check digit 1 Transmit check digit Disabled One of these bar codes Disable MSI CNO0 MSI Without Check Digits CN10 MSI With 1 Modulus 10 Check Digit Discard Check Digit CN20 MSI With 1 Modulus 10 Check Digit Transmit Check Digit CN21 MSI With 2 Modulus 10 Check Digits Discard Check Digits CN30 MSI With 2 Modulus 10 Check Digits Transmit Check Digi
257. m reading the screens in the template The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem building the screens The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem reading the file The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 6 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Screen Mapping Communications Errors Problem Solution Transaction Buffer Full The buffer holding transactions to be sent to the controller is full Stop collecting data with this terminal Make sure the terminal is communicating with the Model 200 Controller and let the terminal send all the transactions in the buffer before you continue collecting data Sending Buffer Transactions This is an information message to tell you that buffered transactio
258. mapping illustrated 2 5 special keys finding 2 4 typing characters 2 6 using 2 4 to 2 11 Keypad Caps Lock command 9 47 Keypad Clicker command 9 47 Keypad Test screen defined 7 16 Keypad Type command 9 48 L labels See bar code labels LAN definition G 14 languages characters table of C 3 to C 12 multilingual European keypad 2 9 laser scanner definition G 14 See also scan module LCD definition G 14 LEDs definition G 14 scanning bar code labels 2 40 troubleshooting 6 22 letters bar code labels to scan B 9 B 10 level triggering configuring the scanner 9 75 definition G 15 lights See LEDs Load Default Values screen using 3 20 loader using the Boot Menu 6 26 local editing error definition G 15 lock up troubleshooting 6 6 6 26 long range scan module optical parameters A 7 specifications A 7 terminal accessory described 1 5 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 using 2 38 See also scan module or scanning Longitudinal Redundancy Check See LRC command lowercase letters bar code labels to scan B 10 LRC command 9 49 M Main Board Menu using 7 10 7 12 7 13 Main Menu options defined 3 6 Malloc Application Information screen defined 7 22 Malloc Firmware Information screen defined 7 23 malloc definition G 15 manual audience and purpose described xvii firmware version 2 x or earlier using with 1 34 guide to learning tasks 1 36 reference list xxi summary of each chapter x
259. mber of times in each scanner event The number of comparisons that are made depends on each bar code symbology High The terminal scans and decodes the bar code a maximum number of times in each scanner event The specific number of comparisons depends on each bar code symbology The high setting is recommended when scanning poor quality labels that may cause substitution errors For example when you scan Code 39 labels and the scanner redundancy is set to normal two successive matching decodes in a single scanner event are required When scanner redundancy is set to high three successive matching decodes in a single scanner event are required SRdata Acceptable values for data are 0 None 1 Normal 2 High Normal One of these bar codes Scanner Redundancy None Scanner Redundancy Normal SRO SR1 Scanner Redundancy High SR2 9 71 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Selection 9 72 Purpose Syntax Default Identifies the type of scanner you have connected to the TRAKKER Antares terminal module for cabled scanners The terminal can optimize the scanning performance by using the scanner you define in this command When you select a specific scanner other scanners may not function properly Your terminal may not work if you connect an incompatible scanner Note The Scanner Selection configuration command is only used when a m
260. me Execution By default the terminal restarts your application For help see Resume Execution in Chapter 9 If you change the main battery pack while the terminal is turned off the terminal resumes or boots the next time the terminal is turned on The backup battery saves all memory while you change the main battery pack 1 31 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Enabling Bar Code Symbologies 1 32 The TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals can decode several different types of bar code symbologies Each symbology such as Code 39 uses a different scheme for encoding data as bar code You must configure the terminal to decode the bar code symbology used in your bar code labels Only enable the bar code symbologies that you need to scan For more information about each symbology and the configuration options see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference The terminal can decode the bar code symbologies shown in the next table You can scan the bar code labels in the table to enable a symbology Note Only three symbologies Code 39 Code 128 and UPC EAN are enabled when you unpack the terminal Bar Code Symbology Enabled To Enable the Symbology Codabar No Enable Standard Codabar ABCD Start Stop Code CD21 Code 11 No Enable Code 11 With Two Check Digits CG2 Code 16K No Enable Standard Code 16K CP1 Code 2 of 5 No Enable Code 2 of 5 3 Bar Start Stop Label Length of 1
261. me option Terminal Menu Power Management option Terminal Menu Beeper option Terminal Menu Scanner option Terminal Menu Display option Terminal Menu Display option Terminal Menu Display option Terminal Menu Keypad option Terminal Menu Keypad option Terminal Menu Keypad option Terminal Menu Preamble Postamble option Terminal Menu Preamble Postamble option Terminal Menu RAM Drive option Terminal Menu Reader Commands option Configuring the Terminal 3 Terminal Operations Table continued Parameter Syntax Options Location in Configuration Menu Reader Commands DC Abort Program Terminal Menu Enable Disable specific Backlight Reader Commands option Reader Commands Backspace Enable single commands option Change Configuration Clear Default Configuration Delete File Enter Accumulate mode Exit Accumulate mode List Files Multiple Read Labels Receive File Rename File Reset Run Program Scanner Trigger Off Scanner Trigger On Test amp Service mode Transmit File Resume Execution ER Not Allowed Terminal Menu Allowed Power Management option Scan Ahead SD Disabled Terminal Menu Enabled Scanner option Scanner Mode SB One Shot mode Terminal Menu Automatic mode Scanner option Scanner Redundancy SR None Terminal Menu Normal Scanner option High Scanner Selection SS All compatible scanners Terminal Menu See the Note 146x CCD scanners Scanner option
262. ment Its maximum density is 15 characters per inch Code 16K A two dimensional stacked rows ultra high density bar code symbology It is based on Code 128 and is used widely to label unit dose packaging for the healthcare industry Code 2 of 5 2 of 5 A discrete self checking code for encoding numeric data only The bars encode information and the spaces separate individual bars It can achieve densities of 15 characters per inch Code 39 A discrete variable length and self checking bar code symbology The character set is uppercase A to Z 0 to 9 dollar sign period slash percent 96 space plus and minus Code 39 can be extended to the full 128 ASCII character set by use of a two character encoding scheme see full ASCII Its maximum density is 9 8 characters per inch Code 49 A multirow symbology for high data density The last character in each row is used for row checking and the last two characters of the symbol are used for overall checking The character set includes all 128 ASCII characters Its maximum density is 93 3 alphanumeric characters per inch or 154 3 numeric characters per inch G 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 93 A variable length continuous bar code symbology using four element widths It can be used interchangeably with Code 39 when higher density printing is required The character set is the same as Code 39 Its maximum density is
263. method that maximizes battery life For help about charging battery packs see the accessory quick reference guides After you install a charged battery pack in the terminal you can use the Battery Status diagnostic in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to check the charge status of the batteries For help see Chapter 7 Running Diagnostics Tip Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand to operate the terminal without interruption 2 27 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 28 Backup Battery The backup battery is a NiCad battery that is designed to back up all memory and the real time clock while you remove a discharged main battery pack and insert a charged battery pack You can remove and replace the backup battery if it will no longer hold a charge or if the battery is dead The main battery pack charges the backup battery when required with the terminal turned on or off You should keep a charged main battery pack installed in the terminal to maximize the backup battery s life If you turn off the terminal and do not use it the backup battery will provide backup battery power for e A maximum of 1 month if a fully charged main battery pack is installed e A maximum of 3 days if a main battery pack is not installed The backup battery power depends on how much power is left in the main battery pack and the backup battery when you turn off the terminal If the backup battery is still prov
264. minal DBdata Acceptable values for data are 12 digits corresponding to yy 00 99 Year mm 01 12 Month of the year dd 01 31 Day of the month hh 01 12 Hour mm 00 59 Minutes ss 00 59 Seconds 960101120000 To set the time and date 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Time and Date 4 DB 2 Scana numeric value for each digit from these bar codes LL LUE 0 HAM AUAM 3 AMT ANAT A 45 LOL AMT 6 MT LUE LEM g 9 Configuration Command Reference 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ML Time in Seconds Purpose Syntax Default Scan If you enable the Append Time command you can enable the Time in Seconds command to append the seconds to each transaction transmitted from the terminal To append the time in hours and minutes disable the Time in Seconds command DAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Time in Seconds DA0 Enable Time in Seconds DAI1 9 83 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Timeout Delay 9 84 Purpose Syntax Default Scan If handshaking is enabled the terminal expects a response to each message that is sent to the host through the serial port The timeout delay is the amount of time the terminal waits to receive a response When the timeout expires the terminal tries sending the message again If no
265. minal User s Manual Installing TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminals in Multiple Subnetworks UDP Plus Model 200 Controller 192 9 175 7 192 9 175 X subnetwork 192 9 200 X subnetwork gs Ethernet Access point Access point Lm TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals 192 9 175 10 192 9 175 11 192 9 175 12 242XU 091 T2425 s cannot roam between subnetworks TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals 192 9 200 5 192 9 200 6 You can install the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals access points and Model 200 Controller in your 2 4 GHz RF network as shown in the illustration above The 12425 terminals may only communicate with the access points that are in the same IP subnetwork All the terminals and access points in this illustration communicate with the controller at IP address 192 9 175 7 using UDP Plus for the RF protocol 4 6 Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Installing TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminals in Multiple Subnetworks TCP IP Host 192 9 175 7 192 9 200 X 192 9 175 X subnetwork Ethernet subnetwork Access point TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals 192 9 175 10 192 9 175 11 192 9 175 12 242XU 169 T2425 s cannot roam between subnetworks TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals 192 9 200 5 192 9 200 6 You can install the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals and access points in your 2 4 GHz RF netwo
266. minal emulation screen mapping or sample application TE Configuration Menu 3270 5250 VT ANSI terminals only Operating environment firmware and drivers When a new release of the firmware is available you can order a firmware upgrade kit There are two kits Part No 0668145 for TCP IP terminals or Part No 0671195 for UDP Plus terminals To order the TRAKKER Antares Firmware Upgrade Kit contact your local Intermec service representative Each kit comes with the new firmware version the applications the firmware upgrade utilities DOS and Windows and instructions about upgrading the terminal firmware Configuring the Terminal 3 You can upgrade the firmware on the T2420 or the T2425 from a host computer or PC using serial communications You connect the terminal s serial port to the host or PC by using one of these accessories e TD2400 communications dock e Optical link adapter For help connecting the terminal see Chapter 1 Getting Started Once the terminal is connected you can upgrade the firmware Note You can also upgrade the firmware on one or more terminals using the Firmware Upgrade Utility on the Model 200 Controller with 03 0 software and higher For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual To upgrade the firmware with the Windows utility 1 Connect the terminal to your PC 2 From Program Manager start the TRAKKER Antares Firmware Installation utility The Firmware Installation utility scr
267. mportant Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this book before handling and operating Intermec equipment You can be seriously injured and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions Do not repair or adjust alone Do not repair or adjust energized equipment alone under any circumstances Someone capable of providing first aid must always be present for your safety Firstaid Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately after an injury Never neglect an injury no matter how slight it seems Resuscitation Begin resuscitation immediately if someone is injured and stops breathing Any delay could result in death To work on or near high voltage you should be familiar with approved industrial first aid methods Energized equipment Never work on energized equipment unless authorized by a responsible authority Energized electrical equipment is dangerous Electrical shock from energized equipment can cause death If you must perform authorized emergency work on energized equipment be sure that you comply strictly with approved safety regulations Note For laser compliance and safety information refer to the manual supplement that shipped with your TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal XV TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual xvi WARNING CAUTION Warnings and Cautions The warnings and cautions in this manual use the following format Warni
268. mulate mode the accumulated data is entered as a data record Up to 250 characters can be held in the buffer If the data record count exceeds 250 characters the data is truncated If you reset the terminal software or hardware reset you exit Accumulate mode the entire buffer is cleared and all data accumulated is lost To use Accumulate mode The syntax to use the Enter Accumulate command is data where is the syntax for the Enter Accumulate mode command data is the optional data you want to enter Data can be a reader command that is executed when you exit Accumulate mode 1 Scan this bar code label to Enter Accumulate mode Enter Accumulate Mode 4 2 Scan the bar code label s for the data you want to enter You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B For example scan this label to change the terminal s configuration and set the preamble to the characters ABC Change Configuration Set Preamble to ABC ADABC Reader Command Reference Or to edit the accumulated data scan one of these bar code labels Backspace Enter Clear Sap x F Note You can create one bar code label by combining Steps 1 and 2 above Most of the examples in this manual use one bar code label 3 Scan this bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and enter the data record Exit Accumulate Mode AMT M Enter Accumulate Mode Purpose From Network Keyp
269. mware Tests the radio to make sure it is working Verifies that the hardware for the RS 232 serial port is functioning correctly Tests the laser scanner to make sure it is working Tests serial communications between the terminal and the host computer or serial device Lists the version of each major firmware subsystem loaded on the terminal Tests the terminal memory to make sure the memory is being preserved through a suspend and resume cycle Shows the task name stack the percentage of time each subsystem has been running and the stack usage Running Diagnostics From the Menu System The TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System is a menu driven application that lets you configure the terminal view system information and run diagnostics You can access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System and run diagnostics while running any application To run diagnostics from the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System 1 Press t Q T 2 M or scan this bar code Note You must press the Q Left Enter key in this key sequence not the Right Enter or keys Enter Test and Service Mode _ Running Diagnostics The Main Menu appears About TRAKKER 2466 N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEse Exit 242XU 001 Press W to choose the Diagnostics Menu and press The Diagnostics Menu appears DIAGHOSTICS MEHU Software Diagnostics Hardware Diag
270. n To set the default controller connect check receive timer scan this bar code Default Controller Connect Check Receive Timer 4 NP60 Or To set the controller connect check receive timer 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Controller Connect Check Receive Timer NP 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes 0 1 9 29 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Controller Connect Check Receive Timer continued INIT NAT 3 AMT ANAT A 45 AMAT AMT 6 x7 LL DILE Q 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode ANIM a fs Controller Connect Check Send Timer Purpose Syntax Default Scan 9 30 During periods of inactivity on the T2425 the terminal still sends messages to the Model 200 Controller to check the RF connection The terminal sends a message at the time interval set for the Controller Connect Check Send Timer The timer countdown resets each time a valid message is sent or received Power Management Tip Intermec strongly recommends that you use the optimum setting of 35 seconds to preserve the main battery pack s power NOMdata Acceptable values for data are any number 1 to 3600 seconds 60 minutes 35 seconds To set the default controller connect check send timer scan this bar code Default Controller Connect Check Send Timer NQ35 Configuration Command Reference Or To set the controller conn
271. n Battery Pack 1 7 Connecting the Backup Battery 1 8 Installing the Main Battery Pack 1 10 Charging the Backup Battery 1 13 Turning On the Terminal for the First Time 1 13 Setting the Time and Date 1 16 Configuring the Serial Port Parameters 1 18 Configuring the T2425 and the RF Network 1 22 Configuring the Model 200 Controller Host and Access Points 1 23 Configuring the T2425 Network Parameters 1 23 Verifying That the T2425 Is Communicating Correctly 1 29 Starting the Application and Using the Terminal 1 30 Turning the Terminal On and Off 1 31 Enabling Bar Code Symbologies 1 32 What s New on the TRAKKER Antares Terminals 1 34 Using This Manual With Older Firmware Versions 1 34 Ordering the Firmware Upgrade Kit 1 35 Where Do You Go From Here 1 36 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 vi Learning How to Use the Terminal TRAKKER Antares Terminal Features 2 3 Using the Keypad 2 4 Finding the Special Keys 2 4 How to Type the Characters Printed on the Keypad 2 6 Using the Function Left Right and Shift Keys 2 7 Capitalizing All Characters 2 8 How to Use the Cursor Keys 2 8 Using the Western European Keypad 2 9 Quick Reference Keypad Chart 2 12 How to Use the Terminal s Screen 2 15 Using the Screen As a Viewport 2 16 Adjusting the Screen From the Keypad 2 16 Understanding the Icons 2 18 Understanding the Terminal s Audio Signals 2 20 Locating the Serial Port 2 21 Learning Ab
272. n parts of the terminal How to Use This Chapter If you have any problems with the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal use this table as a guide to find the problem and solution in this chapter Problem Screen is blank Terminal locked up or message is displayed Configuring the terminal RF communications error Serial port communications error Screen mapping application error Scanning labels Battery management Boot Menu appears or terminal is locked up Antenna is damaged the terminal screen is dirty or the scan window is dirty See This Section to Find a Solution Terminal Will Not Turn On Problems While Operating the Terminal Problems While Configuring the Terminal T2425 Will Not Communicate With RF Network Devices Problems Transmitting Data Through the Serial Port Problems Using the Screen Mapping Application Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan Guidelines for Managing Batteries Booting and Resetting the Terminal Maintaining and Cleaning the Terminal Page 6 5 6 5 6 8 6 13 6 23 6 25 6 28 Note If you have problems with the 3270 5250 or VT ANSI terminal emulation application see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide 6 3 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Finding and Solving Problems CAUTION If you have a problem while configuring or using the terminal use the tables in
273. name for the host application Create a transaction ID NGCFGRSP that will be routed to this destination name The controller uses the transaction ID to route responses from the T2425 back to the host application NGCFGRSP is a special transaction ID that the controller uses to forward configuration response data from a terminal All configuration responses will be routed with the NGCFGRSP transaction ID The controller cannot keep track of multiple applications sending reader or configuration commands If you have two host applications sending reader or configuration commands they must both be configured to receive the NGCFGRSFP transactions and therefore both will receive all responses from all TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals To set up the host computer e Verify that you can communicate with the Model 200 Controller To set up the application e Prepare and write a host application that can communicate with the controller and send transactions to and receive transactions from the T2425 in this format transaction header TMF field configuration command where transaction header is a 96 byte field containing the message number date and time source application ID destinations application ID transaction ID and other information You must set the system message SYS MSG flag to E in the transaction header For help see the Model 200 Controller Technical Reference Manual Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 TMF fiel
274. ndex definition G 25 icon described 2 19 using 2 16 volume adjusting the beep 2 17 9 13 voting Scanner Redundancy command 9 71 VT ANSI screen mapping See screen mapping VT ANSI terminal emulation definition G 26 keypad chart for entering characters 2 12 using 2 4 to 2 11 starting 1 30 See also TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide W wands configuring for scan module 9 72 list for scan module A 8 warm boot 6 26 8 9 warnings defined xvi warranty information xv weight of the terminal A 4 Western European languages See European languages what s new described 1 34 white keys using 2 6 X XMODEM protocol defined 4 11 4 33 XON XOFF definition G 26 set by flow control 9 41 I 17
275. ne level darker There are eight contrast levels If the contrast is at the darkest level and you press f G7 the contrast changes to the lightest contrast level To change the beep volume of the audio signals e To change the volume of the terminal s audio signals press t G7 Each time you press f G7 it makes the beep volume one level louder There are five beep volume levels including off If the volume is at the loudest level and you press t G7 the beep volume is turned off If you press t Wagain the volume changes to the quietest level 2 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Understanding the Icons You can use the terminal s icons to monitor the status of special keys battery power saving data to flash memory RF and network communications and viewport movement As you use the terminal the icons are turned on and off in the top line of the terminal screen to indicate the current status 242XU 114 f Pica RR 242XU 118 242XU 117 f Nc 42XU 112 242XU 113 242XU 116 242XU 108 Ctrl This icon appears when you press A The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key When you press a second key the key combination is entered into the terminal and the icon disappears Shift This icon appears when you press The key is stored in the keypad buffer until you press another key
276. ned it off or the terminal boots and restarts your application Resume is controlled through the Resume Execution command For help see Resume Execution later in this chapter Power Management Tip You should use the Automatic Shutoff feature to preserve the main battery pack s power Configuration Command Reference Syntax EZdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled always on 02 75 Shutoff time in minutes Default 0 disabled Scan To disable automatic shutoff scan this bar code Disable Automatic Shutoff EZ0 Or To set a timeout 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Automatic Shutoff 4 EZ 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes UM LUE 0 1 ULM LUAM o 43 AMT NUN 4 5 LIE LLL 6 As LUE LL g 9 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode AMT M x 9 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Baud Rate Purpose Sets the baud rate for the serial port on the terminal The baud rate must match the baud rate of the device i e the host computer that the terminal is communicating with through the serial port Syntax IAdata Acceptable values for data are 3 1200 baud 4 2400 baud 5 4800 baud 6 9600 baud 7 19200 baud 8 38400 baud Default 19200 Scan One of these bar codes 1200 Baud 2400 Baud ST AATEC UH ULL LA3 1A4 4800 Baud 9600 Baud AUT AANA UT SAAT ACTS 1A5 1TA
277. nfiguration Stores the current configuration in flash memory including any changes you have made in the menu system When you exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System you will also be prompted to save your changes For help see Exiting the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System later in this chapter Upgrade Firmware Lets you upgrade the system firmware on the terminal For help see Upgrading the Firmware later in this chapter You can use the keystrokes described next to move around in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System or you can scan bar code labels For a list of bar code labels see the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B Selecting Menus and Commands Press A or V to choose a menu name from the Main Menu Then press Q or D to display the commands in the selected menu In this example you press Vv Y to display the System Menu Note In the menu system the 23 Q and D keys all work the same way MAITH MEHU SYSTEM _MENLI File Manager Diagnostics Menu Load Default Values System Menu About TRAKKER 2466 Etore Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item N Select item CEnter Next screen CEnter Next screen CFil Help CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit CEsc Exit 242XU 058 Press A or W to choose a command or option from a menu and then press to execute the command or option Note You can press at any time to display an online help screen Press to exit a help screen 3 9
278. ng A warning alerts you of an operating procedure practice condition or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment Avertissement Un avertissement vous avertit d une proc dure de fonctionnement d une m thode d un tat ou d un rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour viter l occurrence de mort ou de blessures graves aux personnes manupulant l quipement Caution A caution alerts you to an operating procedure practice condition or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction or corruption or loss of data Conseil Une pr caution vous avertit d une proc dure de fonctionnement d une m thode d un tat ou d un rapport qui doit tre strictement respect pour emp cher l endommagement ou la destruction de l quipement ou l alt ration ou la perte de donn es Notes Notes are statements that either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances Before You Begin About This Manual This manual contains all of the information necessary to install configure operate and troubleshoot the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals This manual was written for two audiences e All users who need to know how to use the terminal to collect data e MIS personnel operations personnel analysts and programmers who n
279. ng Serial Communications on the T2420 and 12425 in Chapter 4 You may have a space in the SOM or EOM field The space does not show but it is a valid character To clear a space from the field put the cursor in the field and press t Now set the two character value for SOM or EOM The order in which you scan serial port protocol configuration commands is important The configurable serial protocol CSP uses EOM to determine the serial communications mode When EOM is disabled the terminal communicates in Character mode When EOM is enabled the terminal communicates in Frame mode To use Frame mode you need to set EOM first Next configure Handshake Configuration Commands Via Serial Port LRC SOM and then Poll To use Character mode you need to disable these same parameters in reverse order For help see Using Serial Communications on the T2420 and 12425 in Chapter 4 The two character name syntax of the configuration command that failed is listed on the first line of the error message For example you may see this message SS command failed There may be a problem with the configuration due to a change made with the Scanner Selection SS command Check the command listed in the message To find the command use the Configuration Commands by Syntax table in Appendix A Make sure the command is set correctly for the options and network communications you are using with the terminal For help see Chapter 9
280. ng the Antenna If your antenna on the T2425 is damaged you can replace it To replace the antenna you need these items e 2 4 GHz SMB antenna Part No 063825 e Retaining ring Part No 064101 e Small straight slot screwdriver To replace the antenna 1 Rotate the antenna to line up the alignment marks on the connector end of the antenna with the alignment marks on the T2425 antenna connector 2 Insert the straight slot screwdriver into the retaining ring opening so that the screwdriver is in the retaining ring slot Troubleshooting Removing the Antenna Retaining ring opening Antenna S i must be in this position 242XU 147 Pry the retaining ring up out of the opening and remove it Gently pull the antenna off the antenna connector on the T2425 Line up the alignment marks on the connector end of the antenna with the alignment marks on the terminal antenna connector Retaining ring slot Retaining ring opening Retaining ud 4 ntenna m 9 7 pis pend I pd 242XU 119 6 29 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 6 30 6 Push the new antenna onto the antenna connector until it fits flush and the opening for the retaining ring is visible 7 Insert the retaining ring into the opening Push the retaining ring down until it is locked in place 9 Turn the T2425 over and adjust the angle of the antenna as needed Cleaning the Scan Module Window and Termina
281. nges to this manual The manual was originally released as version 001 Version 002 003 Date July 1997 December 1997 Description of Change This manual was changed to add information about the TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal and to document the new firmware version The new information includes e The TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal and features e RS 232 serial communications on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal e TRAKKER Antares firmware version 2 10 Multiple drives and applications on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals e Western European keypad and character support on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals All the functionality described in this manual applies to TRAKKER Antares terminals with firmware version 1 X and higher However this manual does describe features that are only available in TRAKKER Antares firmware version 2 0 and higher If you have a terminal with firmware version 1 X you should disregard the sections of this manual that discuss the new features listed above This manual was changed to add information about the TCP IP radio frequency network protocol option on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal and to document the new firmware version The new information includes e TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 firmware version 2 20 The TCP IP network protocol option on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal that allows a direct connection from the access points to the host computer
282. nload files T2420 You download applications and files from a host computer to one terminal that is directly connected through the serial port T2425 You download applications and files from the Model 200 Controller UDP Plus or host TCP IP to one or more terminals using the 2 4 GHz RF network You can also download applications and files to one T2425 using the serial port The next table lists specifications and technical information you need to know to develop applications for the T2420 and T2425 terminals Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 TRAKKER Antares Programmable Terminal Specifications Products Serial Communications RF Communications RF Network support RAM Drive E Flash Drive C Extended Drive G option Application Application name Storing applications Developing applications Downloading applications File system TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal RS 232 serial communications via T2420 or T2425 serial port and TRAKKER Antares optical link adapter or TD2400 communications dock 2 4 GHz to 2 4835 GHz radio There are two options e Host connectivity through an access point and Model 200 Controller using UDP Plus protocol e Host connectivity through an access point using TCP IP protocol 256K reserved for user application configurable Approximately 750K for user 12420 option for 2MB or 4MB extended drive Customer defined stor
283. nning in Block mode Character mode devices emulate VT terminals where a character travels all the way from the host to a device and back Block mode devices emulate 3270 or 5250 terminals where entire screens are sent to a device the user fills in all the data fields on the device and sends the entire screen back to the host terminal IP address Identifies the IP address assigned to the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal The IP address you set on the terminal must match the address that is set on the Model 200 Controller or host terminal template A file that contains a menu of screens for data collection devices The template is downloaded to the terminal from the Model 200 Controller or you can use the screen mapping application on the terminal to request the template G 23 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 24 TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol An abbreviated version of FIP that requires limited interaction or instruction Often used by devices without consoles to automate file transfers of configuration data TFTP allows file exchange between the terminal and other network devices Contrast with FTP TFTP server Trivial File Transfer Protocol server A server that uses TFTP for file transfer to and from a remote system or device in situations when FTP may not be available for example to transfer files in a TCP IP direct connect network timeout A defined time allowed for an event after whic
284. nostics Sustem Diagnostics N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit 242XU 050 The Diagnostics Menu contains these commands Software Diagnostics Lets you run software diagnostics to help analyze software problems on the terminal For example you can view the Error Logger file to view system errors Hardware Diagnostics Lets you run hardware diagnostics to help analyze hardware problems on the terminal For example you can check the power remaining and the condition of the batteries System Diagnostics Lets you run system diagnostics to help analyze network system or application problems on the terminal For example you can run diagnostics to check the communications between the T2425 and the access point TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 Press A or V to choose Software Diagnostics Hardware Diagnostics or System Diagnostics and press One of these menus appears SOFTHARE DIAGNOSTICS Application Events Task Status Clear Task Profiles N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help L Ezc1 Exit HARDHARE DIAGNOSTICS Battery Status Display Test Keypad Test Main Board Menu Radio Test Serial Loop Back Scanner Test N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEscl Exit 242XU 065 242XU 067 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS Access Point Euspend Resume Test App Efficiency Serial Port Test Malloc Info Menu N Select item CEnt
285. not hear any beeps during any of these tests you may have a problem with the beeper or internal speakers For help contact your local Intermec service representative Running Diagnostics Destructive RAM Test Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition CAUTION Use the Destructive RAM Test if you have any problems storing files on the RAM drive or running an application that uses RAM memory Choose the Main Board Menu from the Hardware Diagnostics menu DESTRUCTIVE RAM TEXT The following test Memory Test Passed will cause the unit to reboot causing loss of all RAM Pass H 88837 resident data PROCEED Press a key to Reboot Unit FRES V to Proceed CEsel Exit 242XU 143 Before you run this test save your data If you are running a TE application end your current TE session Press v to start the test All data in RAM will be lost The terminal starts the RAM test and clears the screen You hear a beep after a successful test of each 64K block of data After 15 beeps a test pass is complete and the results appear The sample screen shows a successful test pass To run another test pass do not press a key and the next test begins after a 5 second pause You may let the test continue and test the RAM several times to get a test over time To exit the test press once a test pass is complete The terminal reboots and restarts your application If an erro
286. nough within 20 minutes to operate the terminal However the backup battery will only provide limited backup power if it is not fully charged Turning On the Terminal for the First Time Once the batteries are charged you are ready to turn on the terminal Important You must have a scan module attached to turn on the terminal A scan module is installed at the Intermec factory For help see Using the Scan Module in Chapter 2 To turn on the terminal 1 Press the 9 key on the top left of the keypad The terminal runs POST power on self test and then the Boot Menu appears BOOT MENU b Boot Sustem 1 Run Loader gq Power Down POWER DOWN IH 6 SEC 242XU 104 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Note If the Boot Menu screen does not appear you may have a problem with the batteries Make sure the main battery pack is fully charged and installed correctly For help see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Press 5 to boot the terminal and initialize the firmware The TRAKKER Antares screen appears TRAKKER antares MEE VERSION X XX COPYRIGHT 1996 1997 INTERMEC CORPORATION The next screen or messages you see depend on the type of application that is loaded on the terminal T2420 or T2425 Programmable Terminal The sample application screen appears with information about the radio A T2420 does not have a radio see the next illustration and the
287. ns see the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B Use Code 39 full ASCII to enter ASCII control characters or lowercase characters as data You should also enable Code 39 full ASCII to use ASCII command characters For example you encode the data sample in Code 39 full ASCII as follows 4 5 A M P L E In Code 39 non full ASCII this label decodes as S A M P L E In Code 39 full ASCII this label decodes as sample Code 39 mixed full ASCII Use mixed full ASCII when printers encode the same label two different ways For example if you have a bar code with the data a some printers encode the data as follows D E A In the Full ASCII Table in Appendix B D represents and E represents If you configure the terminal for Code 39 full ASCII the terminal decodes the data as a because there are three valid full ASCII character pairs to represent the data Other printers encode the data a as A The and are valid Code 39 characters in the non full ASCII character set However the terminal will not decode this label if it is configured for full ASCII because the data is not represented by valid full ASCII character pairs To decode the label correctly you need to configure the terminal for mixed full ASCII When you configure the terminal for Code 39 mixed full ASCII the terminal will decode both of the labels above as a Mixed full ASCII interprets any valid full ASCII character
288. ns The T2425 uses radio frequency RF to communicate with access points and the Model 200 Controller or host Memory The terminal has a total of IMB RAM for system memory and 2MB flash memory to store firmware configuration data and custom applications Scan modules The terminal ships with a scan module to scan bar code data There are three scan module options a standard range scan module a long range scan module and a module for cabled scanners TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Using the Keypad The TRAKKER Antares terminal has five keypad options English alphanumeric keypad e Western European alphanumeric keypad e IBM 3270 terminal emulation keypad e IBM 5250 terminal emulation keypad e VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation keypad All five alphanumeric keypads have 56 keys Although the keypad is smaller than a desktop terminal keyboard you use special keys on the T2420 and T2425 keypad to access all the keys and functions you need The Western European alphanumeric keypad has keys to support English and Western European languages such as French German Italian Portuguese Spanish and others You use special keys and key sequences to access the characters in each language A terminal emulation TE keypad comes with the TE option you ordered for the T2425 Each TE keypad is similar to the standard alphanumeric keypad but contains additional keys that are available on an IBM 3270 ke
289. ns are now being sent to the controller You can begin collecting data again once the message clears Transaction Aborted The transaction just sent to the controller was not received Try sending the transaction again Transmit Error XX press Enter There is an error transmitting data to the controller XX represents the status code error Note the error code listed in the message and contact your local Intermec service representative for help Press to continue Receive Error XX press Enter There is an error receiving data from the controller XX represents the status code error Note the error code listed in the message and contact your local Intermec service representative for help Press to continue Shutting down The Model 200 Controller is shutting down You may continue collecting data and buffer the transactions in the terminal until the controller starts again or stop collecting data with the terminal Controller Shutdown The Model 200 Controller has shut down You may continue collecting data and buffer the transactions in the terminal until the controller starts again or stop collecting data with the terminal 6 18 Screen Mapping Data Entry Errors Problem Minimum length error This field is required Prefix error Bad Data Validation File Missing Range Error Bad Picture Match Numeric Only Hour Greater Than 23 Minutes Greater Than 59 Seconds Greater Than 59 Days Error M
290. ntroller 5 13 from host in a TCP IP network 4 28 through serial port 5 8 execution space described 2 37 exiting 8 12 EZBuilder developing with 5 6 host computer transferring data 4 12 4 23 to 4 27 Malloc diagnostic screen defined 7 22 network communications verifying 1 29 options described 1 3 A 5 overview downloading and running 5 3 programming specifications 5 4 PSK developing with 5 6 restarting 6 26 8 9 running 5 16 8 17 screen mapping 5 19 starting 1 30 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System using 3 6 to 3 15 troubleshooting screen mapping 6 16 to 6 19 viewport using 2 16 ARP defined 4 35 ASCII bar code chart B 6 to B 10 Code 39 full 9 19 Code 39 mixed full 9 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual ASCII continued Code 39 non full 9 18 control characters definition G 4 list of B 5 postamble and preamble entering 3 11 definition G 4 extended characters configuring 3 11 table of character equivalents B 3 to B 5 audio signals keypad clicks enabling or disabling 9 47 list of 2 20 low battery 2 34 testing 7 12 volume adjusting 2 17 9 13 auto advancing through fields configuring 3 11 Automatic mode configuring the scanner 9 70 Automatic Shutoff command 9 10 managing the battery power 2 35 automatically turning the terminal off 9 10 B backlight configuring the timeout 9 36 definition G 4 key using 2 16 turning on and off 2 16
291. o disabled 255 255 255 0 32 seconds 0 0 0 0 Terminal Specifications A Default Configuration for Serial RS 232 Network Communications Parameter Baud Rate Configuration Commands Via Serial Port Data Bits End of Message EOM Flow Control Handshake LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check Parity Poll Polling Start of Message SOM Stop Bits Timeout Delay Default 19200 Enabled without TMF 7 x03 hexadecimal value for ETX None Disabled Disabled Even Disabled x02 hexadecimal value for STX 1 10 seconds A 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuration Commands by Syntax The next table lists all of the configuration commands that are available on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals The configuration commands are listed in alphabetic order by syntax Syntax Command For Help See Page ADdata Preamble 9 58 AEdata Postamble 9 57 BVdata Beep Volume 9 13 CAdata Interleaved 2 of 5 Code I 2 of 5 9 45 CBdata Code 39 9 18 CCdata Code 2 of 5 2 of 5 9 17 CDdata Codabar 9 14 CEdata UPC EAN 9 85 CFdata Code 93 9 23 CGdata Code 11 9 15 CHdata Code 128 9 24 Cldata Plessey 9 55 CJdata Code 49 9 22 CKdata Code 49 Function Code 1 9 22 CLdata Code 49 Function Code 2 9 22 CMdata Code 49 Function Code 3 9 22 CNdata MSI 9 51 CPdata Code 16K 9 16 CSdata Decode Security 9 34 DAdata Time in Seconds 9 83 DBdata Time and Date 9 82 DCdata Command Processing 9
292. o exit without upgrading the firmware choose No Note If you reach the Loader Waiting screen and cannot upgrade or continue press or 9 to exit without upgrading the firmware The Boot Menu appears Press 8 to boot the terminal and continue 9 On your PC make sure you selected the COM port and Firmware Type and then choose OK The PC downloads the firmware and application Once the download is complete the terminal boots and runs the application Repeat these instructions to upgrade the firmware on another terminal For help with the TRAKKER Antares firmware installation utilities see the README TXT instructions that ship with the utility or use the online help 3 22 Configuring the Terminal 3 Recording Your Terminal s Configuration The tables in this section list all the configuration parameters their options and where to find them in the Configuration Menu of the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System The default setting for each parameter is shown in bold italics You should have an accurate record of the terminal s configuration settings in case the terminal s volatile memory and the configuration setup is lost You can record the configuration on the following pages by circling the option you chose for each parameter or writing the value Bar Code Symbologies Table Parameter Syntax Codabar CD e Start Stop digit Code 11 CG Code 16K CP Code 2 of 5 CC Code 39 CB
293. o transmit the label or scan a regular label A regular bar code label is executed as soon as you scan it If you use a configuration command or the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to disable multiple read labels the terminal processes the bar code label as a regular label and reads and decodes the space as data Not supported Not supported Start Code SP data Stop Code where SP is the ASCII space character and data is the content of the label Multiple Read Bar Code Label A After you scan a multiple read bar code label the accumulated data appears on the bottom line of the terminal screen You can use the Accumulate mode commands such as Backspace or Clear to accumulate data Once you scan a non multiple read label the data is entered Reset Firmware Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Resets all firmware on the terminal resets the application and runs the application You can use the Reset command to restart your application if you are having problems Note You can also try resetting the hardware if your application or terminal is locked up and the terminal will not respond to any other commands For help see Booting and Resetting the Terminal in Chapter 6 Not supported Reset Firmware ox TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Save Configuration in Flash Memory Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Saves the current runtime te
294. o use Characters symbols and functions are printed in four places on or above the keys The keys are also color coded to make it easier to remember key combinations Position on the Keypad Color To Type the Character Middle of the key White Press the key Left side above the key Orange Press the orange _f key then the key Centered above the key Green Press the green J key then the key Right side above the key Blue Press the blue f key then the key To learn how to type characters use these illustrations and examples from the alphanumeric keypad and the IBM 5250 terminal emulation keypad To type characters using the alphanumeric English or Western European keypad EZ To type characters using the IBM 5250 terminal emulation keypad To use the Fid function press t sl us To type the asterisk character press 3 Fld Flid To use the Fld function press 4 ER To type the number 8 press s 242XU 124 To type the character press 5 To type the number 5 press s 8 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 Using the Function Left Right and Shift Keys The TRAKKER Antares keypad does not have a physical key for every character and function available You use the Function Left FnL Function Right FnR and Shift keys to access characters or perform functions that do not have a physical key on the keypad You also use the Shift
295. ode 4to21inches 10 2 to 53 3 cm 20 mil code 4to24inches 10 2 to 61 cm 40 mil code 5to28inches 12 7 to 71 1 cm 55 mil code 6 to 30 inches 15 2 to 76 2 cm 55 mil code retroreflective 2 to 7 feet 61 cm to 2 1m 100 mil code retroreflective 3 to 13 feet 91 4 cm to 3 96 m Long Range Scan Module Optical Parameters The depth of field specifications are Bar Code Specification Depth of Field Scanning Range 10 mil code 12 to 20 inches 30 48 to 50 8 cm 15 mil code 9 to 34 inches 22 86 to 86 36 cm 20 mil code 9 to 39 inches 22 86 to 99 06 cm 40 mil code 10 to 80 inches 25 4 cm to 2 03 m 55 mil code 15 to 90 inches 38 1 cm to 2 29 m 70 inches to 13 5 feet 1 78 to 4 11 m 2 13 m to 5 33m 70 mil code retroreflective 100 mil code retroreflective 7 to 17 5 feet Note See your Intermec sales representative for information about the availability of the long range scan module A 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Input Devices for the Module for Cabled Scanners You can attach these input devices to the module for cabled scanners e Intermec 146X CCD scanners e Intermec 151X 1545 and 155X laser scanners Intermec 126X and 127X wands e JANUS 7010 hand held imager Compatible Symbol scanners with reverse polarity enabled You must use an interface cable to connect the input device to the module For help contact your local Intermec service representative If you are using the J7010 imager you ne
296. odule for cabled scanners or long range scan module is installed on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal The Scanner Selection command also configures the spotting beam when you have a long range scan module on the terminal There are three options e Noaim means the spotting beam is turned off When you press the Scan button the laser scanner starts scanning immediately e Short aim means the spotting beam appears for 400 milliseconds to help you aim the laser scanner before it starts scanning Longaim means the spotting beam appears for 1 second to help you aim the laser scanner before it starts scanning Note See your Intermec sales representative for information about the availability of the long range scan module SSdata Acceptable values for data are All compatible scanners including wands 146x CCD scanners 151x laser scanners 1545 laser scanner Compatible Symbol scanners with reverse polarity enabled 155x laser scanners 11 Integrated standard or long range scan module long range with no aim 12 Integrated long range scan module with short aim 13 Integrated long range scan module with long aim Dor Wr c Note SSO through SS6 work only when a module for cabled scanners is installed on the terminal SS11 through SS13 work only when a long range scan module is installed SS11 configures the standard range scan module All compatible scanners Scan One of these bar codes All Compatible Scanners
297. off the scanner after it stays on for the period of time set For help on configuring the Scanner Mode or Scanner Trigger commands see Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference Note Intermec does not recommend that you use a Scanner Trigger On or Off command with the Scanner Trigger command set to edge triggering Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Purpose Reader Command Reference The Scanner Trigger On command is the same as pushing the Scan button i Not supported Not supported The Scanner Trigger Off command is the same as releasing the Scan button Its effect depends on the Scanner mode and Scanner Trigger mode configuration settings as described earlier From Network Keypad Not supported Scan Not supported Test and Service Mode Purpose Starts the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System From the Main Menu the From Network Keypad Scan Diagnostics Menu is the Test and Service mode you can use to run software hardware and system diagnostics on the terminal For help see Chapter 7 Running Diagnostics Capra Test and Service Mode HE 8 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual File Management Reader Commands Abort Program Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Delete File Purpose From Network Keypad 8 12 The reader commands you can use to manage files and applications are listed in
298. oller or host The default router must have an IP address on the same subnetwork as the terminal The default of 0 0 0 0 means there is no default router Subnet Mask The subnet mask is an internal TCP IP protocol stack variable that is used in IP protocol to identify the subnetwork for an IP address The IP protocol performs a bit wise AND on the IP address and the subnet mask Each address segment represents one byte where 255 converts to FF hex This computation is used to find out if the controller UDP Plus or host TCP IP and terminal are on different subnetworks If the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork than the controller or host then you must set the subnet mask and default router For example if the terminal IP address is 192 9 150 184 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the terminal is on the subnetwork 192 9 150 0 Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Using the Icons to Monitor RF Communications Once you have configured the devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network you can begin using the application on the TRAKKER Antares 2425 to collect and transmit data via RF communications If the T2425 is communicating with your host computer the terminal will connect and begin running the application that shipped on the terminal You can begin using the terminal to collect data As you use the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal to collect data icons are displayed to help you monitor RF and network communications on the terminal Use
299. olume in Chapter 9 The next table explains the purpose of each beep sequence you may hear Beep Sequence Description Low beep You entered a valid command or the data you entered was stored High beep You entered valid data the terminal decoded a label or the terminal decoded the last row of a two dimensional symbology Three low beeps You entered or scanned an invalid command or data Four low beeps When you boot the terminal you hear four low beeps once the power on self test POST has executed successfully Low beep high beep low You hear this beep sequence when POST failed and did beep high beep not execute successfully For help see Problems While Operating the Terminal in Chapter 6 Click When you press a key the terminal sounds a click You can disable the keyclick For help see Keypad Clicker in Chapter 9 The terminal also clicks while you are scanning a two dimensional symbology Code 16K or Code 49 bar code label Low beep every 15 The main battery pack is low You need to replace or seconds recharge the battery pack For help see Learning About the Terminal s Batteries later in this chapter Locating the Serial Port Communications ports also called COM ports are locations from which data can be passed into and out of the TRAKKER Antares terminal You use serial 2 20 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 communications through a COM port which means that data is transmitted over a single
300. ommand CS R c inventry bin c inventry bin For command information see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference or Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference CLIENT CPP is a sample Win95 NT application developed by Intermec to transfer files in a TCP IP direct connect network The source code for the sample utilities CLIENT CPP and UTILS H is shown on the next pages You can create CLIENT CPP and use it by following the next procedure or develop your own application to meet the needs of your host environment To use the sample utility CLIENT CPP 1 Make sure the TFTP server is running on the host and the T2425 is communicating with the host 2 Inthe hosts file on the host add the terminal IP addresses and the target name NCM For example to send files or data to the T2425 with an IP address of 192 9 200 130 add this line to the hosts file 192 9 200 130 ncm Start the application on the host 4 On the host enter the two character TMF code CS Configuration Set request followed by the reader or configuration command For example to send the application INVENTRY BIN from drive C on the host to drive C on the T2425 enter this command CS R c inventry bin c inventry bin For command information see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference or Chapter 9 Configuration Command Reference 4 29 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual CLIENT CPP Sample Application for a TCP IP Direc
301. ommunications Dock See communications dock TE welcome screen 1 15 Telnet definition G 23 temperature batteries checking 7 10 operating and storage range A 4 terminal using in cold areas 6 24 template screen mapping downloading from the controller 5 19 entering data in a screen 5 20 requesting new 5 20 terminal See TRAKKER Antares terminal terminal emulation application options A 5 definition G 23 icons using to monitor 4 19 keypad options 2 4 A 5 manual for xviii network communications verifying 1 29 session problems establishing 6 14 starting 1 30 TE welcome screen 1 15 viewport using 2 16 See also TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide terminal IP address configuration command 9 80 1 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual configuring 1 26 defined 4 17 G 23 terminal screen See screen terminal template definition G 23 terminology defined xviii Test and Service Mode reader command 8 11 TFTP defined 4 33 to 4 35 G 24 server using 4 28 time and date configuration command 9 82 configuring 1 16 defined 4 17 Time in Seconds command 9 83 timeout display backlight configuring 9 36 scanner configuring 9 74 Timeout Delay command 9 84 TMF protocol defined 4 33 to 4 35 fields defined 4 13 4 25 4 26 T2425 remotely configuring 4 23 to 4 27 token ring definition G 24 TPL file requesting a template 5 21 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu Syst
302. on marks are not treated as the end of the data 9 59 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual RAM Drive Size Purpose Configures the size and use of the RAM drive E You can disable the RAM drive and use the additional 256K for programmable Malloc memory allocations or configure the RAM drive to temporarily store data and files Important After you set the RAM drive you must save the configuration in flash memory and boot the terminal for the change to take effect Note When you boot or reset the terminal all files on the RAM drive are destroyed Syntax FRdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled no RAM drive 16 256 RAM drive size in kilobytes K Default 0 Scan To disable the RAM drive scan this bar code Disable RAM Drive FRO Or To set the RAM drive size 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set RAM Drive Size FR 2 Scan a numeric value for data from these bar codes 0 3 4 5 9 60 Configuration Command Reference 6 px g Q 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode AIM x 4 Scan this bar code to save the configuration change in flash memory Save Configuration in Flash Memory 41 5 Scanthis bar code to boot the terminal and use the RAM drive Reset Firmware _ 9 61 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Resume Execution Purpose Syntax Defau
303. onfigure the TRAKKER Antares terminal xvii TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual xviii What You Will Find in This Manual continued Chapter What You Will Find A Lists the TRAKKER Antares terminal s specifications configuration command names and syntax and the terminal s default configuration settings B Contains reference tables including the full ASCII table and full ASCII bar code chart C Contains a reference table that lists the complete set of English and Western European characters that you can display on a TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal Note For information about using IBM 3270 IBM 5250 or VT 100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation applications see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide that ships with this manual Terminology You should be aware of how these terms are being used in this manual Term Host 12420 T2425 Terminal TRAKKER Antares terminal TRAKKER Antares Description The term host refers to a personal computer or other computer that communicates with the terminal The term T2420 indicates the specific type of terminal the TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal The term T2425 indicates the specific type of terminal the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal The generic term terminal indicates any TRAKKER Antares terminal More specific terms such as TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal or T2420 indicate a sp
304. onfiguring 9 53 RF domain configuring 9 63 RF security ID configuring 9 66 subnet mask configuring 9 77 terminal IP address configuring 9 80 troubleshooting 1 29 6 13 6 15 definition G 16 equipment required for 2 4 GHz 4 15 illustrated 4 4 to 4 8 installing overview 1 22 4 14 interface card definition G 16 node definition G 16 protocols defined 4 33 to 4 35 RF parameters default values 1 23 defined 4 17 specifications A 6 TCP IP direct connect defined 1 22 UDP Plus defined 1 22 network activate configuration command 9 52 configuring 1 25 defined 4 17 enabled verifying 1 29 Network Loopback command 9 52 Network Port command 9 53 configuring 1 27 defined 4 18 new features and firmware 1 34 NIC See network interface card I 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual NiCad backup battery See backup battery non full ASCII Code 39 9 18 notes defined xvi null modem cable definition G 16 numbers bar code labels to scan B 8 0 One Shot mode configuring the scanner 9 70 operating the terminal configuration commands list of 3 28 9 4 A 9 using 9 3 configuration options described 3 5 external power supply using 2 36 humidity range A 4 network communications verifying 1 29 reader commands enabling or disabling 9 25 to 9 28 using 8 3 8 7 temperature range A 4 troubleshooting 6 5 to 6 8 optical link adapter charging batteries 2 27 c
305. onnecting and using 4 10 copy files using to 5 8 power supply using 2 36 terminal accessory 1 4 upgrading the firmware using to 3 21 optical parameters long range scan module A 7 standard range scan module A 7 options and models described 1 5 orange keys using 2 6 ordering replacement parts 6 28 OSI model definition G 17 network protocols defining 4 33 to 4 35 P packet definition G 17 parameters overview for configuration 3 3 Parity command 9 55 pass through network 1 23 4 15 PDF 417 definition G 17 using A 6 peer to peer network definition G 17 physical specifications A 3 to A 8 PIC definition G 18 pixel definition G 18 Plessey command 9 55 Poll command 9 56 Polling Mode D protocol similarity 4 11 port definition G 18 I 12 Portuguese See European languages POST definition G 18 failed error message 6 7 postamble ASCII control characters entering 3 11 definition G 18 Field Exit configuring to auto advance 3 11 Postamble command 9 57 power management automatic shutoff using 9 10 backup battery using 2 28 battery capacity remaining 2 34 7 11 battery pack using 2 22 guidelines for 2 35 6 23 low Battery icon 2 19 2 34 resume suspend and boot 9 62 RF Wakeup On Broadcast disabling 9 69 power supply using 2 36 power battery specifications A 4 preamble ASCII control characters entering 3 11 definition G 18 Field Exit configuring to auto advance 3 11
306. ons for accomplishing a particular task is referred to as a program Contrast with firmware SOM Start of Message character The first character in messages sent to or received from the host spread spectrum A radio data transmission modulation technique by which the transmitted signal is spread over a bandwidth wider than the information bandwidth start stop code or character A special bar code character that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions as well as a scanning direction indicator The start character is normally at the left hand end of a horizontally oriented symbol bar code label The stop character is normally at the right hand end of a horizontally oriented symbol For Code 39 the asterisk character is used stop bits A bit that signals the end of a character One of the serial communications parameters store and forward A method where messages are temporarily stored in the Model 200 Controller before they are transmitted to their destination It is used when the upline network or host application is temporarily stopped subnet mask An internal TCP IP protocol stack variable This mask is used in the IP protocol to separate the subnet address from the local IP address The IP protocol performs a bit wise AND on the IP address and the subnet mask Each address segment represents one byte where 255 converts to FF hex This computation is used to find out if the Model 200 Controller or hos
307. onth Error Year Error Input Length Error Troubleshooting Solution You entered too few characters in the field Enter your data again using the required number of characters You cannot skip a required field Enter data in the field to continue The prefix character entered is incorrect Enter your data again using a valid prefix The data entered did not pass the input test defined for this field Enter your data again The validation file used for the screen is not stored on the terminal You can download the validation file from the Model 200 Controller or request the file from the terminal For help see Loading a Validation File in Chapter 5 The data entered is out of the range defined for this field Enter your data again The data entered does not match the picture defined for this input field Enter your data again The data entered was not numeric and this is a numeric field Enter your data again using only numeric data You are entering data in a Time field and entered an invalid hour Enter the time again using an hour from 0 to 23 You are entering data in a Time field and entered invalid minutes Enter the time again using minutes from 0 to 59 You are entering data in a Time field and entered invalid seconds Enter the time again using seconds from 0 to 59 You are entering data in a Date field and entered an invalid day Enter the date again using a valid day for the month You are ente
308. ontroller IP Address In a TCP IP network you set the Host IP Address In the Controller IP Address or the Host IP Address field type in the IP address for the Model 200 Controller or host in your network The address field consists of four separate numbers Each number in the field is separated by a period and can be a number from 0 to 255 Type the address in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn and then press W 1 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 1 26 10 For example if your controller or host IP address is 192 100 100 2 type 1j 9j 2 11 0J ojl 1 ojl Oj 2 Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 In the Terminal IP Address field type in the terminal s IP address The IP address must match the address that is set for the terminal on the controller or host The address field consists of four separate numbers Each number in the field is separated by a period and can be a number from 0 to 255 Type the address in the format nnn nnn nnn nnn and then press W For example if your terminal IP address is 192 100 100 3 type 1 9j 2 1 oj 0 1 ojl oll 3 Note The network cannot be activated if the first address segment in
309. ooting the terminal EEE no CANCEL 242XU 054 19 Press to choose OK and exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Exiting TRAKKER Antares 2460 Menu System OK CANCEL 242XU 055 The T2425 will try to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller or the host For terminal emulation applications in a UDP Plus network you need to configure the host name in the TE Configuration menu to establish communications For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Once the terminal connects the login or initial screen for your application appears and the Connect icon stops blinking You can begin using the terminal to collect data Note While the terminal is connecting to the controller or host the terminal ignores any input from the keypad or scanner Wait until the terminal is connected before you try to enter any data If the terminal will not connect see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting or the Model 200 Controller System Manual 1 28 Getting Started 1 Verifying That the T2425 Is Communicating Correctly Once you have configured the terminal your T2425 is ready for operation To transmit and receive data the T2425 must be communicating with the access point and Model 200 Controller or host Use these instructions to make sure the T2425 is communicating correctly To verify that the T2425 is communicating
310. or CCD scanner for bar code data collection Optical Link Adapter When the optical link adapter is connected to the terminal it allows the terminal to communicate with a host computer or other device through the serial port You can also connect a power supply to the optical link adapter to charge the batteries Standard Range Scan Module The standard range laser scan module is an integrated scanner that lets you scan bar code labels from up to 30 inches away depending on the bar code height and density Getting Started f Long Range Scan Module The long range laser scan module is an integrated scanner that lets you scan bar code labels from up to 20 feet away depending on the bar code height and density Note See your Intermec sales representative for information about the availability of the long range scan module Vehicle Mount Holder You can attach this holder to a vehicle such as a forklift so that you can securely store the terminal while the vehicle is moving Note You also need a lithium ion battery pack See your Intermec sales representative for the battery packs that are currently available Models and Options for the TRAKKER Antares Terminals The TRAKKER Antares family of terminals includes these models T2420 The T2420 is a programmable data collection terminal that has 512K of RAM reserved for custom applications The terminal has a 750K flash drive to store applications and files The T2420 has a serial po
311. ore the file You must include the colon after the drive letter tofilename is the name of the file you want to save on the T2425 Not supported 1 Scan this bar code label Enter Accumulate Mode Receive File E JoR 2 Scan the bar code label s for the file you want to receive You can scan labels from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The label must use this format fromfilename drive tofilename 3 Scanthis bar code label to exit Accumulate mode and receive the file Exit Accumulate Mode a You can create your own bar code labels to receive files by creating a bar code in this command format SR fromfilename drive tofilename To receive the file SHIPPING BIN on the terminal s drive C use this command SR shipping bin c shipping bin 8 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Rename File Purpose From Network Keypad Scan Example 8 16 Renames a file stored on the terminal drive oldfilename drive newfilename where is the command to rename a file drive indicates the drive where the oldfilename is stored You must include the colon after the drive letter oldfilename is the name of the file you want to rename drive indicates the drive where the newfilename is stored You must include the colon after the drive letter The drive letter MUST match the drive letter you entered for the o
312. ou need to connect and configure the terminal The next sections cover these topics Identifying the COM Ports e Connecting the Terminal to Another Device e Configuring and Using Serial Communications e Configuring the Terminal Via the Serial Port Identifying the COM Ports Communications ports also called COM ports are locations from which data can be passed into and out of the terminal The illustration identifies the COM ports on the terminal The next table explains the COM port designations to use when developing client server applications RF NET port serial port Port COM Port Designation for Applications COMI Use for serial port communications on the T2420 and T2425 RF NET Use for RF communications on the T2425 The TRAKKER Antares PSK functions use NET to designate the RF network port TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 10 Connecting the Terminal to Another Device You can physically connect the T2420 or T2425 to another device using one of the accessories described next TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock Connect the communications dock to a device host computer printer or other serial device using an RS 232 null modem serial cable Part No 047569 or 059167 Connect the power supply to the dock Insert the terminal in the dock You can transfer data between the terminal and the device connected to the dock For help see the TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communicat
313. out the Terminal s Batteries 2 22 Main Battery Pack 2 22 Removing and Installing the Main Battery Pack 2 22 Charging the Main Battery Pack 2 27 Backup Battery 2 28 Charging the Backup Battery 2 28 Removing and Installing the Backup Battery 2 29 Disposing of the NiCad Backup Battery 2 33 Checking the Power Remaining in the Batteries 2 34 Recognizing a Low or Discharged Battery 2 34 Managing Your Battery Power 2 35 Using an External Power Supply 2 36 Defining the Terminal s Memory and Drives 2 37 Using the Scan Module 2 38 Installing a Scan Module 2 39 Using the Standard Range Scan Module 2 40 Scanning Options 2 42 Contents Configuring the Terminal How to Configure the Terminal 3 3 Learning About Configuration Parameters 3 3 Choosing the Symbologies the Terminal Decodes 3 4 Specifying How the Terminal Will Communicate 3 4 Controlling How the Terminal Will Operate 3 5 Configuring the Terminal With the Menu System 3 6 Exploring the Configuration and System Menus 3 8 Selecting Menus and Commands 3 9 Filling In Fields and Marking Check Boxes 3 10 Entering ASCII Control Characters 3 11 Exiting Screens and Saving Changes 3 13 Exiting the Configuration Menu 3 13 Exiting the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System 3 14 Configuring the Terminal by Scanning Bar Codes 3 15 Saving Configuration Changes in Flash Memory 3 17 Restoring the Terminal s Default Configuration 3 19 Upgrading the Firmware 3 20 Recording Your Terminal s Configura
314. pairs that appear in the label but does not require that all data be encoded with a valid full ASCII character pair If you are uncertain how your labels are encoded configure the terminal for mixed full ASCII which decodes all valid Code 39 labels If you configure the terminal for Code 39 full ASCII you should check for Code 39 mixed full ASCII Mixed full ASCII does not apply when you configure the terminal for non full ASCII 9 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 39 continued 9 20 Syntax Default Scan Note The interpretive text shown under bar code labels does not always accurately reflect the data that is encoded in the label The interpretive text represents how the label should be decoded Use this table to help configure your terminal Code 39 Option Non full ASCII Full ASCII Mixed full ASCII CBdata Bar Code Label Decodes 96 A 96 A D E A D E A A No decode D E A a A a D E A a Acceptable values for data must be three digits corresponding to First digit 0 1 2 3 4 Second digit 0 1 Third digit 0 1 2 Disabled Enabled with no check digit Enabled with check digit HIBC Health Industry Bar Code With AIAG check digit Discard check digit Transmit check digit Code 39 non full ASCII Code 39 full ASCII Code 39 mixed full ASCII Note Selecting HIBC Code 39 automatically sets the configuration to non full ASCII wit
315. pplication is named SHIPPING EXE and the Intermec directory is on drive C type this command on your PC c intermec imt24 lib exe2abs shipping exe The conversion application creates the SHIPPING BIN file 3 If you have a T2425 and plan to download applications and files from the Model 200 Controller or host via the 2 4 GHz RF network copy all the binary application files and any data files to a 3 5 inch disk Using the Serial Port to Transfer Applications and Files You can download or upload applications and files between a PC or host computer and the T2420 or the T2425 using serial communications You connect the terminal s serial port to the host by using one of these accessories e TD2400 communications dock e Optical link adapter For help connecting the terminal see Chapter 1 Getting Started Once the terminal is connected you can transfer files to or from a terminal There are two ways to transfer files Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 e Use the FileCopy utility that ships with the TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit PSK and EZBuilder e Use the Receive File or Transmit File reader commands For help see Chapter 8 Reader Command Reference The instructions in this section explain how to use the FileCopy utility to download or upload applications and files to or from the terminal To run an application on the terminal it must be stored as an executable binary file BIN The FileCopy ut
316. pplications and Screen Mapping TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Terminal Dimensions Length 10 6 in 26 9 cm Height 2 8 in 7 1 cm at scan module 2 3 in 5 8 cm at grip Width 32 in 8 1 cm at scan module 2 5 in 6 35 cm at grip Weight T2420 22 oz 623 7 g T2425 27 oz 765 45 g Note The weight includes the main battery pack and the backup battery Power Specifications Operating Rechargeable lithium ion 1350 mAh battery pack Memory Backup Rechargeable NiCad 110 mAh battery Electrical Specifications Models 12420 and 12425 Electrical rating 7 2V 500mA Temperature Specifications You need to operate and store the terminal within the temperature ranges listed in this table Note For information about using the terminal in cold temperature environments see Guidelines for Managing Batteries in Chapter 6 Fahrenheit Celsius Type of Operation Temperature Range Temperature Range Charging the battery pack 32 F to 104 F 0 C to 40 C Operating the terminal 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C Storing the terminal 4 F to 140 F 20 C to 60 C with or without batteries installed Relative Humidity Specifications 0 to 95 noncondensing humidity Terminal Specifications Screen CGA compatible 16 lines x 20 columns 128 x 160 dot matrix backlit LCD 25 lines by 80 columns virtual display with viewport feature Keypad Options Full alphanumeric keypad with 56 key
317. pted wireless access at any location within the building This manual assumes that a site survey is complete and the access points are installed in your facility You need to work with your network administrator to plan and assign the IP address for each device in the 2 4 GHz RF network You must assign and set the IP address for each access point and each TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal For a T2425 with UDP Plus you must also assign an IP address to the Model 200 Controller Configuring the Model 200 Controller The Model 200 Controller supports and manages communications with other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network When you install and configure the controller you identify the host computer s and TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals in your network The terminals communicate through the controller with your host by using UDP Plus protocol For help installing the controller see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Part No 063439 Note You can use a T2425 running UDP Plus protocol and the Model 200 Controller in a pass through network You establish a direct TCP IP socket connection from the T2425 to the host through the controller For more information see the Model 200 Controller System Manual To have the T2425 communicate with the controller you must configure these parameters on the controller e Configure the UDP Plus network e Assign an IP address to each T2425 e Enable all T2425 terminals e Define the host environment p
318. ptions S511 through 5813 However since these commands configure the spotting beam for a long range scan module they do not change how the standard range scan module works T2425 Will Not Communicate With RF Network Devices If you cannot get the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal to communicate with other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network check these possible problems Problem The Radio icon on the terminal screen remains on The Connect icon is not lit on the terminal screen The T2425 is not communicating with the access point Solution Either the Network Activate command is disabled or there is a problem with the radio card and it is turned off Make sure the Network Activate command is enabled Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System or scan the Network Activate command to enable the 2 4 GHz RF network and turn on the radio For help see Network Activate in Chapter 9 If the network is enabled and the Radio icon remains on there may be a problem with the radio card For help contact your local Intermec service representative The 12425 is not connected to the access point Make sure the access point is turned on and operating You may also be using the terminal out of the RF range of an access point Try moving closer to an access point to re establish communications In a TCP IP direct connect network you cannot scan or enter data when the T2425 is not communicating with an access point or you may lose your TCP s
319. que network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The IP address you set on the T2425 must match the address that is set on the controller or host computer Syntax NDn n n n where each n address segment is a number from 0 to 255 The terminal IP address field consists of four separate numbers each separated by a period Note The RF network cannot be activated if the first address segment in the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 Default 0 0 0 0 Scan To set the default terminal IP address scan this bar code Default Terminal IP Address 4 ND0 0 0 0 Or To set the terminal IP address 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Terminal IP Address 4 4 ND 9 80 Configuration Command Reference 2 Scana numeric value from 0 to 255 to set an n field of the terminal IP address from these bar codes LL LUE 0 ANTM ANAT 43 AMT ANAT A 5 LL AMT 6 47 ATA AMI TA Qe 9 3 Scan this bar code Period 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to set the next two numbers in the terminal IP address field After you scan the last address segment go to Step 5 Do not scan the period after the last address segment 5 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode AMM M A 9 81 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Time and Date 9 82 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Sets the time and date on the ter
320. r T2425 ships loaded with either the sample application a terminal emulation application or the screen mapping application To start the application and use the terminal 1 Press 9 to turn on the terminal The login or initial screen for your application appears 2 Check the four application screens shown next in the left column Find the application screen that matches the one on your terminal Follow the instructions on the right of the screen to use the T2420 or T2425 Sample Application Screen 97 61 08 68 16 58 242XU 167 3270 5250 TE Sign On Screen USO ccc te ee ee Fassword Program procedure Men srzsekakmkuE wx Current Library Mi ire 242XU 166 VT ANSI TE Login Screen 242XU 163 1 30 Use the sample application to scan bar code labels and test the T2420 or T2425 keypad Connect the T2420 to a host computer using the TD2400 communications dock or the optical link adapter For help see the accessory documentation Download your data collection application to the T2420 or 12425 and run it For help see Chapter 5 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping Configure the terminal emulation application if necessary For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Login to a terminal emulation session Start using the T2425 to collect and transmit data Configure the terminal emulation application i
321. r and press The File Manager screen appears prompting you to select a drive FILE MANAGER Select drive DK CANCEL 242XU 025 5 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 Press to select drive C or type in the letter of the drive you want to manage and then press The File Manager screen appears listing all the files stored on the drive FILE MANAGER C APPTERK BIN 86144 C UTTCP D BIH 196K C TEANT CFG Baz74 86572654 Bytes Free CEnter Run App CF71 Rename CDELI Delete CF11 Help Esc Exit 242XU 179 5 Press W or A to choose an application and then press The terminal boots resets all firmware and runs the application If you also made configuration changes while you were working in the menu system you will be prompted to store your changes in flash memory Once you save or discard the changes the terminal boots resets all firmware and runs the application Note You can press t to rename a file or 1 to delete a file You can begin using the application to collect data Repeat the instructions in this section to run another application on the terminal If you have problems running an application see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 5 18 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 Using Screen Mapping You can use screen mapping to send screen transactions from a TRAKKER Antar
322. r is found the Destructive RAM Test stops and displays the error address the data written to RAM and the data read from RAM Note this information and contact your local Intermec service representative Caution If the Destructive RAM Test fails stop using the terminal Contact your local Intermec service representative Conseil Si le test Destructive RAM choue veuillez ne plus utiliser le terminal Contactez le repr sentant du service client le Intermec de votre r gion 7 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Display Test Where Available Purpose Sample Screen 7 14 Definition Use the Display Test to make sure that every pixel on the terminal screen is working correctly For example you may want to test the screen if you do not see complete characters on the screen Hardware Diagnostics menu DISPLAY TEST CEnter Next pattern L Esc1 Exit 242XU 135 Press to display each of the four patterns After 5 seconds the entire screen is filled with the current test pattern Press to display the next pattern The first two patterns appear as a shaded pattern and turn off every other pixel The third pattern turns on every pixel and appears as a black square The fourth pattern turns off every pixel and appears as a clear square If any of these patterns do not display correctly you may have a problem with the LCD For help contact your local Intermec service represen
323. r memory backup e Adjustable antenna on the T2425 supports 2 4 GHz radio frequency communications TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Accessories for the Terminal You can use these accessories sold and ordered separately with the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals TZ2400 Battery Charger The charger lets you charge up to four lithium ion battery packs at one time The battery charger senses when a battery pack is fully charged and will not overcharge it ensuring long and consistent battery pack life Belt Clip The belt clip lets you attach the terminal to your belt and have it hang at your side so you can have both hands free The belt clip snaps around your belt and a Velcro strap holds the terminal to the belt clip TD2400 Communications Dock When you place the terminal in the dock it allows the terminal to communicate with a host computer or other device through the serial port You must connect a power supply to the dock to operate the terminal and charge the batteries Handstrap The elastic handstrap attaches to the back of the terminal to let you hold the terminal easily and securely for long periods of use Holster The holster is a convenient way for you to carry the terminal on your belt when you are not using it The holster attaches to your belt and holds the terminal at your side Module for Cabled Scanners This module has a scanner port that lets you attach a wand laser scanner
324. radio is not initially enabled on the T2425 96 61 61 12 06 66 Ho Radio in Systen 242XU 176 T2425 With Terminal Emulation Application A warning screen about creating a TE configuration file may appear Press to create the file and continue A terminal emulation application welcome screen appears similar to the examples shown next Getting Started 1 Terminal Emulation Application Welcome Screens Intermec Intermec TRAKKER Antares TRAKKER Antares UT ANEI 32708 Terminal Terminal Emulation Emulation Version 64 1 Version 64 1 242XU 070 Note At the TE welcome screen you can press zt to access the TE Configuration Menu and configure your terminal emulation application For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Next the T2425 tries to connect to the Model 200 Controller or the host in a TCP IP direct connect network You will see messages like Waiting for Unable to connection to establish connection controller to host Since you have not configured the RF network parameters the T2425 cannot start a terminal emulation session T2425 Screen Mapping Terminal A welcome screen appears briefly and then the File name screen appears You need to configure the RF network parameters so you can download a template from the Model 200 Controller File name 242XU 060 3 Configure the terminal now Follow the instructions in the next section Setting the
325. res start with the next section About the TRAKKER Antares Programmable Terminals Use the serial port to download applications and files to the T2420 or T2425 1 Create your applications using the TRAKKER Antares Programmer s Software Kit PSK or EZBuilder For help see page 5 6 Convert each application to a binary file using the PSK utility EXE2ABS EXE For help see page 5 8 Or use the EZBuilder option to convert each application to a binary file Connect the T2420 or T2425 to the development PC or host computer using the optical link adapter or TD2400 communications dock For help see Chapter 1 Getting Started or your accessory documentation Use the FileCopy utility to download applications and files to the T2420 or 12425 For help see page 5 8 Use the System Menu in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to load and run an application For help see page 5 16 Use the Model 200 Controller to download applications and files to the T2425 1 Create your applications using the TRAKKER Antares PSK or EZBuilder For help see page 5 6 Convert each application to a binary file using the PSK utility EXE2ABS EXE For help see page 5 8 Or use the EZBuilder option to convert each application to a binary file Copy the applications and files to the Model 200 Controller For help see page 5 12 Use the Download Server feature on the Model 200 Controller to download applications and files to the T2425 For help see
326. res UDP Plus 067119S Order this kit for T2420s and for T2425s that communicate with a Model 200 Controller in a UDP Plus network To order a firmware upgrade kit contact your local Intermec service representative The kit comes with a utility and instructions to upgrade the firmware on the terminal Once you upgrade to the new firmware you can use all the features described in this manual 1 35 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Where Do You Go From Here Now that your new TRAKKER Antares terminal is up and running you can use this manual to learn how to perform these tasks 1 36 Task or Feature To learn how to use the terminal s keypad screen audio signals batteries and scan module To learn how to change the terminal s configuration To add the terminal to your 2 4 GHz RF or wired data collection system and learn how to communicate with other devices To learn how to download and run custom applications or screen mapping on your programmable terminal To learn how to reset the terminal solve problems and respond to error messages To learn how to run diagnostics and check the battery power remaining See This Chapter Chapter 2 Learning How to Use the Terminal Chapter 3 Configuring the Terminal Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Chapter 5 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Running Diagnostic
327. ress that allows a device to communicate with IBM hosts in a 3270 network NEG Negative Acknowledge character See handshake network A collection of devices that can store and manipulate electronic data interconnected in such a way that their users can store retrieve and share information with each other network administrator The person who is responsible for the installation management and control of a network network interface card NIC An adapter card that is installed in the Model 200 Controller that allows it to connect to a network for example Ethernet token ring twinaxial The card contains both the hardware to accommodate the cables and the software to use the network s protocols The NIC is also called a network adapter card network node An end point in a network to which or from which data can be routed Usually this is a workstation or host computer NiCad backup battery The terminal contains a rechargeable NiCad backup battery that is designed to back up all memory and the real time clock while you change the lithium ion main battery pack The NiCad battery will provide backup battery power for a maximum of 1 month if a fully charged main battery pack is installed or for a maximum of 3 days if a main battery pack is not installed null modem cable A cable that connects two computers and allows transmission of data between them without requiring a modem Glossary G number pad A set of keys on the
328. reted as a command Enable Override 2 DC3 If the Network Activate command is enabled 2 4 GHz RF network enabled and you are configuring the T2425 these addresses must define a valid network configuration For example an invalid network configuration would be a controller or host IP address set to 0 0 0 0 with the network enabled To set these four parameters follow these steps 1 Disable the Network Activate NA configuration command 2 Set the terminal IP address and the controller IP address or the host IP address for a TCP IP network 3 Set the default router address if necessary 4 Enable the Network Activate command You can change an IP address with the network enabled as long as it still defines a valid network configuration Troubleshooting Problems While Configuring the Terminal continued Problem You scan or enter an option for the Scanner Selection configuration command and you hear three low beeps Solution You may have scanned or entered a Scanner Selection command that does not apply to the type of scan module you have installed Options SSO through S56 only configure the module for cabled scanners when installed Options S511 through S513 only configure the long range scan module when installed Try scanning or entering the Scanner Selection command again and select an option the type of module you have installed If you have a standard range scan module you can scan o
329. ring data in a Date field and entered an invalid month Enter the date again with a valid month from 1 to 12 You are entering data in a Date field and entered an invalid year Enter the date again with a valid year The data entered exceeded the length defined for this field Enter your data again 6 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Bar Code Labels Will Not Scan If you cannot scan bar code labels or you are having problems with the scan module check these possible problems Problem A scan module is not installed The terminal is turned off You cannot see a red beam of light from the integrated scan module when you press the Scan button and aim the scanner at a bar code label WARNING An input device is not attached to the module for cabled scanners The integrated scan module does not read the bar code labels quickly or the scanning beam seems to be faint or obscured 6 20 Solution Make sure a scan module is installed correctly You must install a module for cabled scanners a standard range scan module or a long range scan module before you can use the terminal Make sure the terminal is turned on Press 9 to turn on the terminal There are two possible problems You may be too far away from the bar code label Try moving closer to the bar code label and scan it again You may be scanning the bar code label straight on Try changing the scanning angle unt
330. rk as shown in the illustration above The T2425 terminals may only communicate with the access points that are in the same IP subnetwork All the terminals and access points in this illustration communicate with the host at IP address 192 9 175 7 using TCP IP for the RF protocol 4 7 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 8 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminals Communicating Across Subnetworks UDP Plus Model 200 Controller 192 9 200 5 192 9 175 X subnetwork 192 9 200 X subnetwork Router Ethernet 192 9 175 1 TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals 192 9 175 9 192 9 175 10 192 9 175 11 242XU 092 You can install the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals and access points in one IP subnetwork and install the Model 200 Controller in another IP subnetwork as shown in the illustration In this network you must configure additional network parameters default router and subnet mask as described later in this chapter Note All access points that the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal may communicate with and roam between must be on the same IP subnetwork The terminal cannot roam between IP subnetworks Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 Using Serial Communications on the T2420 and T2425 The TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals have a serial port to transfer data to and from another device via RS 232 serial communications Before you can use the serial port y
331. rminal User s Manual A 14 Configuration Commands by Syntax continued Syntax RBdata RNdata RRdata RSdata RTdata RWdata RYdata SAdata SBdata SCdata SDdata SRdata SSdata Command RF Wakeup On Broadcast RF Security ID Override RF Roaming Flag RF Security Identification RF Transmit Mode RF Domain RF Inactivity Timeout Scanner Timeout Scanner Mode Scanner Trigger Scan Ahead Scanner Redundancy Scanner Selection For Help See Page 9 69 9 67 9 65 9 66 9 68 9 63 9 64 9 74 9 70 9 75 9 69 9 7 9 72 Full ASCII Charts Full ASCII Charts This appendix contains a full ASCII chart and charts of Code 39 bar code labels that you can scan with the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals Full ASCII Table This table lists the ASCII characters and their binary hexadecimal and Code 39 equivalents Full ASCII Table Binary Hex Decimal Code39 ASCII Binary Hex Decimal Code39 ASCII 00000000 00 00 U NUL 00100000 20 32 SP Sp 00000001 01 01 A SOH 00100001 21 33 A 00000010 02 02 B STX 00100010 22 34 B 00000011 03 03 C ETX 00100011 23 35 C 00000100 04 04 D EOT 00100100 24 36 D 00000101 05 05 E ENQ 00100101 25 37 E 00000110 06 06 F ACK 00100110 26 38 F amp 00000111 07 07 G BEL 00100111 27 39 G 00001000 08 08 H BS 00101000 28 40 H 00001001 09 09 I HT 00101001 29 41 1 00001010 0A 10 J LE 00101010 2A 42 J ii 00001011 OB 11 K VT 00101011 2B 43 K t 00001100 0C 12
332. rminal configuration in flash memory If you configure the terminal by scanning bar code labels or commands sent from a network device your configuration changes are only saved in RAM You can use this reader command to save the changes to flash memory so that they are set the next time you boot or reset the terminal etl In the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System choose System Menu and then choose Store Configuration Save Configuration in Flash Memory TIS Scanner Trigger On and Off 8 10 The Scanner Trigger On and Off commands are the same as pushing and releasing the Scan button on the keypad The Scan button and scanner trigger commands control the integrated scanner on a laser scan module Note The Scanner Trigger On and Off commands do not activate the scanner device connected to the module for cabled scanners After a Scanner Trigger On command the scanner operates differently depending on the Scanner mode and scanner trigger configuration settings e Ifyou configure the terminal to use One Shot Scanner mode and level triggering the scanner automatically turns off after a good read of a bar code label or after the scanner timeout period elapses e Ifyou configure the terminal to use Automatic Scanner mode and level triggering the scanner remains on after a good read of a bar code label You can use the Scanner Trigger Off command to turn off the scanner or set the Scanner Timeout command to automatically turn
333. rminal until it fits and locks into the connectors inside the bottom case The battery pack must be all of the way forward to close the battery door 2 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Installing the Battery Pack 242XU 102 5 Ifyouare using an Intermec labeled battery pack Part No 063278 make sure you remove the rubber bumper from the inside of the battery door Otherwise you will not be able to close the door If you are using a Sony labeled battery pack make sure the rubber bumper is installed over the ridge near the wall on the inside of the battery door The rubber bumper on the battery door keeps the battery pack in place Rubber bumper 2 26 Learning How to Use the Terminal 2 6 Hook the bottom edge of the battery door into the bottom case above the backup battery compartment Push the door down to close it over the battery compartment Push the battery door latch down and slide it toward the top end of the terminal to lock the door in place ox Battery door gt latch EN LE So Du AN 242XU 088 Charging the Main Battery Pack You can recharge the main battery pack using any of these TRAKKER Antares accessories e Battery charger e TD2400 communications dock connected to an external power supply e Optical link adapter connected to an external power supply The fastest way to charge the battery pack is to use the battery charger The charger uses a charging
334. rn on you may have a problem with the scan module or the laser scanner attached to the module for cabled scanners If you are using a module for cabled scanners make sure you are using a laser scanner that is supported on the terminal Also check to make sure the laser scanner is attached to the module for cabled scanners If the laser scanner did turn on in the first test try scanning a bar code label To scan a label press the Scan button on the terminal or pull the trigger on a laser scanner attached to the module for cabled scanners If the laser scanner turns on the Scan button or laser scanner trigger is working correctly If the laser scanner does not turn on you may have a problem with the Scan button on the terminal or the laser scanner trigger on the attached laser scanner For help with scanner problems contact your local Intermec service representative Serial Loopback Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition Running Diagnostics Use the Serial Port Loopback test to verify that the hardware for the RS 232 serial port is functioning correctly To run this diagnostic test you must connect the terminal to a host computer or other serial device via the communications dock or optical link adapter Hardware Diagnostics menu SERIAL PORT LOOPBACK HAITING CTs a COM Port 1 Haud Rate 38400 Parity Hone Data Bits 8 Echo RX Data on TX Echo CTS on RTE CEsel Exit 24
335. rom the main menu sidebar buttons 2 From the main menu sidebar buttons choose System Maintenance The System Maintenance dialog box appears 5 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 Inthe System Maintenance dialog box select Configure Download Server and then choose Start The Terminal Download Configuration dialog box appears Terminal Download Configuration Select a terminal or group to define a download initialization configuration Add Group Terminals and Groups UDPPO001 UDPP002 Edit Group UDPP003 Delete Group UDPPO04 UDPPOO5 Edit UDPPOO6 Copy From UDPP007 UDPP008 Downtead Close Help 4 From the Terminal Download Configuration dialog box in the Terminals and Groups list box select a terminal or group of terminals to receive the binary applications and files For help defining a group of terminals see Adding a Group in the Download Server in Appendix B of the Model 200 Controller System Manual 5 Choose Edit The Configure Device Initialization Download dialog box appears Lundapnie Derius Initial ratum Caren Configure ibe illes and dala dn he drrerri added in a burned of pesup ef terminals upum initislizulins Terminal of groep name LIOPPOU T Inltislization Dala File Commend Jat il Tapat fil nama if ditlaront PE TL im Chena tr tat Fes aed Data a downoad ander Delete Cline H
336. ronment to ensure the most efficient operation Charge the main battery pack in an area or room where the temperature is above freezing If you have been using the terminal in a cold temperature environment and need to replace or charge either battery let the batteries warm up for a half hour before you charge them Troubleshooting Booting and Resetting the Terminal You seldom need to boot or reset the TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal When you boot the terminal it runs through power on self test POST to test each major subsystem The terminal uses the configuration currently saved in flash memory Once the terminal is finished booting your application appears on the screen You only need to reset the terminal when the terminal or an application are locked up and will not respond to any key sequences The terminal also boots and resets after a firmware upgrade or if you remove both batteries The next instructions explain how you boot and reset the terminal Booting the Terminal You can boot the terminal using these two methods e Configure the 9 key to boot the terminal when you turn on the terminal e Use the Boot Menu Booting the Terminal on Resume When you press 9 to turn off the terminal it turns off and goes into Suspend mode When you press 9 to turn on the terminal it resumes or boots depending on the terminal configuration There are two ways to configure the 9 key using the Resume Execution conf
337. ror message when exiting the Configuration Menu Serial port configuration error DLE XON XOFF are not valid values for either SOM or EOM Configuration was not updated 6 10 Solution You must configure a value for EOM before you can set SOM or disable SOM You need to change the value of SOM Choose Serial Port from the Communications Menu The configurable serial protocol CSP uses EOM to determine the serial communications mode When EOM is disabled the terminal communicates in Character mode When EOM is enabled the terminal communicates in Frame mode To use Frame mode you need to set EOM first Next configure Handshake Configuration Commands Via Serial Port LRC SOM and then Poll For help see Using Serial Communications on the T2420 and 12425 in Chapter 4 SOM cannot equal the same value that is set for EOM You cannot set SOM to any of these values AFF ACK DLE NEG NAK Poll RES EOT REQ ENQ SEL XOFF or XON You need to change the value of SOM Choose Serial Port from the Communications Menu For help see Start of Message SOM in Chapter 9 EOM can be one or two ASCII characters but you cannot set the first and second character to the same character Also you cannot set EOM to any of these values AFF ACK DLE NEG NAK Poll RES EOT REQ ENQ SEL XOFF or XON You need to change the value of EOM 1 or 2 Choose Serial Port from the Communications Menu For he
338. rors Problem Restart T2400 Error Reading Template File Screen must have one input field defined Required Fields Not Complete Error building list from template file 6 16 Solution The screen mapping application did not start correctly Scan this bar code label to reset the firmware and restart the application Reset Firmware o You are trying to download the template file from the Model 200 Controller and a file error occurred Make sure you enter a valid template name that is currently stored on the correct directory on the controller Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual The screen you selected has not been defined correctly An input screen must have at least one input field defined You need to fix the template and the screen definition on the controller and download a new template You skipped at least one required field You must enter data in each required field on the screen Make sure you have entered data in every required field to continue The template file was downloaded from the controller but there was a problem building the list of screens The template file on the terminal is corrupted Try requesting or downloading the template again For help see Requesting a New Template in Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Screen Mapping Initialization Errors continued Problem No menu items defined in Template Template
339. rsor keys to move around the terminal s screen if you are running a program or entering data in a screen For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Using the Western European Keypad The programmable T2420 and 12425 non TE option comes with either an English or Western European alphanumeric keypad The Western European keypad supports English and most Western European languages such as French German Italian Portuguese Spanish and others You use the keypad to enter all the characters printed on or above the keys You can also use the accent marks above the through keys to enter a character in a Western European language For example you can type the character Although the English alphanumeric keypad does not show all the characters that are available on the Western European keypad you can type the same characters on either keypad The next illustration shows the Western European keypad 2 9 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Western European Keypad Suspend Resume key meer tr over F1 to F5 Space Backspace key Function Left key key Bi Function Right IA Shift key Backlight key Cursor keys Enter key 242XU 177 Control key This section explains how to type characters that are not shown on
340. rst 0 1 2 3 Concatenated 0 1 2 Second Discard Start Stop Transmit ABCD Start Stop Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop Disabled One of these bar codes Disabled Discard Start Stop ABC Transmit ABCD Start Stop LUTEA LOTO TUUM CD00 CD11 ABC Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop Standard Discard Start Stop LUTTE TUM LOI CD12 CD20 Standard Transmit ABCD Start Stop Standard Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop AMI UTA A NUM MIT A A CD21 CD22 Concatenated Discard Start Stop Concatenated Transmit ABCD Start Stop LATINO TAM LUTTE CD30 CD31 Concatenated Transmit DC1 DC4 Start Stop CD32 Code 11 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference Enables or disables decoding of Code 11 symbology Code 11 is a very high density discrete numeric bar code It is most extensively used in labeling telecommunications components and equipment CGdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Code 11 enabled with one check digit 2 Code 11 enabled with two check digits Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Code 11 CG0 Code 11 Enabled With One Check Digit CG1 Code 11 Enabled With Two Check Digits CG2 9 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Code 16K 9 16 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Enables or disables decoding of Code 16K symbology Code 16K is a two dimensional stacked rows high density bar
341. rt to transmit data to and accept data from a host or PC via RS 232 serial communications T2425 The 12425 has the additional ability to communicate in Intermec s 2 4 GHz radio frequency RF network The wireless T2425 provides real time communications to a host either through the access points and Model 200 Controller or directly through the access points The T2425 is a programmable terminal that can run client server applications screen mapping applications or terminal emulation applications TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual These options are available for the TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal Programmable terminal with alphanumeric keypad available to support English or Western European languages Extended storage drive 2MB or 4MB for custom applications and files These options are available for the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal UDP Plus Model 200 Controller network or TCP IP direct connect radio frequency network protocol IBM 3270 terminal emulation application and keypad IBM 5250 terminal emulation application and keypad VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation application and keypad Screen mapping for 3270 5250 or VT ANSI only UDP Plus terminals Programmable terminal with alphanumeric keypad available to support English or Western European languages This manual tells you how to use the features and options available on all models of the TRAKKER Antares terminals Equipment You N
342. s Learning How to Use the Terminal Learning How to Use the Terminal This chapter describes and explains how to use the terminal s keypad screen audio signals serial port batteries memory and drives and scan modules TRAKKER Antares Terminal Features This chapter explains these features on the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals ON CGA compatible displa ut S lt p play Scan module Antenna for RF communications Rechargeable batteries DA 7 Serial port 242XU 030 Keypad There are five keypad options an English alphanumeric keypad a Western European alphanumeric keypad and three terminal emulation keypads The terminal ships with a keypad that supports the type of application or terminal you ordered CGA compatible display The terminal screen is a backlit LCD that is 16 lines by 20 characters Depending on the application you can use the viewport features to move around a full 25 line by 80 character screen Audio signals The terminal and scan module have a beeper and internal speakers to sound audio signals as you scan bar code labels and enter data Serial port The terminal has an optical serial port that you can use to transmit data to and from another serial device via RS 232 serial communications Rechargeable batteries The terminal uses a rechargeable lithium ion main battery pack and a rechargeable NiCad backup battery to provide power Antenna for RF communicatio
343. s available as an English keypad or a multilingual European language keypad Terminal emulation keypads for IBM 3270 IBM 5250 and VT ANSI Note Terminal emulation keypads are available only in English However TE applications can display characters in the Western European languages For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide Application Options Programmable terminal IBM 3270 terminal emulation IBM 5250 terminal emulation VT100 220 320 and ANSI terminal emulation Screen mapping for 3270 5250 or VT ANSI Memory 2MB programmable flash memory 750K available 1MB battery backed RAM 512K available T2420 option for a 2MB or 4MB extended storage drive Radio Frequency Communications 2 4 GHz to 2 4835 GHz radio Frequency hopping spread spectrum radio 100 mW maximum output power 1 6 Mbits per second data speed Coverage 240 feet 80 meters A 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual A 6 RF Network Support Options Serial Communications Connectivity to a host on an Ethernet token ring twinaxial coaxial or SDLC network through an access point and Model 200 Controller using UDP Plus protocol Connectivity to a host on an Ethernet or token ring network through an access point using TCP IP protocol Optical serial communications port interface RS 232C up to 38400 baud XMODEM protocol for data transfer Supports Configurable Serial Protocol and XON XOFF
344. s see Note Yes see Note 2400 Menu System Scanning bar code labels Yes No From a host application Yes No through the serial port 12425 from the network Yes No Model 200 Controller or host Note You are prompted to save your changes in RAM and flash as you exit the Configuration Menu and the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Your changes are saved if you choose Yes at each screen If you configure the terminal by scanning bar code labels through the serial port or from the network you may want to save the changes in flash memory using one of these methods e Scan or send the Save Configuration in Flash Memory reader command Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System To save configuration changes using the reader command e Scan this bar code label Save Configuration in Flash Memory 41 Or send the command 1 as the last command from the controller or host application For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 3 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual To save configuration changes using the menu system 1 Press 4 7 2 w or scan this bar code The Main Menu appears Enter Test and Service Mode _ 2 Choose System Menu and press The System Menu appears SYSTEM MEHU File Manager Load Default Values Set Time and Date tore Configuration Upgrade Firmware N Select item CEnter Next scre
345. s field is four numbers separated by periods Location in Configuration Menu Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu Radio option Communications Menu Radio Network option Communications Menu Radio Network option Communications Menu Radio option Communications Menu Radio option Communications Menu Radio option Communications Menu Radio option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu Advanced Network option Communications Menu Primary Network option Serial Network Communications Table Parameter Syntax Baud Rate IA Configuration Commands Via Serial Port IT Data Bits II EOM PF Flow Control IL Handshake PG LRC IF Parity IB Poll HB SOM PE Stop Bits IC Timeout Delay IE Options 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Disabled Enabled with TMF Enabled without TMF 7 8 x03 ETX Any two ASCII characters None CTS checking XON XOFF response XON XOFF control XON XOFF response amp control Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled None Even Odd Disabled Enabled x02 STX Any ASCII character 1 2 5 milliseconds 100 milliseconds 500 milliseconds 2 seconds 10 seconds 20 seconds 40 seconds 60 seconds No timeout Configuring the Terminal 3 Location in Configuration Menu Communications Menu Serial Port option
346. s it off Configuring the Terminal Configuring the Terminal 3 This chapter explains how to configure the terminal discusses the terminal s configuration parameters and tells you how to restore the default configuration The table at the end of the chapter lists all the configuration parameters and their options How to Configure the Terminal You can configure the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 terminals by using either of the methods described in detail in this chapter Using the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System With menus and screens the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System lets you view the current configuration and modify configuration parameters Configuring the terminal by scanning bar codes You can change the terminal s current configuration by scanning Code 39 or Code 93 bar code labels that contain configuration commands This method is a fast easy way to change the terminal s configuration You can scan the bar code labels in this manual or you can create your own bar code labels Note You can also configure the terminal from a remote device You can configure the T2425 from the Model 200 Controller or from an application on the host You can configure the T2420 or T2425 by sending commands from an application through the serial port For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network Learning About Configuration Parameters You can customize many operating characteristics of the TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2
347. sabled the network is disabled no RF communications are provided and the radio is turned oft When the Network Activate parameter is enabled the T2425 will attempt to connect to the Model 200 Controller or host Controller IP Address An IP address is a unique network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The Controller IP Address identifies the IP address assigned to the Model 200 Controller in a UDP Plus network Host IP Address An IP address is a unique network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP direct connect network The Host IP Address identifies the IP address assigned to the host in your 2 4 GHz RF network Terminal IP Address An IP address is a unique network level address you assign to each device in a TCP IP network The Terminal IP Address identifies the IP address assigned to the T2425 The IP address you set on the terminal must match the address that is set for the terminal on the controller or host 4 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 4 18 Network Port Defines the network port that the TCP IP or UDP Plus network protocol uses for communications in your 2 4 GHz RF network In a UDP Plus network the network port you set on the T2425 must match the network port that is set on the Model 200 Controller In a TCP IP network set the network port to the appropriate port for the application you are using on the T2425 The default network port of 23 enables
348. sent the second character Each character has two wide elements and three narrow elements for a total of five elements Its maximum density is 7 8 characters per inch 12 of 5 is mainly used in inventory distribution and the automobile industry G 13 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 14 IP Internet protocol This is the protocol for the network layer in TCP IP protocol It acts as a router for frames and is also responsible for frame addressing IP verifies it has all the frames to pass to the TCP layer and that they are in the correct order IP address An internal TCP IP protocol stack variable This address is a network layer address that is assigned to each device in a TCP IP network keypad buffer An area of memory that saves a limited number of operator keystrokes keypad clicker A feature that makes the terminal produce an audible click every time you press a key This feature can be enabled or disabled with the Keypad Clicker configuration command LAN Local area network A group of intelligent workstations that are hooked together to allow them to share data printers and other devices LANs are usually used over a small geographic area laser scanner An optical bar code reading device that uses a low energy laser light beam to examine a spatial pattern one part after another It then generates analog or digital signals corresponding to the pattern Laser scanners are often used in mar
349. smit on the terminal continuously sends out a string of 10 characters F5 Exits the Serial Port Test diagnostic screen On the host you use an RS 232 serial communications package to receive data from the terminal To test serial communications enter or scan data on the terminal If the terminal is communicating with the host you will see the data If there is a problem check the serial port parameters and make sure they match the host settings For help with serial port errors see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting or contact your local Intermec service representative Note COMA is the scanner port that is assigned to the scan module Running Diagnostics Purpose If you are discussing a problem with Intermec you can use the Subsystem Versions screen to tell the Intermec representative the exact version of firmware subsystems loaded on the terminal Subsystem Versions Where Available System Diagnostics menu Sample Screen SUBSYSTEM VERS IONS Name Version Network 820607 RF Driver 6206007 Decodes 820805 Scanner 6206003 Lahel Task 626004 Rdr Cmd Proc 8208007 Term Serv 6206006 Serial Port 620607 Menu Sustem 6206006 Keypad 620604 CEnter Next screen CEscl Exit 242XU 136 Definition Press to display the next screen of subsystem information If you are having a specific problem with one system note the version loaded on the terminal before contacting your local Intermec service representative Note
350. splay Test Keypad Test Main Board Menu Radio Test Serial Loop Back Scanner Test SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS Subsustem Versions Access Point Suspend Resume Test App Efficiency Serial Port Test Malloc Info Menu CONFIGURATION MENU Sumbologies Menu Communications Menu Terminal Menu S YMBOLOGIES MENU cCode 39 Codabar Code 11 Code 49 Code 93 Code 128 Code 16K 2of5 I 2of5 MSI Plesseu lIPC EAN CONFIGURATION MENU Sumbologies Menu Terminal Menu COMMUNI CATIONS MENU Serial Port COMMUNI CATIONS MENU Advanced Network Radio Serial Port RR ae CONFIGURATION MENU Sumbologies Menu Communications Menu TERMINAL MENU Beeper Dizplau Keupad Power Management Preamble Postamble FAM Drive Reader Command Menu Scanner 242XU 178 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 3 8 Exploring the Configuration and System Menus When you access the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System the Main Menu appears You use the Configuration Menu and the System Menu to configure the terminal The Configuration Menu contains these commands CONFIGURATION MEHU Sumbologies Menu Communications Menu Terminal Menu N Select item CEnter Next screen CFil Help CEscl Exit 242XU 010 Symbologies Menu Choose the Symbologies Menu to configure and activate the bar code symbologies the terminal can decode An aster
351. t Connect Network fi fi fi co co co nclude lt windows h gt nclude lt stdio h gt nclude d class Utils h our application uses a nst unsigned short SERVER_POR 6000 nst unsigned short CLIENT_POR 6001 we will default to the local host machine unless argv 1 has a hostname nst char SERVER HOSTNAME nom fixed port number int mai turn on the socket library for this process WSADATA wsad int error WSAStartup MAKEWORD 1 1 if error 0 ErrorMessage WSAStartup n int argc char argv amp wsad WSAGetLastError create an unitialized connection oriented socket SOCKET connection connection socket PF_INET SOCK DGRAM if connection INVALID SOCKET ErrorMessage socket WSAGetLastError 00 7 lookup the IP address of the requested host HOSTENT phostent if phostent 0 ErrorMessage gethostbyname WSAGetLastError define a SOCKADDR to contain the IP address of the server and the port number of our application SOCKADDR_IN serverAddress memset amp serverAddress 0 serverAddress serverAddress sin_family PF_INET serverAddress sin_port htons SERVER_PORT memcpy amp serverAddress sin_addr phostent h addr list 0 Bind a well know port of 6000 to the socket SOCKADDR IN clientAddress memset amp clientAddress 0 sizeof
352. t and TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal are on different subnetworks For example if the terminal IP address is 192 9 150 184 and the subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 the terminal is on the subnetwork 192 9 150 0 subnetwork See domain Glossary G Suspend mode The mode the TRAKKER Antares terminal enters when you press 9 to turn off the terminal In Suspend mode the terminal saves all memory and turns off the power to most of the hardware Contrast with resume symbology See bar code symbology TCP Transmission control protocol This is the protocol for the transport layer in the TCP IP protocol It provides a method for reliable error free full duplex communications between sender and receiver nodes TCP takes long messages from higher layers and breaks them up before passing them to IP for transmission TCP makes sure that the messages are in sequence when it receives them and it retries failed transmissions TE Configuration Menu A menu driven application that lets you configure 3270 5250 or VT ANSI terminal emulation parameters You can access the TE Configuration Menu at any time during a terminal emulation session Telnet The TCP IP remote terminal protocol for connection to a login server terminal emulation TE A device that is running terminal emulation looks like the terminal For example it uses no CPU no RAM and no hard disk Two general classifications are devices running in Character mode and those ru
353. t that the application has on the terminal s battery power Shows the current status of each application event to help debug applications Shows the voltage temperature and charging status for the main battery pack and the backup battery Shows the power remaining in the main battery pack and the power status for the backup battery Sounds a series of beeps to test the beeper by using a range of beep volumes and beep frequencies Clears the Task Status counters so that you can begin accumulating new task statistics for the Task Status screen and the Application Efficiency screen Extensively tests the RAM Tests and turns on the pixels on the screen to make sure all areas of the screen are working correctly Lists any errors that the firmware did not expect Lists the terminal s hardware components that were installed at the Intermec factory including the RF country code Shows the hexadecimal decimal and scan code value for any key or key combination on the keypad TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Diagnostic Tests continued Diagnostic Test Malloc Application Information Malloc Firmware Information Radio Test T2425 only Serial Loopback Scanner Test Serial Port Test Subsystem Versions Suspend Resume Test Task Status Description Shows how memory is allocated and used by the current application Shows how memory is allocated and used in the terminal fir
354. tative Running Diagnostics Hardware Configuration Purpose Where Available Sample Screen Definition If you are discussing a problem with Intermec you can use the Hardware Configuration screen to tell the Intermec representative the exact version of hardware that was installed on the terminal at the Intermec factory You can also use this screen to see the radio frequency and country code that are configured on the T2425 Hardware Diagnostics menu HARDWARE CONFIG HARDWARE CONFIG Country Code PCMCIA Type za fimerica nxI C88 01 PCMCIA Rev 1 Display Type a PCH Rev 1 Display Hev a Display Cont 32 Product ID 2426 Serial Keupad Tupe a 9608602660436 Keypad Rev a Keupad Table a CEnter Next screen CEnter Next screen CEsecl Exit L Esc1 Exit 242XU 142 Press to display the next screen of hardware information If you are having a specific problem with one system such as the radio note the hardware versions on the terminal before contacting your local Intermec service representative The country code information on the Hardware Configuration screen is only valid when the radio Network Activate command is enabled If the radio is disabled the country code information is not valid For help see Network Activate in Chapter 9 Note The country code information does not apply to the TRAKKER Antares 2420 terminal since it does not have a radio 7 15 TRAKKER Ant
355. terminal firmware To upgrade or load the firmware you should use the Firmware Upgrade option in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help see Upgrading the Firmware in Chapter 3 Power Down Press to turn off the terminal When you turn on the terminal the Boot Menu screen appears again if POST passes Resetting the Terminal If the terminal or application is locked up and the terminal will not respond to any key sequences you can reset the terminal Before you reset the terminal try the following in order e Press 9 to turn off the terminal e Scan the Reset Firmware label to restart the firmware and application Reset ox Troubleshooting If the terminal or application still will not respond reset the terminal To reset the terminal 1 2 Place the terminal on a flat surface Press 9 to turn off the terminal If it will not turn off continue with the next step Press and hold the t and keys at the same time and then press 9 while still pressing the other keys The green scanner LEDs light and the terminal turns off Release the keys Tip It helps to press the left side of the 23 key in this key sequence Press 9 to turn on the terminal The Boot Menu appears BOOT MEHU b Boot System 1 Run Loader gq Power Down POWER DOWN IM 6 amp 8 SEC 242XU 104 Note If the terminal returns to the exact same screen the reset sequence di
356. th data fields Function Code 1 F1 identifies a data system Function Code 2 F2 indicates the end of a data field C data Code 49 CKdata Function Code 1 CLdata Function Code 2 CMdata Function Code 3 Acceptable values for data are Code 49 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Function Code 1 Any two ASCII characters Function Code 2 Any four ASCII characters Function Code 3 Any two ASCII characters Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Code 49 Enable Code 49 CJO CJ1 To disable any of the function codes scan one of these bar codes Disable Function Code 1 Disable Function Code 2 4CK CL Disable Function Code 3 4CM Or Code 93 Purpose Syntax Default Scan Configuration Command Reference To set one of the function codes to a character string 1 Scanone of these bar codes Enter Accumulate Mode Set Function Code 1 4 4 CK Enter Accumulate Mode Set Function Code 2 4 4 CL Enter Accumulate Mode Set Function Code 3 4 CM 2 Scan any character from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B You can define two characters each for Function Codes 1 and 3 and four characters for Function Code 2 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode MUTI _ Enables or disables decoding of Code 93 symbology Code 93 is a variable length continuous symbology that uses four element widths CFdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 En
357. the IP address is set to 0 127 or a number greater than 223 Press to save the changes and exit the Primary Network screen Press W to choose the Radio command and then press The Radio screen appears UDP Plus and TCP IP Radio HADID Domain Security ID CID unchanged se vias on Broadcast o Security ID Override No Roam Flag Allowed Transmit Mode Auto more 242XU 013 In the Domain field type a number from 0 to 15 and then press W The domain must match the number set on the access point In the Security ID field type the RF security identification and then press W The Security ID is case sensitive and can be up to 20 characters long It must match the security ID set on the access point Note If you have not changed the Security ID in the current session the words ID unchanged display instead of the actual password If you change the Security ID you see the actual password until you save the changes 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Getting Started f Press to save the changes and exit the Radio screen Note If the terminal is on a different IP subnetwork from the Model 200 Controller or host you must also configure the default router and subnet mask Choose the Advanced Network command to set these parameters For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network For TCP IP networks press A to choose the Advanced Network command and then press
358. the battery pack You must have a power supply connected to the dock or optical link adapter to charge the battery pack For help see the TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock Quick Reference Guide or the TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter Quick Reference Guide Connecting the Backup Battery A NiCad battery backs up all memory and the real time clock while you change the main battery pack The backup battery is shipped inside the terminal but it is not connected To connect the backup battery 1 Open the battery door by pushing down on the battery door latch and sliding it toward the bottom end of the terminal Lift up the top edge of the battery door to remove it Battery door TOP 242XU 079 Getting Started f Find the two connectors in the backup battery compartment One connector is attached to the backup battery The other connector is attached to the terminal Firmly push the two battery wire connectors together until they lock The connectors are keyed so they cannot be connected incorrectly Battery wire connectors Ao Backup Z a battery 242XU 086 Gently fold and push the backup battery wires into the open area of the backup battery compartment near the wall 242XU 089 Leave the battery door off to continue with the next procedure Installing the Main Battery Pack 1 9 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Installing the Main Battery Pack
359. the extended ASCII character However you cannot scan in extended ASCII characters in the Preamble command You need to use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide ADdata Acceptable values for data are up to 25 ASCII characters When you enter the AD command without data the preamble is disabled If you are entering quotation marks as data or grouping configuration commands you need to enclose the data within quotation marks see the example Note To scan a bar code label that includes quotes you must configure the terminal to use Code 39 in Full ASCII mode For help see Code 39 earlier in this chapter No characters disabled Scan Or Example Configuration Command Reference To disable the preamble scan this bar code Disable Preamble AD To set the preamble to an ASCII character string 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set Preamble AD 2 Scan a value for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The preamble can be from 1 to 25 characters 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode LAM _ You want to set a preamble that includes quotation marks Enter the preamble by scanning this full ASCII bar code label Set Preamble to B G EAD m B m You must enclose the data within quotation marks and precede each quotation mark with another quotation mark so that the quotati
360. the same way you can on a hard disk drive You can disable the RAM drive and use the additional 256K for programmable Malloc memory allocations or configure the RAM drive to temporarily store data and files The contents are destroyed when you boot or reset the terminal reader command A reader command causes the terminal to perform a task You can enter a reader command by typing on the keypad by scanning a bar code label or by sending a command from a device on the 2 4 GHz network regular label A bar code label that takes the form of start code data stop code A regular bar code label is executed when you scan it Contrast with multiple read label G 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 20 resume When you press 9 to turn the terminal on the terminal either resumes exactly where it was when you turned it off or the terminal boots and restarts your application Resume is controlled through the Resume Execution configuration command Contrast with Suspend mode RF data collection system Radio frequency data collection system in which the individual components communicate with each other by radio signals RF security identification ID Defines the password for secured transmission and receipt of data between devices in the wireless network To communicate each access point and TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal must have matching security IDs ROM Read only memory Usually a smal
361. the terminal Set the time and date Configure the serial port parameters T2425 only Configure the T2425 and the RF network devices Start the application and use the terminal 39 709 mb cg OR cim G95 bs EI a gt These steps are described in detail in the next sections Unpacking the Terminal When you remove the terminal from its box save the box and shipping material in case you need to ship or store the terminal Check the contents of the box against the invoice for completeness and contact your local Intermec service representative if there is a problem The terminal ships with a getting started guide safety documents and scan module documents The scan module you ordered is already installed on the terminal Charging the Main Battery Pack The terminal s main battery pack is a lithium ion battery You must fully charge the battery pack before you can use the terminal The lithium ion battery pack is the main power source for the terminal TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Tip Keep a spare charged main battery pack on hand to operate the terminal without interruption To charge the main battery pack Place the battery pack in an empty slot in the battery charger The battery pack is fully charged in about two hours For help see the documentation that came with your battery charger You can also use the TD2400 communications dock or the optical link adapter to trickle charge
362. the terminal s 16 x 20 screen You will only see 16 lines and 20 characters of data at one time Use the terminal s screen as a viewport to move around and see the entire screen G 25 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual G 26 volatile Refers to memory that is not saved when power is lost or turned off VT ANSI terminal emulation A straight through terminal emulation that causes Intermec downline devices running terminal emulation to emulate a VT100 VT220 and VT320 or ANSI terminal XON XOFF A type of software flow control for communications between digital devices It stops the host from sending data when the device buffer fills up XOFF and starts it again when the buffer empties XON Index Symbols key configuring to boot the terminal 6 25 first time turning on 1 13 turning the terminal on and off 1 31 st key See Function Right key t key See Function Left key key See backlight key key See Shift key A b Y keys See cursor keys Numbers 10BaseT 10Base2 or 10Base5 definition G 3 2 4 GHz RF network access point configuring 4 16 activating 1 25 9 52 equipment required 4 15 illustrated 1 22 4 4 to 4 8 installing overview 1 22 4 14 Model 200 Controller configuring 4 15 protocols defined 4 33 to 4 35 roaming between access points 4 21 terminal configuring 4 16 3270 and 5250 screen mapping See screen mapping 3270 and 5250 terminal emu
363. the test make sure the radio Network Activate command is enabled If the radio is disabled the test results on the Radio Test screen are not valid For help see Network Activate in Chapter 9 Press to start the radio test The results of the test display on the screen once the test is complete If SUCCESS or PASSED display the radio is working correctly If FAILED displays note the error number You may have a problem with the radio inside the T2425 For help contact your local Intermec service representative Caution If the Radio Test fails stop using the terminal Contact your local Intermec service representative Conseil Si le test Radio choue veuillez ne plus utiliser le terminal Contactez le repr sentant du service client le Intermec de votre r gion 7 17 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Scanner Test Where Available Purpose Sample Screen 7 18 Definition Use the Scanner Test to make sure the laser scanner Scan button or scanner trigger are operating correctly You can test the integrated laser scan module or the scanner attached to the module for cabled scanners Hardware Diagnostics menu Press ENTER to turn the laser on for 3 seconds Or scan a label to test the laser CEnter Execute test CEsc Exit 242XU 137 To start the test press If the laser scanner turns on the scanner is working correctly If the laser scanner does not tu
364. ther a TCP IP direct connect network or a UDP Plus network with the Model 200 Controller These new features for TRAKKER Antares terminals were added in firmware versions 2 0 2 10 and 2 11 e RS 232 serial communications on the T2420 and T2425 Multiple drives on the T2420 and T2425 Multiple applications stored on the T2420 and T2425 e Western European alphanumeric keypad on the T2420 and T2425 These new features for TRAKKER Antares terminals were added in firmware version 2 20 e TCP IP radio frequency network protocol option to communicate in a direct connect network no Model 200 Controller e Terminal emulation application enhancements that support auto login script files TE Configuration menu security TCP IP direct connect networks and the ability to display international characters Using This Manual With Older Firmware Versions If you have a TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 with a firmware version lower than 2 20 you can use this manual to learn how to use your terminal However this manual describes features that are only available in TRAKKER Antares firmware version 2 0 and higher You may need to disregard the sections that discuss these new features e RS 232 serial port communications and configuration commands v2 x Multiple drives and a configurable RAM drive v2 x Multiple applications instead of a single terminal emulation or screen mapping application and a file manager v2 x Getting Started 1
365. ther device through the serial port To restore the default configuration using the reader command Scan this bar code label Default Configuration 0 To restore the default configuration using the menu system 1 Press t T 7 2 or scan this bar code Enter Test and Service Mode _ The Main Menu appears 2 Choose System Menu and press The System Menu appears 3 Choose the Load Default Values command and press The Load Default Values screen appears 3 19 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Load Default Values Screen 4 LOAD DEFAULT VALUES Load default configuration values in RAM C Overwrites current configuration OK CANCEL 242XU 056 Choose OK and press to load the default configuration values The default values will override the current runtime configuration on the terminal To exit without loading the default values choose Cancel and press l The System Menu appears Press to exit the System Menu The Main Menu appears Choose another menu from the Main Menu or press to exit the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System For help exiting the menu system see Exiting the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System earlier in this chapter Upgrading the Firmware 3 20 The terminal firmware includes these items TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System Ter
366. tion G 5 C cabled scanners configuring for scan module 9 72 definition G 6 list for scan module A 8 cables specifications A 6 capitalizing characters Keypad Caps Lock command using 9 47 keypad using 2 8 Caps Lock icon described 2 8 2 18 cautions defined xvi CCD scanners configuring for scan module 9 72 definition G 6 list for scan module A 8 CGA compatible display described 2 3 2 15 A 5 change configuration configuration commands using 9 6 reader commands using 8 8 channel definition G 6 Character mode EOM described 4 11 9 40 troubleshooting 6 10 characters table of C 3 to C 12 charging batteries backup battery 1 13 2 28 battery pack 1 7 2 27 Index cold temperatures guidelines 6 24 check boxes in screens 3 10 check character definition G 6 check digit definition G 6 checksum definition G 6 Clear reader command 8 6 Clear Task Profiles screen defined 7 8 CLIENT CPP sample utility 4 28 to 4 32 coaxial definition G 6 Codabar command 9 14 Code 11 command 9 15 Code 128 command 9 24 Code 16K command 9 16 Code 2 of 5 command 9 17 disabled with Interleaved 2 of 5 9 45 Code 39 configuration command 9 18 creating bar code labels 9 3 table of ASCII characters B 3 to B 5 Code 49 command 9 22 Code 93 command 9 23 Code One definition G 8 using A 6 cold boot 6 27 cold temperatures guidelines for using in 2 15 2 22 2 28 6 24 COM port definition G 8 loc
367. tion 3 23 Operating the Terminal in a Network How the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Fits Into Your Network 4 3 Using Serial Communications on the T2420 and T2425 4 9 Identifying the COM Ports 4 9 Connecting the Terminal to Another Device 4 10 Configuring and Using Serial Communications 4 11 Configuring the Terminal Via the Serial Port 4 12 Using RF Communications on the T2425 4 14 Planning the Network Connection 4 15 Configuring the Model 200 Controller 4 15 Configuring the Access Point 4 16 Configuring the T2425 4 16 Defining the RF Network Parameters 4 17 vii TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual viii Using the Icons to Monitor RF Communications 4 19 Using the T2425 Between Access Points 4 21 Configuring the T2425 Over the Network 4 22 Configuring the T2425 From the Controller 4 22 Configuring the T2425 From the Host 4 23 Configuring the T2425 in a UDP Plus Network 4 23 Configuring the T2425 in a TCP IP Direct Connect Network 4 25 Transferring Files in a TCP IP Direct Connect Network 4 28 About Network Connectivity and Protocols 4 33 Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping How To Download and Run Applications 5 3 About the TRAKKER Antares Programmable Terminals 5 4 Creating Applications for the Terminal 5 6 Using the PSK or EZBuilder to Develop Applications 5 6 Converting Applications Between JANUS and TRAKKER Antares 5 7 Converting IRL Programs 5 7 Converting the Application to a Binary
368. tions for the terminal The kit contains e Programmer s Software Kit PSK e Application Simulator e FileCopy utility e Sample programs and Make files e TRAKKER Antares Application Development Tools System Manual Part No 064433 The PSK is a library of C functions that control the TRAKKER Antares programmable terminals You can program the terminal to display prompts and error messages to collect and display data and to transmit data to an upline controller or host computer The PSK functions work with most standard Microsoft C functions You can create complex applications that collect store manipulate and transmit data to meet your system needs The Application Simulator is a terminate and stay resident TSR program that lets you debug and run TRAKKER Antares applications on a DOS or Windows PC The Simulator captures the PSK and C functions and makes the PC mimic a TRAKKER Antares terminal EZBuilder is a software code generator product that provides programmers and technically oriented non programmers with a quick and easy way to create applications for the TRAKKER Antares terminal EZBuilder contains Using Custom Applications and Screen Mapping 5 e EZBuilder software e Microsoft Visual C version 1 5X e Application Simulator e PSK libraries e FileCopy utility e Sample EZBuilder programs e EZBuilder Getting Started Guide Part No 066450 e EZBuilder Tutorial Part No 066449 EZBuilder is a software co
369. to copy the file from the PC to the terminal If you turned on the Run program check box the terminal boots resets and runs the application you downloaded Otherwise the current application continues to run on the terminal Or click Upload to copy the file from the terminal to the PC To download or upload another file repeat Step 5 through Step 7 Click Exit to close the FileCopy utility If you have problems downloading or uploading applications and files see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Using the Model 200 Controller to Download Applications You can download applications and files to a T2425 using either the serial port or RF communications For help downloading via the serial port see the previous section The advantage to downloading files via RF communications is that you can download multiple files to one or more terminals You use RF communications to download applications from the Model 200 Controller to T2425s running UDP Plus or from the host to T2425s running TCP IP This section explains how to use the controller to download applications and files For help downloading files in a TCP IP network see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network To download applications and files from the Model 200 Controller 1 Copy the applications and files to the controller 2 Download the applications and files to the T2425 Each step is described in the next sections Before you start make sure the T2425 is communicating
370. ts CN31 9 51 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Network Activate Purpose Syntax Default Scan Enables or disables network communications between the T2425 and other devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network When you enable this parameter the terminal attempts to establish communications with the Model 200 Controller or host computer When you disable this parameter the network is disabled no RF communications are provided and the radio is turned off Note You must enable the Network Activate parameter to use the T2425 for RF data collection NAdata Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 2 4 GHz RF network enabled Disabled One of these bar codes Disable Network Activate 4 NA0 Enable 2 4 GHz RF Network NA1 Network Loopback 9 52 Purpose Syntax Transmits all messages received from the Model 200 Controller back to the controller Messages received by the radio are not passed on to the T2425 applications unless they are configuration commands Messages continue to be looped back to the controller as long as this feature is enabled Messages originating from the T2425 are still transmitted to the controller Use the Network Loopback parameter to troubleshoot RF communications problems NLdata Default Scan Configuration Command Reference Acceptable values for data are 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled One of th
371. urity ID command Default No characters or blank disabled Scan To disable or set the RF security ID to no characters scan this full ASCII bar code label Disable RF Security ID 6 RS Or Tosetthe RF security ID to an ASCII character string 1 Scan this bar code Enter Accumulate Mode Set RF Security ID RS 2 Scana value for data from the Full ASCII Bar Code Chart in Appendix B The RF security ID can be from 1 to 20 characters 3 Scan this bar code Exit Accumulate Mode x 9 66 Notes Example Configuration Command Reference If you view the RF security ID in the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System the actual security ID does not display on the screen The words ID unchanged indicate that the password has not been changed in the current menu session If you change the security ID you see the new password until you exit the Configuration Menu and update the runtime configuration You want to set the security ID to the letters ABC Scan this bar code label Set RF Security ID to ABC RSABC RF Security ID Override Purpose Syntax Default Scan Allows you to set a flag to override the RF security ID password on the T2425 If you set the RF Security ID Override command the terminal ignores the RF security ID as if no password is set You can use the RF Security ID Override command to help troubleshoot communications problems an
372. us screen defined 7 9 tests and screens defined 7 7 to 7 26 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System using 7 4 dimensions of the terminal A 4 direct sequencing definition G 9 direct TCP IP socket connection 1 23 4 15 display backlight on and off 8 7 backlight timeout configuring 9 36 contrast adjusting 9 38 See also screen Display Backlight Timeout command 9 36 Display Contrast command 9 38 Display Font Type command 9 39 Display Test screen defined 7 14 disposing NiCad backup battery 2 33 documentation bar code conventions defined xix command conventions defined xx guide to learning tasks 1 36 keypad conventions defined xix manuals list for reference xxi screen and message conventions defined xx shipping box list of contents 1 7 summary of each chapter xvii warnings and cautions defined xvi domain definition G 9 See also RF domain DOS code pages definition G 9 downline definition G 10 downloading applications overview 5 11 RF communications using 4 28 5 13 serial port using 5 8 drive C described 2 37 I 8 drive E described 2 37 drive G described 2 37 drive definition G 10 E EAN definition G 10 EAN 8 enabling 9 85 EBCDIC definition G 10 edge triggering configuring the scanner 9 75 definition G 10 electrical specifications A 4 End of Message See EOM command Enter Accumulate mode configuration commands using 9 6 reader command using 8 5 Enter reader command
373. uter via RS 232 serial communications TRAKKER Antares Terminals in a Wired Network L e n File server Mainframe un CRT terminals Ethernet 242XU 162 Terminal in TD2400 communications dock TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminals in a 2 4 GHz RF UDP Plus Data Collection Network Host TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals t3 Access point Ethernet 1 l 242XU 095 Model 200 Controller You can use the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal as an end device in your Intermec 2 4 GHz RF network The T2425 communicates with a host computer through the Model 200 Controller using UDP Plus for the RF protocol The access point acts as a bridge to allow communications between the Ethernet or token ring network and the wireless T2425 terminals Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 TRAKKER Antares 2425 Terminals in a 2 4 GHz RF TCP IP Direct Connect Network TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminals t3 Access point Ethernet 242XU 190 You can use the TRAKKER Antares 2425 terminal as an end device in your Intermec 2 4 GHz RF network The T2425 communicates with a host computer directly using TCP IP for the RF protocol The access point acts as a bridge to allow communications between the Ethernet or token ring network and the wireless T2425 terminals 4 5 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Ter
374. values of two configuration commands from the T2425 Send this transaction from the host application CGS NADF Note The transaction header is not shown in this example You do not need a transaction header for a host application in a TCP IP network where CG is a TMF Configuration Get request is the Change Configuration reader command NA is the Network Activate configuration command DF is the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command Operating the Terminal in a Network 4 The T2425 returns this transaction to the host application Cg NA1DF60 where Cg is a TMF Configuration Get response is the Change Configuration reader command NA1 means the Network Activate configuration command is currently set to a value of 1 which means that the 2 4 GHz RF network is enabled DF60 means the Display Backlight Timeout configuration command is currently set to a value of 60 seconds Example 2 In the host application you want to set the value for two configuration commands on the T2425 Send this transaction from the host application CSS BV4DF30 Note The transaction header is not shown in this example You do not need a transaction header for a host application in a TCP IP network where CS is a TMF Configuration Set request is the Change Configuration reader command BV4 sets the Beep Volume configuration command to a value of 4 which is a very loud beep volume DF30 sets the Display Bac
375. viewport movement Each screen feature is explained in the next sections Note If you are using the terminal in a cold environment the LCD display may respond and display information more slowly than in a warm environment 2 15 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 16 Using the Screen As a Viewport The TRAKKER Antares terminal screen shows 16 lines by 20 characters of data at one time In terminal emulation TE or custom applications the terminal s screen may show only part of each 25 line by 80 character screen that appears on a full size terminal You can use the terminal screen as a viewport to move around and see the entire 25 x 80 screen The viewport lets you view screens and enter data by showing the part of the screen you are using When you are using one of the Intermec TE applications the viewport automatically moves to the cursor when there is data entry from the host computer or the terminal You can configure the viewport for your TE applications to e Follow the cursor e Center the viewport around the cursor For help on configuring the TE viewport options see the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide The first time you turn the terminal on it displays the upper left corner of a full size terminal screen This is the viewport s home position A screen or application that displays more than 16 lines by 20 characters of data at one time has data in the unseen area of the s
376. vii terminology defined xviii Maximum Retries command 9 49 memory described 2 37 flash saving configuration changes 3 14 RAM saving configuration changes 3 13 saving configuration changes 3 17 specifications A 5 suspend resume testing 7 26 troubleshooting 7 13 Menu System See TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System menus Configuration Menu defined 3 8 Diagnostics Menu defined 7 5 Main Menu defined 3 6 System Menu defined 3 8 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System selecting 3 9 messages conventions defined xx mixed full ASCII Code 39 9 19 Model 200 Controller applications downloading to terminal 5 13 configuring 4 15 definition G 15 files copying to 5 12 network communications verifying 1 29 transaction ID creating 4 24 using to configure T2425 4 22 models and options described 1 5 module for cabled scanners Index input devices configuring 9 72 list of A 8 installing 2 39 specifications A 7 terminal accessory described 1 4 troubleshooting 6 20 to 6 22 7 18 using 2 38 See also scan module or scanning MSI command 9 51 Multiple Read Labels reader command 8 9 N NAU address definition G 16 NET port locating 4 9 network addressable unit address See NAU address administrator definition G 16 communications activating the 2 4 GHz RF network 1 25 9 52 controller IP address configuring 9 32 default router configuring 9 35 host IP address configuring 9 43 network port c
377. with the controller If you need any help installing or configuring the network see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 5 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 5 12 Copying Files to the Model 200 Controller You can use these instructions to copy binary applications and files from a 3 5 inch disk to the Model 200 Controller To copy applications and files to the controller 1 Insert the 3 5 inch disk that contains the files in the disk drive of the controller From the main menu sidebar buttons choose File Handling The File Handling dialog box appears In the File Handling list box select Restore User Files and choose OK A message box appears telling you to insert the floppy disk in the disk drive of the controller Choose OK The Restore User Files dialog box appears The files on the floppy disk appear in the Available Files list box Select fue uw Miles dm ha mire Valuer Lobel Clink 1 of 1 Seoched flew faile tiles VEN TESS EH LUCA E HIH See i Pale Bi RECEIVEJHIM gt Herpes gt cuam giu TUE EFT AH Raine p Ere In the Available Files list box add all the files that you want to restore to the Selected Files list box a Select the file name b ChooseSelect The file name appears in the Selected Files list box Select fue ier Alex dm ha mirei Valuer Lobel Dik 1 of 1 Se eched flew feaitablp tiles PRHKA MAVEN TESS EH RECEIVE MH LOCATE BIH
378. wo digit hexadecimal number For example ETX in the Full ASCII Table is the hexadecimal value 03 To enter an extended ASCII character look up the hexadecimal number for the character in the TRAKKER Antares Terminal Font Set in Appendix C For example 9A is the hexadecimal value for U the 5250 Field Exit code 2 Use the TRAKKER Antares 2400 Menu System to configure a preamble or postamble From the Main Menu choose Configuration Menu 3 From the Configuration Menu choose Terminal Menu 4 From the Terminal Menu choose Preamble Postamble 3 11 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual Configuring the Preamble and Postamble PREAMBLE POS TAMELE Preamble Postamble SBD BA OK CANCEL 242XU 057 Move the cursor to the field for the preamble or postamble 6 Type the control character extended ASCII character or escape character sequence in the preamble or postamble field e To type a control character or extended ASCII character in the preamble or postamble field use this syntax xhh where hh is the one or two digit hexadecimal number for the control character or extended ASCII character For example to enter ETX as a preamble type x03 To enter U 5250 Field Exit code as the postamble type x9A e To type an escape character backslash in the preamble or postamble field use the next table The application ignores the first backslas
379. work In a TCP IP network the terminal communicates through the access point directly to the host on an Ethernet or token ring network Host TCP IP Direct Connect UDP Plus p ieu 242XU 193 Note All devices in the 2 4 GHz RF network must have an IP address All access points that the TRAKKER Antares 2425 may communicate with must be in the same IP subnetwork For help see Chapter 4 Operating the Terminal in a Network 1 22 CAUTION Getting Started 1 To use RF communications on the T2425 you need to 1 Configure the Model 200 Controller UDP Plus or host TCP IP 2 Configure the access point 3 Configure the network parameters on the terminal Each step is described in the next sections Caution Make sure all components with antennas are at least 10 feet 3 meters apart when power is applied Failure to comply could result in equipment damage Conseil Assurez vous que la distance entre tous les l ments avec antennes soit d au moins dix pieds 3 m tres avant de faire la connexion avec l alimentation lectrique faute de quoi vous risquez d endommager votre installation Configuring the Model 200 Controller Host and Access Points To use your T2425 in Intermec s 2 4 GHz UDP Plus RF network you must first install and configure the Model 200 Controller and the access points For help see the Model 200 Controller System Manual Part No 063439 an
380. work Activate configuration command must be configured to 2 4 GHz RF network before you can save any changes to the RF security ID command The 2 4 GHz RF network is enabled and there is a problem with the network configuration You need to change the terminal IP address and or the controller IP address host IP address for a TCP IP network Choose Primary Network from the Communications Menu The terminal IP address or the controller host IP address is set to 0 x x x or 127 x x x These are invalid addresses Set a valid IP address for the terminal and controller or host For help see Using RF Communications on the T2425 in Chapter 4 If you cannot fix the addressing problem check with your network administrator to get the IP address assigned to the terminal and the controller or host Troubleshooting Problems While Configuring the Terminal continued Problem On a T2425 you see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Network configuration error Network is enabled Terminal IP address and Default Router address set to the same address Configuration was not updated On a T2425 you see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Network configuration error Network is enabled Terminal IP address or Controller Host IP address set to the same address Configuration was not updated On a T2425 you see this error message when exiting the Configuration Menu Network conf
381. xplains the values you can specify for them Other Intermec Manuals You may need to refer to the manuals listed below for additional information about your TRAKKER Antares 2420 or 2425 terminal accessories or the 2 4 GHz radio frequency network To order additional manuals contact your local Intermec representative or distributor Intermec Manual Part No 0110 0111 0115 Access Point User s Manual 065053 The Bar Code Book 051241 EZBuilder Getting Started Guide 066450 EZBuilder Tutorial 066449 Model 200 Controller System Manual 063439 Model 200 Controller Technical Reference Manual 064398 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Battery Pack Instruction Sheet 064216 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Belt Clip and Belt Instruction Sheet 064218 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Handstrap Instruction Sheet 064217 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Holster and Belt Instruction Sheet 064215 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Module for Cabled Scanners Instruction Sheet 064219 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Standard Range Scan Module Instruction Sheet 064220 TRAKKER Antares 2400 Series Vehicle Mount Holder Instruction Sheet 064214 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal Getting Started Guide 064183 TRAKKER Antares Application Development Tools System Manual 064433 TRAKKER Antares Optical Link Adapter Quick Reference Guide 065826 TRAKKER Antares TD2400 Communications Dock Quick Reference Guide 065555 TRAKKER Antares Terminal Emulation User s Guide 066694 TRAKKER Antares TZ2400 B
382. y command 2 42 9 34 default configuration definition G 9 list of 3 23 to 3 30 A 8 to A 11 reader command 8 8 restoring 3 19 6 6 default router 2 4 GHz RF network illustrated 4 6 to 4 8 configuration command 9 35 defined 4 18 determining when to configure 4 16 Delete File reader command 8 12 deleting files 8 12 density of bar code for scanning A 7 depth of field long range scan module A 7 standard range scan module A 7 Destructive RAM Test screen defined 7 13 developing applications 5 6 diagnostics Access Point screen defined 7 20 Application Efficiency screen defined 7 21 Application Events screen defined 7 7 Battery Monitor screen defined 7 10 TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual diagnostics continued Battery Status screen defined 7 11 Beeper Test screen defined 7 12 Clear Task Profiles screen defined 7 8 Destructive RAM Test screen defined 7 13 Diagnostics Menu using 7 5 Display Test screen defined 7 14 Error Logger screen defined 7 8 Hardware Configuration screen defined 7 15 Keypad Test screen defined 7 16 Malloc Application Information screen defined 7 22 Malloc Firmware Information screen defined 7 23 Radio Test screen defined 7 17 Scanner Test screen defined 7 18 Serial Loopback screen defined 7 19 Serial Port Test screen defined 7 24 Subsystem Versions screen defined 7 25 summary of 7 3 Suspend Resume screen defined 7 26 Task Stat
383. yboard IBM 5250 keyboard or VT ANSI keyboard Note The terminal emulation keypads are currently available in English only Finding the Special Keys Before you use the terminal s keypad make sure you can find all of the different types of keys on the keypad You need to use these special keys on all five keypad options The special keys that you use to type characters or perform functions are explained in the next sections You can use the Backlight key to turn on the backlight change the display contrast and change the beep volume For help see Adjusting the Screen From the Keypad later in this chapter Learning How to Use the Terminal Finding the Special Keys Scan button Suspend Resume 5 Sp Backlight key key 4 33 di Enter 1 E E B Fi OO ee Mb 8 Cursor keys OS Fi 7 8 9 4 5 6 i 1 2 3 Space Backspace ge key mex 0 FnL FnR Enter Function Left me key i cc E Enter key Function Right VOMOC N key 969090 C P 7 Q f R J S T 90 0 0 0 Caps l Ctrl z E Tab A Esc NL A ord Aere on Hl 242XU 004 Shift key Control key TRAKKER Antares 2420 and 2425 Hand Held Terminal User s Manual 2 6 How to Type the Characters Printed on the Keypad The TRAKKER Antares terminal keypad is easy t

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"